JP7459827B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally , as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, if a game ball that is equipped with a variable ball entry means and enters an internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, the player A pachinko machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous for players is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 11-197312

However, in conventional gaming machines, the game can easily become monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvement in entertainment value.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which can improve entertainment value .

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It had an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area. variable entry means;
special ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the inner area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state providing means capable of providing a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball enters the special ball entering means,
The variable ball entry means is configured such that only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area,
This gaming machine is
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
By changing the state to at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, the value for the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route that can flow down to the special ball entry means. configured to be able to change the value of a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means by a variable means that can change the value of the game ball,
The variable means is configured to perform a predetermined lottery result when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first chance entry means or the second opportunity entry means. configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a regulating means is provided that allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball to pass in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game ball that enters the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter;
This gaming machine is
After the predetermined lottery result is shown on the predetermined display means, a production that can perform a preliminary production during an operation standby period that can be set at least before the variable means controls the advantageous state. have the means,
The performance means is configured to be able to select the preceding performance to be executed in accordance with the operation standby period from among the plurality of types of preceding performances, when executing the preceding performance,
The ball passage is configured such that only one entrance area is provided, and only game balls that have passed through the entrance area can be guided to the specific area,
A game ball that does not pass through the entrance area of the ball path is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area,
This gaming machine is
A game ball that has passed through the specific area and flowed down the first route may or may not enter the second opportunity ball entry means,
The gist thereof is that the game ball that has passed through the specific area and flowed down the second route may or may not enter the first opportunity ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve interest .

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the inner frame and front frame set in an open state. A front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the start winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows propriety judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation time judgment processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry counting process. It is a flow chart showing special prize winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing non-special prize-winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the type ball entry process. It is a flowchart showing V winning jackpot setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a first display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing variable winning device control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a termination setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a blade member opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting winning part control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd display control process. It is a flow chart which shows bypass mechanism control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a remaining ball monitoring process. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. A front view of the central winning unit. 6A to 6C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route allocation member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a route allocation member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the rotating body unit. 1A is a front view showing the rotating body unit with the movable parts in a stored state, and FIG. 1B is a front view showing the rotating body unit with the movable parts in a protruding state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a housed state and its related configuration, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a protruding state and its related configuration. FIG. 11 is a front view for explaining a route allocation member and the like according to another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional front view for explaining a route allocation area and the like according to another embodiment. It is a flowchart showing starting winning pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th display control process. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the inner frame and front frame set in an open state. A front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a variable display unit. It is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state where the performance accessories unit has appeared. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reach determination process. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart showing game state check processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter, and a gaming state determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of a variation. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a second display control process. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used to determine decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display setting process. A diagram to explain the types of jackpots. A diagram showing the configuration of the first jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a second jackpot type determination table. (a) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. This is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table when a special jackpot occurs under normal conditions. It is a figure showing the composition of an opening-and-closing pattern control table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus in a normal state. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device when a jackpot occurs. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display device in chance mode. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device during gold mode. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a decorative pattern display device during a roulette performance. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of a decorative pattern display device when a pending display change process is performed. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the role object performance setting process. This is a flowchart showing part of the role-playing setting process, which is a continuation of Figure 98. (a) is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a table for determining an accessory performance pattern at the time of "end", and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of a table for determining a role model performance pattern at the time of "until next time". FIG. 7 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in a reduced diameter state. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in a diameter-reduced state. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in an expanded diameter state. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in an expanded diameter state. This is a cross-sectional view of line K-K in Figure 101. It is a front view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). This is a side view showing some of the lower movable parts (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation using an upper rotating body. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a stopped state (stopped state without enlarged display) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the first development effect pattern. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a stopped state (weak/SMALL enlarged stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the second development effect pattern. This is a schematic diagram showing one example of the stopped state (strong/SMALL expansion stopped state) of the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies in the third development performance pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an aspect of the stopped state (weak/BIG enlargement stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies concerning the 4th development production pattern. This is a schematic diagram showing one example of the stopped state of the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies (strong/BIG expansion stopped state) in the fifth development performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body according to another embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the state in which the inner frame and front frame are open. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, rear pack unit, etc. in an open state. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. (a) is a flowchart showing the first propriety judgment process, (b) is a flowchart showing the second propriety judgment process, and (c) is a flowchart showing the time saving propriety judgment process. 13 is a flowchart showing a type determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reach determination process. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. 3 is a flowchart showing firing permission command setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special display control process. A flowchart showing the first variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special display control process. A flowchart showing the second variable display setting process. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart showing specific prize winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows termination setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows general figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows ordinary figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the start prize section control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used for determining decorative patterns and the like. 13 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows suspension processing. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation stop processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device. (a) and (b) are time charts for explaining the flow of variable display, etc. in the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, and the effect display device.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in Fig. 3, etc., a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes its outer shell, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. However, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories arranged on the game board 30 surface, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted in Fig. 3.

As shown in FIG. 6, the outer frame 11 is made up of an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy extrusion. These frame components 11a to 11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape by removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right frame component 11d also has an extension wall 83 that protrudes from the rear end of the right frame component 11d toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extension wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

In addition, a resin valance panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the upper surface of the valance panel 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to form between the valance panel 87 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as its axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. can be stored in. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

A performance button 125 is provided to the left of the bottom tray 15. When the player presses the performance button 125, a specific performance is performed or the performance content is changed on the performance display device 42, which will be described later.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and projects toward the front. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown), an operation amount detection means (not shown) (variable resistor) for detecting an operation amount of the operation section of the handle 18, and the like.

When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, game balls are launched by the launching device 60 (described below) as a launching means, with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation. The handle 18 is also provided with a launch prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of game balls by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is being held. For this reason, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the launch of game balls, or to temporarily stop the launch of game balls while holding the handle 18.

An upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them in a row toward the launching device 60, which will be described later. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are dispensed are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. However, in pachinko machines in which game balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device, etc. to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary.

Furthermore, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) that is provided downstream of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicates with the lower tray 15 opens, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. In other words, the player can move the game balls in the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means are controlled to change their light emission state, such as turning on or blinking, depending on changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play.

For example, on the periphery of the window section 101, an annular illumination section 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the annular illumination section 102, which are turned on in the event of a predetermined error. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the annular illumination section 102 above each error display lamp 104 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately as in the conventional method, but is round overall and is assembled and then attached.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 (described later) to the discharge outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71).

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 etc. A launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched from the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39 (game board 30). In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60.

In the present embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60. The ball feeder 63 uses a driving means such as a solenoid to guide the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launcher 60.

In addition, the symbol 67 in Figures 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, so as to almost completely close the exit of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the dispensing passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart. A game ball can pass through the gap. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side, pass through the lower tray communication path 71, and are paid out to the lower tray 15. It happens.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion abutting the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, approximately the center of the front part of the game board 30, which becomes the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

The structure of the game board 30 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is made up of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. The rail 50 may also be used as a ball passage. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 4). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. The game ball fired with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30, for example.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the game board 30. Therefore, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53 serving as a regulating means, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the play area.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. The area in which the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged may be the specific area. If a game ball launched from the launch device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

The game board 30 also includes a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting ball entry means, and a through-ball winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b). A gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means, etc. are arranged in a through hole formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30.

Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) that detect game balls that have entered the various ball entry means, corresponding to the general winning section 31 and other ball entry means. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and a first starting switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32. A first starting winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the winning part 33a, a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting winning part 33b, and a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34. A through gate switch 225 is provided.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) into various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning section 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of balls are sent to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. A prize ball (game ball) is paid out. For example, if a ball enters the starting winning section 33, 3 prizes will be awarded, if a ball enters the general winning section 31, 5 prizes will be awarded, and if a ball enters the variable winning device 32, 10 prizes will be awarded. The ball is paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36, and game balls that do not win in the various winning means such as the general winning section 31 are discharged outside the game area through this outlet 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 4, FIGS. 40 to 45, etc.

The central winning unit 37 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area (gaming board 30). The central winning unit 37 includes a housing (center frame) 400 that forms an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. ing. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent member, and the internal area 401 is visible through the front panel 402.

A pair of ball entry openings 403 are formed on the upper part of the housing 400, which serve as entrances for game balls flowing down the game area to enter the internal area 401. The central winning unit 37 is also provided with a pair of blade members 404 on the left and right for opening and closing the ball entry openings 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. The "blade members 404" constitute the "opening and closing members" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is provided so as to be rotatably displaceable between a closed position in which the corresponding ball entry opening 403 is closed and an open position in which it is opened. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entrance opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is in the closed state, and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot enter). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (ball entry possible). becomes.

As will be described in detail later, the blade members 404 are opened for a predetermined time when a ball enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) and a small prize is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball. In other words, when a small prize is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b), this corresponds to a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) being met in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in sync with each other, so that when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position, the other is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 is divided into a route allocation area 406 where the game ball that enters through the ball entry opening 403 is first guided, a win/lose lottery area 407 located below it, a type lottery area 408 located further below that as a type lottery area, and a role activation lottery area 409 located to the right of the win/lose lottery area 407.

First, the route allocation area 406 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 40 to 42. The route allocation area 406 includes an introduction passage 601 that guides the game ball that entered the internal area 401 from the ball entrance opening 403 to the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400 and then guides it to the center of the route allocation area 406 in the left-right direction, a fall passage 602 that drops the game ball led out from the exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 that opens in the center of the left-right direction of the route allocation area 406 downward, a route allocation member 603 as a route allocation means provided at the bottom of the fall passage 602, a normal guide passage 604 that is provided to the left of the route allocation member 603 and can guide the game ball to the winning/losing lottery area 407, and a special guide passage (special passage) 605 that is provided to the right of the route allocation member 603 and can guide the game ball to the role activation lottery area 409.

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route", and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route".

A pair of left and right entrances 601b of the introduction passage 601 are each provided with an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means for detecting passage of a game ball entered from the ball entry opening 403.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b, and a game ball that enters the right ball entry opening 403 always passes through the right entrance 601b. The game ball is configured to pass through, and a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437.

Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route allocation member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having an axial hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece 613 protruding upward from the shaft portion 611, a left piece 614 protruding leftward from the shaft portion 611, and a right piece 615 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 611.

Axle pin 610 is inserted through shaft hole 611a of shaft portion 611. The rear end of the shaft pin 610 is supported by upper rear wall portion 400a that defines the rear side of fall passage 602, and the front end is supported by front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) that defines the front side of fall passage 602. As a result, route allocation member 603 is supported so as to be rotatable around shaft pin 610.

In addition, a protrusion 617 having a generally triangular shape in front view is formed at a lower position of the route allocation member 603. Under normal circumstances, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route allocation member 603 is maintained in a right-inclined state in which the central piece 613 is inclined to the right of the center position in the left-right direction (position of the pivot pin 610) and the right piece 615 is inclined downward from the horizontal direction by a biasing means (maintenance means) such as a weight or coil spring (not shown).

In such a rightward tilted state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the right side wall 602a of the falling passage 602, and the game ball falling down the falling passage 602 falls into the special guide passage 605 on the right side. At the same time, the liquid becomes in a state in which it cannot flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

In other words, under normal conditions when the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the right, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route distribution member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is opened, and the falling passage 602 is closed. The game ball is guided to the left side normal guide path 604 along the left side guide surface constituted by the left side surface of the center piece 613 and the upper surface of the left piece 614 of the route distribution member 603.

Accordingly, the route distribution member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball in contact with the left piece 614 [see FIG. 41(b) ].

As a result, for a predetermined period of time, the route distributing member 603 has a central piece 613 tilted to the left of the center position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610), a left piece 614 tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and a protrusion. The left inclined state is biased by the left inclined surface of the portion 617.

In this left-leaning state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the left side wall 602b of the falling passage 602, and the game ball falling down the falling passage 602 is directed to the left normal guide passage 604. At the same time, the liquid becomes in a state where it cannot flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

That is, during a predetermined period of time when the route distribution member 603 is in the leftward tilted state, the route distribution member 603 causes the normal guide passage 604 to be in a closed state, while the special guide passage 605 is in an open state. As a result, at this timing, a game ball falling down the falling path 602 (for example, as shown in FIG. If there is a game ball B2), the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side along the right guide surface formed by the right side surface of the center piece 613 of the route distribution member 603 and the upper surface of the right piece 615. It will be destroyed.

Once the route allocation member 603 is tilted to the left, it rotates clockwise due to the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the force from the game ball contacting the right piece 615 is also added) and returns to the normal right-inclined state (see Figure 41 (c)).

In this embodiment, the state in which the route allocation member 603 is in the first posture, which is a right-inclined posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route allocation member 603 is in the second posture, which is a left-inclined posture, corresponds to the second state. Also, in this embodiment, the states in which the route allocation member 603 can cause game balls to flow down the first route consisting of the normal guide passage 604, etc., or the second route consisting of the special guide passage 605, etc., such as the first state and the second state, constitute specific states. Of course, the specific states are not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the configuration of the accessory activation lottery area 409 will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the accessory activation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide path 605 can enter (pass through). The passage widths of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 are set to a width that allows each game ball to pass through. Furthermore, the game balls that have passed through the special gate 650 are discharged to the outside of the internal area 401 (to the back side of the game board 30) via a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 that detects game balls passing through it. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "trigger ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by this special gate switch 651, an activation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate a movable accessory 722, which will be described later. If the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined period of time. Details of the configuration and operation mode of the movable accessory 722 will be described later.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, no prize balls are paid out (0 prize balls). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651.

Next, the configuration of the winning/losing lottery area 407 will be described in detail. The winning/losing lottery area 407 is provided with a rotating body unit 410 as a winning/losing allocation means. The rotating body unit 410 has the function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided from the route allocation area 406 via the normal guide passage 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401. The passage width of the normal guide passage 604 is set to a width that allows the game balls to pass through one at a time.

As shown in Figures 43 and 44, the rotating unit 410 includes a unit base 411 that serves as the base, and a unit cover 412 that is attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side of the unit base 411.

A substantially disk-shaped rotating body 414 is attached to the unit base 411 on an installation base 413 formed protruding from the upper surface thereof, and a rotating body motor 415 for rotationally driving the rotating body 414 is attached. . On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotary body motor 415 to the rotary body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411 .

The rotating body 414 is installed so that its upper surface faces obliquely upward on the front side and the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. The rotating body motor 415 is constituted by a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main controller 261. Under such a configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a constant direction (counterclockwise in this embodiment) at a constant cycle.

The rotating body 414 has three pockets 416 formed around its outer periphery, each capable of receiving one game ball. The three pockets 416 are divided into one special pocket 416a and the other two non-special pockets 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416b is open to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 and above, and has a bottom wall portion 417. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer circumferential side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, the special pocket part 416a is open on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414, upward and downward, and does not have a bottom wall part 417 like the non-special pocket part 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a resin material colored differently from other portions. This makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the special pocket section 416a and the non-special pocket section 416b.

The unit cover 412 includes a substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 disposed to surround the rotating body 414, and a stage portion 432 formed to extend outward from the periphery of the cylindrical wall portion 431. ing.

The upper edge of the tube wall portion 431 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432, and a gate portion 435 is provided in front of it to connect the inner and outer circumferential sides of the tube wall portion 431.

The upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured to allow the game ball to roll. The portion of the stage portion 432 located behind the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the tube wall portion 431, and the portion located in front of the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the rear (toward the gate portion 435).

As a result, the game balls led out from the exit part 604a of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the middle rear wall part 400b of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the win/fail lottery area 407 and guided to the rear side of the stage part 432, While the movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall 431, it rolls clockwise or counterclockwise toward the front on the stage 432, and swings left and right multiple times in front of the gate 435. After that, when the relative positions of the gate portion 435 and the pocket portion 416 (special pocket portion 416a or non-special pocket portion 416b) of the rotating body 414 match, the rotary body enters into the pocket portion 416. .

Furthermore, the unit base 411 has a first V winning passage 427 for guiding the game balls accommodated in the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and a first V winning passage 427 for guiding the game balls accommodated in the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game balls accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b. An out passage 428 for discharging the inside area 401 is provided.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 with respect to the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotating body 414, that is, at a position to the right of the gate portion 435. On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream than the first V winning passage 427, that is, at the far right position of the first V winning passage 427.

The entrance side of the first V winning passage 427 opens on the top surface of the installation table 413, and is configured so that the pocket section 416 of the rotating body 414 can pass above it. A game ball that enters the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate section 435 falls downward from the special pocket section 416a and enters the first V winning passage 427 when the special pocket section 416a and the entrance section of the first V winning passage 427 coincide with each other as the rotating body 414 rotates. At the position corresponding to the first V winning passage 427, a cylindrical wall section 431 that protrudes downward from the back surface of the stage section 432 prevents the game ball from falling out from the side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, when a game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, even if the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 coincide with each other as the rotating body 414 rotates, the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b prevents the game ball contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b from falling (entering) into the first V winning passage 427.

In addition, at a position corresponding to the out passage 428, a notch 431a is formed in the lower edge of the tube wall 431. As a result, when the rotating body 414 rotates further and the position of the non-special pocket 416b containing the game ball matches the position of the out passage 428, the game ball contained in the non-special pocket 416b moves to the outer periphery of the rotating body 414 due to the inclination of the bottom wall 417, and falls (enters) into the out passage 428 through the notch 431a of the tube wall 431.

In addition, a connection passage 429 is formed in the housing 400, which is connected to the outlet of the first V winning passage 427, and the first V winning passage 427 and the type lottery area 408 are in communication with each other through the connection passage 429.

Further, the first V winning passage 427 is provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing therethrough. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. becomes. Therefore, the "1st V winning passage 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

In a jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the 1V winning passage 427, a prescribed time of 30 seconds passes after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. This is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined round) with one opening/closing operation until the closed state is set as one special prize state on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot states are set as a "3-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "15-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 15 times.

However, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects a ball entry, the jackpot state does not start immediately, but the jackpot state is started in the type lottery area 408. After the type of state is determined, the jackpot state is configured to start.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the special pocket part 416a of the rotary body 414 and passes through the 1V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is selected by type lottery. You will be guided to area 408.

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special entry ball detection switch 462 that detects game balls that pass through this and are discharged outside the internal area 401.

In addition, a protrusion 440 is provided on the upper edge of the tube wall 431 in a circumferentially specific section including above the entrances of the first V-winning passage 427 and the out passage 428, and is formed to extend toward the inner periphery of the tube wall 431.

The protruding portion 440 is configured to cover from above a portion of each pocket portion 416 located below it (an area approximately half the diameter of the rotating body 414). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which another game ball rides up on top of a game ball that has entered a specific pocket portion 416, causing the two game balls, one above the other, to enter the first V winning passage 427 or the out passage 428 in succession, or in which a game ball jumps over the tube wall portion 431 for some reason and enters directly into a pocket portion 416 that is located in a position that coincides with the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428.

As shown in Figures 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism 721 is provided at the rear of the rotating body unit 410. The bypass mechanism 721 includes a movable part 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening housing 433 formed at the most upstream part of the stage 432, and a movable part solenoid 725 as a movable member driving means for operating the movable part 722. The movable part solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by a main control device 261 constituting a movable body control means.

The movable part 722 is assembled so that it can slide (rise and fall) in the vertical direction. In normal operation when the movable part solenoid 725 is in a non-excited state, the movable part 722 is almost entirely housed within the opening housing 433, and its upper surface is generally continuous with the upper surface of the stage 432 (see Figures 44(a) and 45(a)). This housing state of the movable part 722 corresponds to the non-favourable state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is energized and the bypass mechanism section 721 is activated, the movable accessory 722 rises and enters a protruding state in which a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage section 432 [Fig. 44(b), see FIG. 45(b)]. The operation of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to a predetermined operation in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to an advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the upper surface of the movable accessory 722, there is a left inclined part 727 that gently slopes downward to the left from approximately the center in the left and right direction, and a right slope that slopes gently downward to the right from the approximately central part in the left and right direction. An inclined portion 728 is formed.

In a normal state when the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely housed in the opening housing portion 433, the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604 opens in the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable accessory 722. The game ball drawn out from 604a is guided to the left or right of the stage section 432 by the left inclined part 727 or right inclined part 728 on the upper surface of the movable accessory 722.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), a second V winning passage 730 is provided inside the movable accessory 722. The passage width of the second V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one.

When the movable part 722 is in a protruding state protruding from the stage portion 432, the movable part 722 blocks the front of the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604, and the entrance portion 730a of the second V winning passage 730 and the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604 face each other (see Figures 44(b) and 45(b)). This allows the game ball to enter the second V winning passage 730 from the normal guide passage 604, and both passages 604, 730 are connected.

In addition, in the protruding state in which the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage part 432, the outlet part 730b of the second V winning passage 730 is opposite to the inlet part 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the back side of the middle rear wall part 400b of the housing 400. It will be in a state where it is facing the direction. As a result, the game ball can enter from the second V winning passage 730 to the bypass passage 737, and both passages 730 and 737 are brought into communication.

In other words, when the movable part 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are connected via the second V winning passage 730 so that the game ball can pass through.

The passage width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one. Further, the outlet portion 737b of the bypass passage 737 opens into the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the type lottery area 408 at a position above the 15R ball entry port 731. As a result, in the protruding state where the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage part 432, the game balls guided to the normal guide path 604 are directly directed to the 15R without going through the rotary body unit 410 and the type distribution mechanism part 741 described later. It becomes possible to guide the ball to the entrance 731. That is, by operating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to avoid sorting by the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741.

The bypass passage 737 is provided with a second special ball entry detection switch 738 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing through the bypass passage 737. When a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted.

However, as will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, when a ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the jackpot state is not initiated immediately, but is instead initiated after the game ball enters the 15R ball entry port 731.

In addition, when the movable accessory 722 descends and returns to the accommodated state while the game balls remain in the second V winning passage 730, the remaining balls are guided to the bypass passage 737 via the lower passage 739. and is configured to be detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738, 10 game balls are dispensed onto the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15). Of course, the number of game balls dispensed in response to these ball entry detection switches is not limited to 10, and may be another number. Also, when a game ball is detected by these ball entry detection switches, no game balls may be dispensed (0 prize balls).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the 1st V winning passage 427" and "jackpot that occurs when a gaming ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the 2nd V winning passage 730" are common. This is sometimes referred to as a "V-winning jackpot."

Next, the type lottery area 408 will be explained in detail. In the type lottery area 408, there is a 15R ball entrance 731 where a jackpot state of "15 rounds" (15 rounds jackpot) is given when a game ball enters, and a "7 round" when a game ball enters. 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is given, and 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is given when a game ball enters the ball. It is provided. Here, the "15R ball entry port 731," the "7R ball entry port 732," and the "3R ball entry port 733" constitute the "type-based ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The 15R entrance 731 is provided with a 15R entrance detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that enters here. Similarly, the 7R entrance 732 is provided with a 7R entrance detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that enters here, and the 3R entrance 733 is provided with a 3R entrance detection switch 736 that detects a game ball that enters here.

In the type lottery area 408, the destination of the game ball guided to the type lottery area 408 via the 1V winning passage 427 and the connecting passage 429 is determined by the 15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entrance 732, or 3R ball entrance. A type sorting mechanism section 741 is provided as a type sorting means (type determining means) for sorting to one of the types 733.

The type sorting mechanism section 741 includes a starting board 742 to which game balls led out from the exit section 429a of the connection passage 429 are guided, a first passing board 744 to which game balls that have passed through the starting board 742 are guided, and A second spanning board 745 to which the game ball that has passed through the first spanning board 744 is guided; and a 15R guide where the gaming ball that has passed through the second spanning board 745 is guided and which guides the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731. A passage 746 is provided.

The starting platform 742 is located in the upper left corner of the type selection area 408, and its top surface slopes downward to the right.

The first gang plate 744 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the starting platform 742, and its left end is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction as an axis, and the right end is a free end. It is being

The rotation axis of the first span plate 744 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor etc. on the back side of the lower rear wall 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The first spanning plate 744 is configured to be oscillated up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the first crossing plate 744 is configured so that its upper surface is slightly inclined downward to the right, allowing it to move between a forward position where it guides the game ball to the second crossing plate 745, and a drop position where its upper surface is inclined more downward than this, allowing it to guide the game ball to the 3R ball entrance 733.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first spanning board 744 via the starting platform 742 rolls to the right end of the first spanning board 744, if the first spanning board 744 is at the forwarding position, The game ball is guided to the second passing board 745.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the first crossing plate 744 rolls to the right end of the first crossing plate 744, if the first crossing plate 744 is in the above-mentioned drop position, the game ball is guided to the 3R ball entrance 733.

In other words, the first crossing board 744 has the function of directing the destination of the game ball guided via the starting platform 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second crossing board 745.

The second spanning board 745 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the first spanning board 744, and its left end is rotatably supported with the front-rear direction as an axial direction, and the right end is a free end. It is set in.

The rotation axis of the second bridge plate 745 is connected to a swing mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swing mechanism is driven and controlled by the main control device 261, so that the second bridge plate 745 swings up and down.

Specifically, the second crossing plate 745 is configured so that its upper surface is slightly inclined downward to the right, allowing it to move between a forward position where it guides the game ball to the 15R guide passage 746, and a drop position where its upper surface is inclined more significantly downward, allowing it to guide the game ball to the 7R ball entrance 732.

Then, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 745 rolls to the right end of the second spanning board 745, if the second spanning board 745 is at the above-mentioned forwarding position, the game ball will move to the 15R guidance path. You will be guided to 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 745 rolls to the right end of the second spanning board 745, if the second spanning board 745 is at the above-mentioned falling position, the game ball enters the 7R ball. It is guided to the mouth 732.

In other words, the second spanning board 745 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided through the first spanning board 744 to either the 7R ball entrance 732 or the 15R guiding path 746.

The 15R guide passage 746 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the second spanning plate 745, and its upper surface is inclined downward toward the 15R ball entry opening 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first spanning board 744 and the second spanning board 745 are configured to swing at different periods. For example, the first spanning plate 744 is configured to swing slightly faster than the second spanning plate 745.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734, the 7R ball detection switch 735, or the 3R ball detection switch 736 after the first special ball detection switch 461 detects a ball, a jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. Also, if a ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734 after the second special ball detection switch 738 detects a ball, a jackpot state corresponding to a 15-round jackpot is started.

Now, we return to the explanation of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. 4, the first start winning section 33a is provided to the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37. The second start winning section 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37.

Furthermore, the second starting prize part 33b is provided with a pair of opening/closable starting opening opening/closing members 33c on both sides thereof. In this embodiment, when the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is configured to be unable to enter the second starting winning part 33b.

In other words, the first start winning section 33a is always open to game balls, whereas the second start winning section 33b opens the start opening opening member 33c when a game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the ball entry assist lottery, allowing the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

In addition to this, when the start opening opening/closing member 33c is in a closed state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b, and when the ball entry assist lottery is won, the start opening opening/closing member 33c is in an open state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

As described above, the first starting prize winning section 33a is provided with the first starting winning switch 224a that detects the game ball that has entered there. Similarly, the second starting winning section 33b is provided with a second starting winning switch 224b that detects a game ball that has entered there. Each starting winning switch 224a, 224b constitutes a "starting ball entering detection means" in this embodiment.

Then, as will be described in more detail later, when a game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, a lottery is held to determine whether the ball will be a "win" advantageous to the player or a "miss."

The "win" in the winning/losing lottery can be a "small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened, or a "big win" in which the large winning opening opening member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning lottery is conducted based on ball entry detection by the first starting prize switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b, the result of the winning lottery is shown on a special display device 43, which will be described later. A fluctuating display and a stop display are performed for this purpose.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common winning lottery is performed in the case where the first starting winning switch 224a detects the ball entering and when the second starting winning switch 224b detects the ball entering. , the common special display device 43 is configured so that a variable display is performed, but the first start-up prize switch 224a performs a variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery conducted based on the detection by the first winning prize switch 224a. It is also possible to separately provide the special display device and a second special display device on which a variable display is performed for teaching the result of the winning/losing lottery performed based on the detection by the second starting winning switch 224b. The first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b may be used as the first or second opportunity ball hitting detection means. Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, each variable display is separately held and stored, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is given priority over the other. It may be configured so that In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratios of the types of jackpot states that are awarded when winning in the lottery may be different or may be the same.

In the game area on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, a flow-down area is formed through which the game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in the flow-down area on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured so that the game balls flowing down can pass through them one by one. The flow-down area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be the first flow-down route, which is the first route, and the flow-down area on the left side may be the second flow-down route, which is the second route. In addition, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that detects the game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the through gate switch 225 detects a game ball, a ball entry assist lottery is held to determine whether or not the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is opened. When the ball entry assist lottery is won, the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

At the upper right of the game board 30, there is a through-gate display device (normal symbol display device) 41 that displays the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery based on the ball entering (passing the ball) into the through gate 34, and each starting prize section. A special display device (special symbol display device) 43 that displays the lottery results of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the special gates 33a and 33b, and a lottery for the activation assist lottery based on the ball entering the special gate 650 (passing the ball) A special gate display device 44 is provided to display the results. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 constituting the first display means is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps.

The configuration of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be configured, for example, with a different number of lamp groups, or may be configured with different display devices such as a seven-segment display device, a dot display device, or a liquid crystal display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), a variable display (switching) for teaching the lottery result of the winning lottery. display) is started, and when the fluctuating display is stopped after a predetermined period of time, an aspect corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed. The first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b may be used as the first or second opportunity winning means. Further, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the results of the winning lottery are displayed definitively.

If you win a jackpot in such a winning lottery, after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the specified time of 30 seconds must elapse or the variable winning device 32 must be closed. A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a "direct hit jackpot") that is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), with one opening and closing operation until the closed state is treated as one special prize state, on the condition that the specified number of 8 game balls enter the prize. ) will be given.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, only when a "big hit" is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b). When the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 through the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special entry ball detection switch 461, or when the movable accessory 722 ( A jackpot state (V winning jackpot) also occurs when a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730) and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b) during the variable display on the special display device 43, the corresponding variable display will change. , is configured to be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that time ends. In other words, the variable display on the special display device 43 is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is , a total of up to four fluctuation displays are suspended.

Further, the number of hold times in the variable display of the special display device 43 is displayed by lighting on a special display device hold lamp 47 provided near the special display device 43. The hold lamp 47 for the special display device of this embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of holds is taught by appropriately switching the lighting/extinguishing state of each lamp.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting prize section 33 during a jackpot or small win, the variable display for that amount will also be suspended, and the variable display will be executed after the jackpot or small win state ends. be done.

In the through gate display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. When doing so, an aspect corresponding to the result of the input assist lottery is displayed. Here, if the lottery result of the entry assist lottery is a winning result corresponding to the opening of the starting port opening/closing member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display device 41, and the variable display is stopped. After that, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened. In addition, the display contents of the through gate display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed definitively.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 while the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, the change display for that portion will be displayed after the current change display has ended. In other words, the change display of the through gate display device 41 will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of times that the change display can be held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times are held, and the number of times that are held is displayed by lighting the through gate hold lamp 48 provided near the through gate display device 41. In this embodiment, the through gate hold lamp 48 is composed of four lamps, and the number of holds is indicated by appropriately switching the on/off state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. At that time, an aspect corresponding to the result of the operation assist lottery is displayed. Here, if the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is a winning result that activates the movable accessory 722, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44, and after the variable display is stopped, the movable accessory 722 is activated. Accessory object 722 is activated. Further, the display contents of the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the actuation assist lottery is displayed definitively.

Although more details will be given later, in this embodiment, even if a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the change in display (the result of the operation assist lottery) for that part is not withheld.

Furthermore, an effect display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37. The effect display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the effect display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43. The display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable prize winning device 32 is arranged at the lower center of the gaming area (gaming board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter prizes, and when a jackpot situation occurs, the grand prize opening/closing member 32a is opened and the game ball can enter the grand prize opening. It is assumed to be in an open state.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5, 6, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6, a frame cover 213 made of resin is provided on the back side of the game board 30 to protrude rearward and cover the central winning unit 37 and the like from behind. Furthermore, a display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are detachably attached to the back side of the frame cover 213.

The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In addition, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the insides can be seen.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning section 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning means. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

The back frame set 215 is further provided with a first board relay board (not shown) which is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 etc. and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a second panel relay board (not shown) that is electrically connected to various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board relay board includes an internal ball entry detection switch 437, a first special ball entry detection switch 461, a non-special ball entry detection switch 462, a round ball entry detection switch (15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 734, It is electrically connected to a ball detection switch 735, a 3R ball entry detection switch 736), a second special ball entry detection switch 738, and a special gate switch 651, respectively. This second board relay board is to relay various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main control device 261, and like the first board relay board, it is connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. electrically connected.

In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which detect the entry of a ball into the start winning sections 33a and 33b, are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

With the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are input to the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown, a large prize opening solenoid that drives the large prize opening opening member 32a to open and close is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 by the variable prize winning device 32, and a start opening solenoid that drives the pair of start opening opening members 33c to open and close is provided in the second start winning section 33b. The back frame set 215 also has a third board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids to the main control unit 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is provided with multiple external connection terminals for relaying various information transmissions to the hall computer of the gaming hall, etc., and is not labeled for convenience. For example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, time-saving mode, etc.), terminals for outputting information regarding the opening of the front frame set 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91, 92 described below, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no ball in the tank error, and payout error, and terminals for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It happens.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further downstream of the tank rail 356, a vertical case rail 357 is connected. connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is also provided with a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24 V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed.

That is, the game balls won by each winning means such as the general winning section 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any winning means are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked state. It is being

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and is fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened remains.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

The power supply 313 is further provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, since the state before the power outage is stored and retained when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall closes), if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323.

As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. The inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launching device 60), and as shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be inserted and removed from the switch main body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward, and the inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces backward. When the detection unit is in a state where it protrudes from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is inserted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control device 261. In other words, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The main control device 261 constitutes the special game state granting means and opening/closing control means in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all data stored in the stack area, working area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a through gate display device 41, a special display device 43, a special gate display device 44, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41, special display device 43, and special gate display device 44 described above are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a counting switch 223, starting winning switches 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, an internal ball entry detection switch 437, Various detection switches, various substrates, and blades that can constitute predetermined detection means such as special ball entry detection switches 461, 738, non-special ball entry detection switches 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651. A blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the member 404, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a movable accessory solenoid 725 that moves the movable accessory 722 up and down, a first spanning board 744, and a second spanning board 745. Various electrical parts such as motors are connected to the That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It is equipped with a RAM 553, which is a memory that temporarily stores various data, etc. when executing the program, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. It is equipped with The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a production button 125, various illumination parts, and lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (e.g., a performance pattern command such as a variation pattern command) sent from the main control device 261, and causes the performance display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not there is a win, and the performance display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays information in accordance with the display of the special display device 43.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off, so that when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, like the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SK1 is input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a process to be performed during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state is restored to before the power was cut off, and is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the memory area. When commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the buffer returns to the beginning of the memory area and updates the commands. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the launch device 60 is operated under the conditions that a launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the launch prohibition button 18a (see FIG. 1) that stops the launch is not operated, and game balls are launched at predetermined intervals with a strength according to the amount of operation of the handle 18. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to launch at intervals of approximately 0.6 seconds (approximately 100 balls per minute).

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the start winning switches 224a and 224b, there is a jackpot that opens the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a), and a jackpot that opens the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404). ) A win/fail random number counter C1 used in a win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small win that opens the ``win'', and a variable time selection counter used to determine the time of variable display (fluctuating time) performed on the special display device 43. C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the win/fail random number counter C1, and the detection of the through gate switch 225, whether to open the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c). Entering assist random number counter C3 used in the ball entering assist lottery to determine whether or not to actuate the ball, and activation assist random number used in the activation assist lottery to determine whether or not to activate the movable accessory 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651. A counter C4 is used.

Counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the input assist random number counter C3 is stored. It is provided. Both the special fluctuation holding area and the normal fluctuation holding area include one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, in each of the special variable hold areas, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored in chronological order in accordance with the winning history of the game balls in the first and second start winning sections 33a and 33b. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total, as described above.

Furthermore, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the through gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 399, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (i.e., 399), it returns to the lower limit value of 0 as the opening value. Normally, when the win/no-win random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/no-win random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/no-win random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the win/no-win random number counter C1 is stored in the win/no-win random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (the timing when detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing lottery, which is conducted based on the value of the winning/losing random number counter C1 stored in the special variable reserve area, produces one of the following lottery results: "small win," "big win," or "loss." The winning/losing lottery process related to the big win lottery and small win lottery constitutes the opening lottery process in this embodiment.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of random numbers that result in a "jackpot" is one, and the value is "0." In other words, there is a 1/400 probability of winning a "jackpot," and the special display device 43 displays a stop display in a manner that corresponds to a "jackpot" (a combination of lit lamps), resulting in a 15-round jackpot state.

Further, the number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 398, and the values are "2 to 399". In other words, the probability of winning a "small win" is 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" in this embodiment includes a "short small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Therefore, among the values of the win/loss random number counter C1, "2 to 21" corresponds to a "long small win", and "22 to 399" corresponds to a "short small win".

When a "short small win" is won, the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a "short small win", and the blade members 404 open for 0.5 seconds. When a "long small win" is won, the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a "long small win", and the blade members 404 open for 1.5 seconds. Here, the opening/closing pattern determination means in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 which executes the small win lottery and the big win lottery, and which determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing members such as the blade members 404.

In addition, the value of the win/lose random number counter C1, "1", corresponds to a "lose", and in the event of a "lose", the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) that corresponds to a "lose".

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a win/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or "big win."

In addition, in this embodiment, after the big win state ends, a game state is provided in which the time (variation time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. This game state ends when the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43 even if the next big win state does not occur after the big win state ends, and then returns to the normal game state.

Hereinafter, a gaming state in which the varying time of the special display device 43 is shortened will be referred to as a "time reduction mode", and a normal gaming state in which a normal varying display is performed in which the varying time is not shortened will be referred to as a "normal mode". The specific variation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" and the "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time-saving mode", the start opening opening/closing member 33c of the second start winning section 33b is opened relatively frequently, resulting in a "high ball entry state" in which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b. As a result, in the "time-saving mode", it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b, compared to the "normal mode" in which the start opening opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened, resulting in a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

Specifically, in "normal mode", the through gate display device 41, which displays the results of the entry ball assist lottery that is held based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34, has a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and the opening time of the start opening opening member 33c when the entry ball assist lottery is won is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in "time-shortened mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the start opening opening member 33c when the entry ball assist lottery is won is 2 seconds.

That is, in the "time reduction mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is shorter and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c is longer than in the "normal mode". Since the time period during which the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the open state becomes longer, game balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33b more frequently, and successive drawings are made continuously. The balls will hold up well.

In this way, in the "time saving mode", if the pending variable display on the special display device 43 successively wins a small win (after closing the blade member 404 and performing the variable display, Although the flow of opening is the same, since the fluctuation time is short), the blade members 404 are opened almost continuously (in rapid succession). For this reason, it is easy to cause a plurality of game balls to enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 all at once.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small win (short small win and long small win)" in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33, and the probability of winning a "small win (short small win)" The opening time of the blade member 404 at the time of occurrence of "small hit and long small hit" is the same in both modes (time reduction mode and normal mode).

Furthermore, the probability of winning the entry assist lottery based on the passing of a game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the actuation assist lottery based on the passing of a game ball to the special gate switch 651 will not be disclosed. The same is true for both modes.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), the variable time selection counter buffer The stored value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the special variable reservation area of the RAM 503.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the case of a "small win" in the win/lose lottery in "normal mode" is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds." The fluctuation time selection table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 corresponds to a "2-second fluctuation" or a "3-second fluctuation" is pre-stored in ROM 502. Therefore, ROM 502 that stores the fluctuation time selection table and the like constitutes the first fluctuation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

In addition, the variation time of the special display device 43 in the case of a "big hit" or "miss" in the lottery in the "normal mode" is "7 seconds".

On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" is uniformly "0.1 seconds" regardless of the result of the lottery ("small win", "big win", or "miss"). . Note that the variation time related to the special display device 43 is not limited to the four variations of 2 second variation, 3 second variation, 7 second variation, and 0.1 second variation according to this embodiment, and different variation times may be adopted. You may.

Furthermore, the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The ball entering assist random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the ball entering assist random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. Ru.

Normally, there are eight random number values that can be won, and the range is from 1 to 8. When the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, the through gate display device 41 displays a variable display for a predetermined period of time, and then stops in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to winning or losing. A display is performed, and if the prize is won, the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is kept open for a predetermined period of time.

The activation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19). The activation assist random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is obtained when the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

Normally, there are 15 random numbers that can be winning, ranging from 1 to 15. When the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, a fluctuating display is performed for a predetermined period of time on the special gate display device 44, and then a stationary display is performed in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a win or loss, and if a win occurs, the movable role 722 of the bypass mechanism 721 is in a protruding state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the activation assist lottery constitutes the activation lottery process in this embodiment, and the "lottery process execution means" and "state lottery means" are constituted by the functions of the main control device 261 that executes the activation assist lottery.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, here, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, followed by the main processing.

Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and stores the detected information. Incidentally, when the game ball is paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to this is added, and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process is immediately terminated. In addition, in the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. Further, upon outputting this prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win/fail random number counter C1, variable time selection counter C2, entry assist random number counter C3, and actuation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, each "399", "9", "9", "19"), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Then, in step S304, a start winning process is executed in response to a winning in the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b), in step S305, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the game ball passing through the through gate 34, and in step S306, a ball counting process is executed in response to the ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

In the following step S307, special winning processing is executed in response to detection by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 (ball entering the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or detection by the second special ball entry detection switch 738 (ball entering the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730 of the movable device 722).

Furthermore, in step S308, a non-special winning process is executed in response to detection by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 (ball entering the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414), and in step S309, , executes special gate passage processing as the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

After that, in step S310, the type ball entry process is executed in accordance with the detection by the round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (ball entry into the 15R ball entry port 731, 7R ball entry port 732, and 3R ball entry port 733). , temporarily end the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the starting winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13.

In addition, the execution area of the special variable pending area and each pending area are provided with a win/lose random number storage area that stores the value of the win/lose random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area that stores the value of the variable time selection counter C2, and a start winning discrimination flag for determining whether the pending variable display is based on a ball entering either the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b.

In addition, in the special fluctuation reservation area in this embodiment, apart from the area for storing the values of the above-mentioned win/fail random number counter C1 and fluctuation time selection counter C2, in the win/fail lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, "jackpot" is included. A jackpot flag indicating that you have won ``, a losing flag indicating that you have won, a long small win flag indicating that you have won a ``long small win,'' a short flag that indicates that you have won a short small win. A small hit occurrence flag is provided. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag indicating the variation time on the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the entry of game balls into the first and second starting winning parts 33a and 33b is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S501, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If the answer is no in step S502, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, where the reserved counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step S504, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process in step S303 above are stored in the first empty reserve area of the special variable reserve area. Here, the specified condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special variable reserve area during a specified jackpot state. Alternatively, the specified condition may be satisfied with a specified percentage, for example a 60% probability, when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special variable reserve area during a specified jackpot state.

In step S505, the start winning discrimination flag of the reserved area in which the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on. In this embodiment, the start winning discrimination flag is set to on when the reserved variable display is based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33a, and is set to off when the held variable display is based on a ball entering the second start winning section 33b.

In the next step S506, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win." The win/loss determination process will be described in detail later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variation time determination process is performed to determine the variation time in the special display device 43 based on the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Note that details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S508, the first command setting process is performed. In addition, in the starting command, the stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) is determined whether the ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b. It includes information indicating whether the variation information is based on the base, information indicating "small win" or "big win", information indicating variation time, etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). be done.

Here, the details of the hit/miss determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. 14. Note that in this embodiment, the hit/miss determination process also determines the type of small hit (long small hit, short small hit).

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area matches "0", which is the value corresponding to a "jackpot". The specified condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to a specific jackpot, such as a guaranteed jackpot, that may result in a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or high support mode after the end of the jackpot state, are stored in the special variable reserve area during a specific jackpot state. Then, if the determination is affirmative in step S5101, i.e., if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S5101 is negative, step S5103 determines whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable pending area is equal to "1", which is the value corresponding to a "lose". If the result of step S5103 is positive, i.e., if it is determined to be a "lose", the loss flag is turned on in step S5104, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that it is a "long small win", in step S5105, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is changed to "long small win". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "win". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the long small hit occurrence flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined that it is a "short small win", the short small win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process is ended.

Next, the fluctuation time determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. The function of executing the fluctuation time determination process of step S507 constitutes the first fluctuation pattern selection means in this embodiment.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode is selected. If the result of step S5201 is affirmative, in step S5202, a 0.1-second fluctuation flag is set to ON, indicating that the fluctuation time of the variable display displayed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds, and then this process ends. In other words, if the time-saving mode is selected, the fluctuation time of the corresponding variable display is always set to 0.1 seconds, regardless of whether the result of the win/lose lottery is a big win, a long small win, a short small win, or a miss.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5201 is negative, then in step S5203, it is determined whether or not a long small win occurrence flag was set in the immediately preceding win/loss determination process. If the result of step S5203 is positive, i.e., if it is determined to be a "long small win," then in step S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either "0" or "1."

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is one of "2 to 9", in step S5205, the variable time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43 After turning on the 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish.

If the result of step S5203 is negative, then in step S5207, it is determined whether the short small win occurrence flag is on. If the result of step S5207 is positive, i.e., if a "short small win" occurs, then in step S5208, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either "0" or "1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5205, a 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5208 is negative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. That is, the possibility that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected is higher when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

If the result of step S5207 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," then in step S5209, the 7-second fluctuation flag, which indicates that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is 7 seconds, is turned on, and then the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, after the processing of step S508, or if a negative judgment is made in step S502, in step S509, it is judged whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning section 33b based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If a negative judgment is made in step S509, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made, in step S510, the pending counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step S511, each value of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas of the special variable holding area. In step S512, a validity determination process is performed. Note that the validity determination process in step S512 is the same as the validity determination process in step S506 above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the next step S513, a variable time determination process is performed. Note that the correct/incorrect determination process in step S513 is similar to the variable time determination process in step S507 above, and a detailed description is omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a setting process for the preceding command is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If the result of step S601 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S601 is positive, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc, which counts the number of holds in the variable display performed on the through gate display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S602 is positive, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, then the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the input assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas in the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended.

Next, the ball entry counting process in step S306 will be explained with reference to FIG. 17. First, in step S7201, a game ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 by determining whether or not there is a detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the entrance part 601b of the introduction passage 601. Determine whether or not it was done. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, a ball entry command is set for the sub-control device 262 to notify that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 side receives a ball entering command, it outputs a ball entering sound effect and lights and blinks a ball entering lamp (not shown) to inform the player that a ball has entered. It is configured to notify.

Thereafter, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for grasping the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by 1. In the subsequent step S7204, a monitoring timer setting process that is taken into consideration in the remaining ball monitoring process is performed. In this embodiment, each time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected, the monitoring timer is set to "10000". Furthermore, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the monitoring timer, "10000" is overwritten. Note that the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212 to be described later) performed every 4 mec. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. 18. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information from the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7301 is positive, then in step S7302, the jackpot flag described below is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If the result of step S7302 is positive, then this process is terminated. In other words, during the jackpot state, even if a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, or if a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 through the movable role 722 (second V winning passage 730) and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate the corresponding jackpot state is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, in step S7303, the special winning flag indicating that the first special ball entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball entering detection switch 738 has detected the ball entering has already been set. Determine whether it is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the process ends immediately. That is, in a state where it has already been decided to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 is activated again. Even if a ball is detected, the corresponding jackpot will be invalidated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7303 is negative, the special winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then the process ends.

In this embodiment, at the stage when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects the ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and it is not clear what type of jackpot state will be given. Since this has not yet been determined, the jackpot state is configured not to start until the type is determined.

Similarly, at the stage when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects the ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and the game ball has not yet entered the 15R ball entry opening 731. Therefore, the jackpot state is not started until the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 and the "15 round jackpot" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is ejected to the outside of the central winning unit 37 (inner area 401) via the out passage 428. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7402, and then this process is ended.

Next, the special gate passing process in step S309 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 20.

In step S7501, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, then in step S7502, it is determined whether or not a third display flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. It is determined whether or not the display device 44 is displaying a variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7502 is negative, then in step S7503, it is determined whether or not a feature operation flag (described later) is on, i.e., whether or not the movable feature 722 is in operation (protruding state). If the result of step S7503 is positive, then this process is terminated.

As a result, even if a game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, The activation assist lottery is invalidated, and the configuration is such that the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7503, in step S7504, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in a predetermined operation assist random number storage area set in the RAM 503. do.

In the following step S7505, the special gate passing flag is turned on, and in step S7506, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then the process ends.

Next, the type entry process of step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether the special winning flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7601 is positive, then in step S7602, it is determined whether or not the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7602 is positive, then in step S7603, the 15R jackpot flag, which indicates a 15-round jackpot, is set to ON. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S7602 is negative, then in step S7605, it is determined whether or not the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7605 is positive, then in step S7606, the 7R jackpot flag, which indicates a 7-round jackpot, is set to ON. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the process is terminated.

If the determination in step S7605 is negative, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 detects the ball entry. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, a 3R jackpot flag indicating a 3-round jackpot is set on in step S7609. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control device 261 at the time of the power outage to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and starts the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12. The contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Execute wait processing for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process moves to step S111 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step S111 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step S111.

In the process of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return to the initial state when you turn on the power, for example when the hall opens for business, you turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process moves to RAM 503 initialization processing (step S112, etc.). That is, in step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared. In step S109, a command is sent to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps S201 to S212 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, external output processing is performed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings of the special display device 43 and the second start-up winning section 33b, etc., updated in the previous processing, and to transmit output data such as commands to each control device on the sub side.

For example, when starting a variable display on the performance display device 42, a variable pattern command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In other words, the variable pattern command is a command signal that is output to the sub-control device 262 to cause the performance display device 42 to perform a display performance that matches the display performed on the special display device 43. In response to this, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variable pattern command determines the display mode of the performance display device 42 based on the command, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display that display mode on the performance display device 42.

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the effect display device 42, a confirmation command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In response, the sub-control device 262 that has input the confirmation command instructs the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display effect) being performed on the effect display device 42 based on the command. put out.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, if the jackpot is in progress, or if the right to jackpot has been granted but the jackpot has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is open. (during a small hit state), the configuration is such that the subtraction process of the first display timer that measures the fluctuation time on the special display device 43 is not performed (see FIG. 23), so if the special display device 43 If ball entry is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 during the variable display of the effect display device 42 and the special winning flag is turned on, the special winning flag is turned on. The confirmation command will not be sent to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the flag ends, and will be sent after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the next step S204, a V-winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a jackpot is set based on the game ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, entering the first V-winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and being detected by the first special ball-entry detection switch 461, or entering the bypass passage 737 via the movable role 722 (second V-winning passage 730) and being detected by the second special ball-entry detection switch 738. Details of this V-winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special display device 43 and the control contents of the special display device 43 are set, and the hit determination and performance pattern on the performance display device 42 are also set. Details of this first display control process will be described later. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the first display control process constitutes the first display control means in this embodiment.

In step S206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32 and the control content of the variable winning device 32 are set. As a result, when a jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, a blade member opening/closing process is executed. In this process, the control details of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the through-gate display device 41, the control details of the through-gate display device 41, etc. are set. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step S209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the start opening opening member 33c of the second start winning section 33b are set. The start winning section control process will be described in detail later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special gate display device 44, the control contents of the special gate display device 44, etc. are set. Details of this third display control process will be described later. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the third display control process constitutes a display control means in this embodiment.

In step S211, a role-playing device drive control process for the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this process, drive control process for the rotating body unit 410, drive control process for the bypass mechanism 721, drive control process for the type allocation mechanism 741, etc. are performed.

For example, in the drive control process for the rotating body unit 410, control is performed such as rotating the rotating body 414 in a counterclockwise direction at a constant speed, and in the drive control process for the type allocation mechanism 741, control is performed such as swinging the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm.

In addition, in the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721, when a predetermined condition is met, control is performed such as protruding the movable part 722. Details of the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721 (hereinafter referred to as the "bypass mechanism control process") will be described later.

In step S212, remaining ball monitoring processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to confirm whether or not a game ball exists in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. Details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S213, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214 it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process moves to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215, where the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. After this process, the process moves to step S213. In other words, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S212 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the random number counter C1).

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S216 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S216, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S217, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step S218. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step S219, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S220, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S221, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

The processing of step S213 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to changes in the game state performed in steps S201 to S212, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of step S215 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle, and storage can be facilitated. In addition, when returning to the state before the power interruption, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so recovery can be easily performed, and the processing burden of the main control device 261 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data at the time of the power interruption from being changed, and the state before the power interruption can be reliably stored.

Next, the V winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag (see the special winning process in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the first special winning detection switch 461 or the second special winning detection switch 738 is on. If the determination in step S1501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503, and it is determined whether or not a 15R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, a round number counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds in the jackpot state is set to "15", and then the process moves to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special winning flag is turned off, and the jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is in progress is set on. Thereafter, in the subsequent step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 is in progress is set to ON, and in step S1507, the first variable timer used for the opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 is set to ON. 7500'', and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to ``8'', and the process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not a 7R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the round number counter is set to "7" in step S1510, and then the process moves to step S1505, where the same processing as described above is performed.

If the result of step S1509 is negative, then in step S1513, it is determined whether or not the 3R jackpot flag, which indicates that a game ball has been detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, is set to on. If the result of step S1513 is negative, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S1513, the round number counter is set to "3" in step S1514, and then the process proceeds to step S1505, where the same process as above is performed.

Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S801, a jackpot flag is referred to to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot is in progress, the process ends immediately. That is, during the jackpot state, a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already been started is not ended.

The jackpot state includes the period during the jackpot state (special game state), the opening period before the jackpot state starts, and the ending period after the jackpot state ends. In general, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display on the special display device 43 stops in a manner corresponding to a jackpot to when the first opening starts on the variable winning device 32), the performance display device 42 displays a message informing the user of the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, during the ending period (a predetermined period after the opening of the final round on the variable winning device 32 has ended), the performance display device 42 displays a message informing the user of the end of the jackpot state and the mode that will be assigned after the jackpot.

If the result of step S801 is negative, then in step S802 it is determined whether the special winning flag is on or not. The special winning flag is set to on when a game ball is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and is set to off when the jackpot flag is set to on (see step S1505 of the V-winning jackpot setting process). If the result of step S802 is positive, then this process is terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, no new variable display is started, and no variable display that has already started is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the small win opening flag is set on. As will be described in detail later, the small win open flag is turned on when the wing member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, that is, during the small win state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the process ends immediately. That is, while the central winning unit 37 is open (during a small winning state), a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already been started is not ended.

On the other hand, if the answer is negative in step S803, the setting status of the first display flag is checked in step S804 to determine whether or not a change is being displayed on the special display device 43. If the first display flag is set to on, it is considered that a change is being displayed, and if the first display flag is set to off, it is considered that a change is not being displayed. As will be described in more detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the change display on the special display device 43 starts (see step S808), and is turned off when the change display on the special display device 43 is stopped (see step S812).

If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, the jackpot state is not in progress, the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, and the central winning unit 37 is being opened (small win state). If the special display device 43 is not in the state of change) or is not in the process of variable display on the special display device 43, the process advances to step S805, and the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of hold times in the change display triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting winning section 33 is determined. Determine whether it is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no variable display is stored on hold, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is stored on hold, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Na in step S806.

In the following step S807, processing for shifting the data stored in the special fluctuation holding area is executed. This shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and from the second pending area to the pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area. In addition, in this shift process, not only the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, but also the values of the jackpot occurrence flag, the miss flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2 second fluctuation flag, and the 3 second The on/off settings of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the next step S808, the variable display setting process is performed. Details of the variable display setting process are now described with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether the variable information corresponds to a "jackpot" by determining whether the jackpot occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on. As a modified example, it is also possible to once again refer to the win/loss determination table in the same manner as in the win/loss determination process of the start winning process, and determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "0", which is a value corresponding to a jackpot.

If the result of step S901 is positive, i.e., if the player wins the "jackpot" in the win/lose lottery, then in step S902, a direct jackpot flag is set to ON, indicating that the player has won the "jackpot" in the win/lose lottery (a "direct jackpot"). After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area is set to ON.

If the result of step S903 is affirmative, then in step S904, a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S905, a value "1750" equivalent to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S903 is negative, then in step S906, a variation pattern (jackpot shortened pattern) that shortens the variation time to result in a jackpot is determined, and a variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S907, a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds, is set for the first display timer used to control the variation of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is "missing" by determining whether the outgoing flag in the execution area is set on. In addition, as a modified example, in the same way as the win/fail determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined whether the win/fail random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1" or not, thereby determining whether or not the win is "lost". It may also be determined.

If the result of step S908 is positive, i.e., if it is a "miss", then in step S909, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area is set to on. If the result of step S909 is positive, then in step S910, a fluctuation pattern that will result in a miss (miss fluctuation pattern) is determined, and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also sent to the sub-control device 262. Then, in step S911, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the first display timer, and then the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a fluctuation pattern that results in a failure by shortening the fluctuation time (deviation shortened pattern) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is transmitted to the sub-control device. The variable pattern command is set so that it can also be sent to H.262. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process moves to step S938.

If the result of step S908 is negative, i.e., if it is a "small win", the wing open flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether the long small win occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variable pending area is on. As a variant, it may be determined whether or not a "long small win" has been won by determining again whether or not the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any of "2 to 21", in the same manner as the win/loss determination process of the start winning process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, the first display timer is set to a value of "750", which corresponds to three seconds. Furthermore, in step S919, the opening/closing control timer used to control the opening and closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750", which corresponds to three seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for three seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S916, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a two-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

If the result of step S920 is negative, then in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small win shortened pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a long small win is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S925, the first display timer is set to a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in step S926, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. This results in the special display device 43 displaying a variable value for 0.1 seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "short small win", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S927, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (a variation pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (short small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, the first display timer is set to a value of "750", which corresponds to three seconds. Furthermore, in step S930, the opening/closing control timer used to control the opening and closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750", which corresponds to three seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a three-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S927 is negative, then in step S931 it is determined whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to on. If the result of step S931 is positive, then in step S932 a fluctuation pattern is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (short small win 2-second fluctuation pattern), and further a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S933, the first display timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to two seconds. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to two seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for two seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and results in a short small win is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. A variation pattern command is set in order to send the same to the sub-control device 262 as well.

In the next step S936, the first display timer is set to a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in step S937, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for 0.1 seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag, which indicates that a variable display is being performed on the special display device 43, is set to ON. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, if the result of step S804 is affirmative, i.e., if the display is changing, the process proceeds to step S809, where the first display timer decrement process is performed. In other words, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Then, the process proceeds to step S810, where the value of the first display timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the predetermined variable time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", step S810 is determined to be positive.

If the result of step S810 is negative, then in step S811, a display switching setting is made to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and this process ends. Based on the contents of the display switching setting, a control signal to switch display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process of the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This allows the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 to be realized at the timing of the first display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S810, i.e., if the timing for stopping the variable display on the special display device 43 has arrived, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, stop display settings are made to perform a stop display on the special display device 43. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", the plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are displayed in a stopped state (for example, lit for only a few seconds) in a manner (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", and a "miss" is displayed. If it is a "miss", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "miss", if it is a "long small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "long small win", and if it is a "short small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "long small win". The display is stopped in a manner corresponding to a "short hit".

Furthermore, in the stop display setting process related to step S813, a setting process is performed to send a confirmation command to the sub-control device 262 to perform a stop display of the effect display device 42.

Then, in the subsequent step S814, after performing discrimination information setting processing, the present processing ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit jackpot flag is set to ON. If the result of step S1001 is positive, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/lose lottery, the jackpot setting from step S1002 onwards is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, a jackpot flag indicating whether or not a jackpot state is being reached as a special game state is set to ON. In the following step S1003, a first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in an open state is set to ON. In this embodiment, when the first variable flag is ON, the variable winning device 32 is set to an open state.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer is set, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32, and indicates whether a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this example, "7500", which corresponds to 30 seconds, is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the special prize state has occurred, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is executed) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as a value corresponding to "direct jackpot".

In the next step S1006, a winning counter is set to count the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In this example, the value is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls that can enter per round. This process then ends. During the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see step S301 in FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223. If it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one.

Also, if the result of step S1001 is negative, i.e., if the lottery determines that the player has not won the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In this embodiment, the time saving mode is such that after the end of the jackpot state, the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, and as described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot. .

Here, if the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process moves to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the counter value of the variation counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the fourth variable display after the end of the jackpot (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", processing is performed to turn off the time reduction mode flag in step S1010, processing to turn on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize-winning device control process in step S206 will be explained with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S1201, the jackpot flag is checked to determine whether or not a jackpot is occurring. If the result is negative, the process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0". That is, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the open time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If the result of step S1204 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1205, where it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 has reached the specified number per round (8 in this example). If the result of step S1205 is negative, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (the timing for the end of the round) has not yet arrived, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206, and it is determined whether the counter value of the round number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) has reached the specified number of times.

If the result of step S1206 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the process ends. The details of the process are described later.

If the result of step S1206 is negative, i.e., if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number, then in step S1208, a round advance process is performed, and the process ends. In the round advance process, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1. In other words, the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeated until the number of rounds that have been performed reaches the specified number set in advance. In addition, in the round advance process, the first variable flag is turned off, and the first variable timer is set to the wait time (interval time) until the next round begins.

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if the interval period has ended and it is time to start the next round, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (in this example, "7500") is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer. Set the maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, "8"). If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is placed in an open state. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state.

The end setting process of step S1207 will now be described with reference to FIG. 27. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot in progress flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time-saving mode flag is set to on. That is, in this embodiment, the time-saving mode is granted after the end of the jackpot state for all jackpot types, including the "direct jackpot" and the "V prize-winning jackpot ("15-round jackpot", "7-round jackpot", and "3-round jackpot").

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, the variation counter is set to "4", and then the process moves to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time reduction mode is maintained until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing is performed to turn off various jackpot flags. After step S1306, this process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process of step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade open flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is on. If the result of step S1801 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1801 is YES, then in step S1802, it is determined whether or not the small win open flag, which indicates that the blade members 404 are open, is ON. If the result of step S1802 is NO, that is, if the blade members 404 are about to open due to a "small win" win, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". As mentioned above, when it is determined that a "small win" has been won during the variable display setting process, the opening/closing control timer is set to a time corresponding to the same time as the variation time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43. (See step S919, step S923, step S926, step S930, step S934, and step S937). Therefore, at the same time as the corresponding variable display ends, an affirmative determination is made in this determination.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1804, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, if the timing to release the blade member 404 has arrived, the small winning opening flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806. Perform processing to make it open.

Then, in step S1807, it is determined whether the long small win occurrence flag for the execution area of the special variable pending area is set to ON. If the determination in step S1807 is affirmative, in step S1808, the opening/closing control timer is set to a value of "375", which corresponds to 1.5 seconds, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1807, a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the opening/closing control timer in step S1809, and this processing is ended.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1810, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1811, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing to close the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit opening flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade opening flag is turned off in step S1813. Then, in step S1814, the blade member 404 is brought into a closed state, and then the present process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 is capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means in this embodiment a predetermined number of times (capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner). This constitutes an opening/closing control means.

Next, the second display control process in step S208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S2101, the setting status of the second display flag, which indicates whether or not the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, is checked to determine whether or not the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change (switching display). In more detail, if the second display flag is on, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, and if the second display flag is off, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is displaying a stopped state, which corresponds to a state in which the display of the change is stopped.

If the answer is negative in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0. If the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process ends.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

After that, in step S2105, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display (switching display) on the through gate display device 41 have been met. In detail, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed on the through gate display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the time for the variable display on the through gate display device 41 varies between the time-saving mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. In the time-saving mode, the second display timer is set to a value of "125", which corresponds to 0.5 seconds, and in the normal mode, the second display timer is set to a value of "1250", which corresponds to 5 seconds. The predetermined open game state may be the game state of a specific jackpot during which a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or high support mode may be granted after the end of a special jackpot, for example, or the open period of the specific jackpot. During the jackpot state, the second display timer is set to "1250", just like in the normal mode.

Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. Furthermore, if a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the settings in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the through gate display device 41.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the through gate display device 41, the process advances to step S2106, and a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2107, and it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display on the through gate display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal process.

As mentioned above, whether or not a win has been made is determined based on the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variable reserve area. Specifically, the winning value is "1 to 8" out of the values 0 to 9 on the ball-entering assist random number counter C3.

Next, the process advances to step S2110, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process is performed to open and close the second start prize part 33b (start opening/closing member 33c). Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) differs between the time-saving mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. In the time-saving mode, the second variable timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds, and in the normal mode, the second variable timer is set to a value of "100", which corresponds to 0.4 seconds. During the jackpot state, the second variable timer is set to "100", just like in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2107 is negative, in step S2111, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41, and the process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the startup winning section control process in step S209 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag, which indicates whether the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is in the open state, is on. If it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning section 33b is in the closed state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2201 is affirmative, i.e., if the second variable flag is on, the second start winning section 33b is deemed to be in an open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is subtracted by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2203, in which it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process moves to step S2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the second start winning section 33b in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the start opening opening member 33c is output to the second start winning section 33b (start opening solenoid), and the second start winning section 33b is in an open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the start opening opening member 33c is output to the second start winning section 33b, and the second start winning section 33b is in a closed state.

Next, the third display control process of step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31.

First, in step S2301, the setting status of the third displaying flag indicating whether or not the special gate display device 44 is in the process of variable display is checked to determine whether the special gate display device 44 is in the process of variable display (switching display). Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the third display flag is on, it is considered that the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display, and when the third display flag is off, the special gate display device 44 It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, in which the fluctuating display is stopped.

If the answer is negative in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302, where it is determined whether the special gate passing flag is on. If the answer is negative in step S2302, i.e., if the special gate passing flag is not on, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passing flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2303, where the special gate passing flag is turned off. In the following step S2304, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 have been met. In detail, the third display in progress flag is turned on, and a third display timer setting process is performed. The third display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed on the special gate display device 44, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is in time-saving mode or normal mode, the variable display time is uniformly set to 1 second, and the third display timer is set to a value of "250", which corresponds to 1 second.

Then, after step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. Note that, based on the settings in the start setting process, when a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process of the normal process, A variable display (switching display) is started on the special gate display device 44.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, that is, if variable display is being performed on the special gate display device 44, the process advances to step S2306, and a third display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S2307, and it is determined whether the count value of the third display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If the determination in step S2307 is affirmative, the third display flag is turned off in step S2308, and in step S2309, a stop display setting is made to perform a stop display on the special gate display device 44. Then, based on the settings of the stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process in the normal process.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the operation assist random number storage area. Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 19 of the operation assist random number counter C4, "1 to 15" are the winning values.

Next, the process advances to step S2310, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory operating flag is turned on and the operating time is set in the accessory operating timer.

The accessory in operation flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation.

The accessory activation timer is a means for measuring the operating time (remaining time) of the movable accessory 722, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of the operation. In this embodiment, a value "1000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the accessory activation timer.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2307, a switching display setting is made in step S2111 to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44, and this process ends. Then, based on the contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This realizes the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 at the timing of the third display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the reel drive control process in step S211 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the reel operation flag, which indicates whether the movable reel 722 is in operation, is on. If it is determined that the reel operation flag is not on (the movable reel 722 is in a stored state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if the accessory operating flag is on, it is assumed that the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state, and the accessory operating timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the accessory activation timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2403, in which it is determined whether or not the specified projection time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the accessory activation timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2403 when the predetermined projection time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the accessory activation timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2403 is affirmative, the process moves to step S2404, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2404, a process of turning off the accessory operating flag is performed.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the reel operation flag, various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism 721 (movable reel solenoid 725) in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the reel operation flag is on, a drive signal is output to put the movable reel solenoid 725 into an excited state, and the movable reel 722 is in a protruding state. On the other hand, when the reel operation flag is off, a drive signal is output to put the movable reel solenoid 725 into a non-excited state, and the movable reel 722 is in a stored state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. First, in step S7101, in order to identify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0" or not.

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by one based on the detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and decremented by one based on the detection of the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the special gate switch 651.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if there are no game balls remaining in the internal area 401, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7101 is negative, then in step S7102, it is determined whether the value of a monitoring timer for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the last time a game ball entered the internal area 401 is "0."

If the result of step S7102 is negative, the value of the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and the process ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the internal area 401, the monitoring timer is set to "10000". Therefore, 40 seconds after the last ball enters the internal area 401, the monitoring timer becomes "0". In this embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the internal area 401 to when it is discharged (specifically, the time from when the game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437 to when the game ball is detected by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, or the special gate switch 651) is approximately 8 to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7102 is affirmative, that is, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is " 0'', it is assumed that a ball jam has occurred in the internal area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control is performed such as lighting the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process ends.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 34, and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 35.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step S3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in order to remember that the command was sent. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception process of the command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it may be confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command may be stored in the command buffer of RAM 513 and the command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started when the power is turned on and reset.

First, in step S3101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in the following step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, it is determined whether the backup is valid or not. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power outage information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization of RAM 513 in step S3115 and subsequent steps.

In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process moves to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step S3110, the information on the occurrence of the power cut is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step S3123 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step S3124. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and the contents of the registers are saved in the backup area 513a. RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step S3122 checks for information on the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage can be made easier. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so that recovery can be made easily, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 36. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed.

Here, the command determination process of step S3201 will be explained with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 performs initialization processing of RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command, so the timing at which RAM 503 and the timing at which RAM 513 are initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as the RAM 513 being initialized and being unable to perform control corresponding to the received command. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step S3307, the command judgment process is terminated without clearing the working area of RAM 513 and initializing RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the initialization of RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received with the payout permission flag on. In such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed with the payout permission flag on, a disadvantage such as not being paid out when there are remaining winning balls occurs, causing a loss to the player, but since the initialization of RAM 513 is prevented with the payout permission flag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Also, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to permit the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information of a power outage and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step S3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step S3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 36. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the result of step S3202 is positive, then in step S3203, permission to launch is set for the launch control device 312, and in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation should be started, the state return operation is executed. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returned to normal).

After that, in step S3205, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full but not yet set in response to a change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full but not yet set in response to a change in the state of the lower tray. Also, in step S3206, the tank ball no-ball state (bulb out state) or the tank ball no-ball not yet set state (bulb present state) is set based on a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball no-ball state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no-ball switch, and when the tank ball is no longer present, the tank ball no-ball state is set, and when the tank ball is no longer present, the tank ball no-ball state is set.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is jammed. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, in step S3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is configured as a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the memory area, and when commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the memory area is returned to the beginning and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on each pointer.

In the next step S3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the variable information included in the advance command in a pending information storage area provided in RAM 553. The advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering either the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (setting of the start winning discrimination flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a big win (setting of the big win occurrence flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a long small win or a short small win (setting of the long small win occurrence flag or the short small win occurrence flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a miss (setting of the miss flag), and information indicating the variable display time (setting of the 2-second variable flag, the 3-second variable flag, the 7-second variable flag, or the 0.1-second variable flag).

The pending information storage area also has four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4) and one execution area, similar to the special variable pending area of the main control unit 261. The pending information storage area stores the variable information contained in the preceding command in chronological order according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the variable display (information stored in the special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the variable information stored in the special variable pending area of the main control unit 261 can also be grasped by the sub-control unit 262.

Here, the pending information storage process in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a preceding command has been received (whether or not the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, a pending counter Np that counts the number of pending variable information items stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by 1.

In the following step S4103, the fluctuation information including information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small win, information on fluctuation time, etc. included in the first command is stored in the first vacant holding area of the holding information storage area. Store in area. Thereafter, in step S4104, the values of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display are obtained, and the values are stored in the same holding area where the fluctuation information is stored.

After performing the process in step S4104, or if a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process moves to step S4105, and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command has been received (or whether the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). whether or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, one is subtracted from the value of the pending counter Np in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding information storage area to the execution area side, from the first holding area to the execution area. , the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second reservation area → first reservation area, third reservation area → second reservation area, fourth reservation area → third reservation area.

After performing the process in step S4107, or if a negative determination is made in step S4105, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, where it is judged whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3911.

In step S3905, updating processing of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 upon reception of the variable pattern command. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various types of effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

Note that the display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of a variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during a jackpot, and the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. The necessary display commands are generated each time based on the information. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 can be roughly divided into a group of normal variable data, a group of reach effect data, etc., and basically each data constituting these data groups is linked to the variable time timer. By sequentially outputting the data in accordance with a predetermined time order based on the data, display effects are performed according to various fluctuation patterns. For example, the normal variation data group consists of normal variation data 1, normal variation data 2, ..., normal variation data m, and the reach effect data group consists of reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2, ..., reach effect data. n, data output is performed sequentially in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and then, with the start of reach performance, reach performance data 1 → 2 → Data output is performed sequentially in the order of ...→n.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and starts displaying changes on the performance display device 42. Once a change pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the performance display continues in cooperation with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until a confirmation command is received. Then, when a confirmation command is received, the display of changes on the performance display device 42 is stopped.

In step S3906, it is also confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, and if the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "4" is set in the variation counter in the termination setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command containing that fact is mainly used. The command information is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times in the time reduction mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, if the sub-controller 262 receives an activation notice command output from the main controller 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, an activation notice display may be performed to warn that it is a super hot time when the movable device 722 will be activated.

For example, the device may notify the player of the number of seconds remaining until the movable device 722 is activated, or may notify the player of the timing at which the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603, thereby ensuring that the movable device 722 will be activated at a better timing.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of the lamps and decorations is set to synchronize with the performance performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display performance performed by the performance display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the performance performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Further, when commands related to audio, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed without a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 being performed on the effect display device 42) Performs other processing such as control settings for display).

In step 3910, an external output process is executed to transmit a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3909 to each device. For example, when causing the performance display device 42 to perform a display performance corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3910, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in the above step S3904, the process moves to step S3911, and it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If no information about the power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step S3912, where it is determined whether or not RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step S3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process is put into an infinite loop to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step S3913. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring and each output port is turned off. In addition, the stored information on the power failure occurrence is erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing is looped infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched into the gaming area enters the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b), and When a small win is won in the lottery based on the entered ball, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball entering opening 403 remains open for a predetermined time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is in the open state, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 passes through the introduction passage 601 to the fall passage 602. You will be guided to.

The ball that falls through the drop passage 602 is directed by a route allocation member 603 to a normal guide passage 604 that can lead to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or a special guide passage 605 that can lead to the special device operation lottery area 409.

However, under normal circumstances, the route allocation member 603 is inclined to the right and the special guide passage 605 on the right side is closed, so that the game balls falling down the fall passage 602 are guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

Then, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time due to the force received from the game ball that comes into contact with it. Therefore, if there is a game ball falling down the falling path 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide path 605.

The game balls guided to the normal guide path 604 are guided to the win/fail lottery area 407, and their destinations are sorted by the rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted. The Rukoto.

Thereafter, the game ball detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408, and is used to determine the jackpot type. Then, after the jackpot type (number of rounds) is determined here, the jackpot state starts.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the special guide path 605 is guided to the accessory activation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650. Then, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an activation assist lottery is performed, and if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated for a predetermined time.

When the movable accessory 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide path 604 and the bypass passage 737 are brought into communication via the second V winning passage 730 within the movable accessory 722.

When a game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable device 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737, and when the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted.

Thereafter, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot starts.

In other words, when the movable device 722 is in an operating state (protruding state), the game ball that is guided to the normal guide passage 604 is guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731 without passing through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism 741.

The main effects of this embodiment are described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable role 722 in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area 401. In particular, in this embodiment, by activating the movable role 722, it is possible to perform a game presentation that increases the expectation of the occurrence of a V-winning jackpot. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722, and the movable role 722 is configured to be activated if the activation assist lottery is won.

As a result, the movable accessory 722 does not move regularly or continuously, and does not move every time when the special gate switch 651 detects a ball entering the ball. It is possible to suppress monotony of the performance and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable accessory 722.

In addition, by providing the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 with a trigger ball entry means (special gate 650) that detects the operation trigger of the movable role 722, whether or not the movable role 722 will be in an advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further increasing the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401 and cannot flow down (cannot enter) the first V winning passage 427, etc. If the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 is configured to flow down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable role 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable role 722 will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine will be easily committed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable role 722. In addition, there is a risk that it will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc. through the normal guide passage 604 without passing through the special gate 650. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 and the game ball that the movable device 722 acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various problems mentioned above can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a route allocation member 603 is provided that allocates the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 to either a normal guide passage 604 that can guide the ball to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or a special guide passage 605 that can guide the ball to the role activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650).

For example, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, the first game ball that precedes is guided to the normal guide path 604, and the second game ball that follows. The ball is configured to be guided to a special guide path 605. As a result, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, it becomes possible to direct the game balls to both the normal guide path 604 and the special guide path 605, so that the movable accessory 722 The effects of this will be more effective.

However, in this embodiment, under the configuration in which the game ball is fired by the firing device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds at the time of a "short hit", At the time of a "long small hit", the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. As a result, it is advantageous for the player that a plurality of game balls enter the central winning unit 37 in succession during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) is in the open state. The configuration is such that the situation is unlikely to occur frequently.

Under such a configuration, if a plurality of game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404), the action of the movable accessory 722 (assist ), if the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the V prize with a higher probability, the game is started at the stage where multiple game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 in succession at the same time. There is a risk that people's expectations will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after a predetermined game ball passes through the special gate 650, the varying time of the variable display performed on the special gate display device 44 (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating) ) is set to "1 second", and "4 seconds" is set as the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation.

As a result, even if, for example, other game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650, or other game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650 do not enter the V, game balls that subsequently enter the central winning unit 37 will be given a higher chance of entering the V.

In other words, the probability is higher for game balls other than game balls that entered the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball that passed through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404). The structure is such that you will be given a chance to win a V prize.

More specifically, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the entrance portion 601b as the specific area) flows down the normal guide passage 604, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the entrance portion 601b) flows down the special guide passage 605, and then the game ball that flows down the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 is activated, in the normal When the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 604 passes through the movable device 722, the movable device 722 has not yet been activated, and the game ball that has flowed down the normal guide passage 604 is not acted on (assisted by) the movable device 722 and does not win the V prize. Even if this is the case, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 during the next open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) (the game ball that passes through the entrance 601 after the next time) will flow down the normal guide passage 604, and the action of the movable device 722 will provide a chance to win the V prize.

Of course, in place of the above configuration, the variation time of the variable display performed on the special gate display device 44 (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating), the operating time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation, etc. , a game in which various setting times are set to times different from the above-mentioned setting times, and a predetermined game ball enters the inner area 401 after a relatively long period of time (for example, one minute or more) after passing through the special gate 650. The ball may flow down into the normal guide path 604, and the action of the movable accessory 722 may provide a chance to win a V prize.

This configuration allows the player to actively play the game, trying to get the game ball to enter the central winning unit 37, even after confirming that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. As a result, the player's interest can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to the above-described embodiments in any combination of all or part. It is also possible to combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine that combines the functions of a gaming machine (so-called old type 1 pachinko machine) in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes to create a jackpot state (direct jackpot) when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and the functions of a gaming machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a central winning unit 37 opens and closes when a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and a gaming ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427, etc., to create a jackpot state (V winning jackpot).

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. The gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) awarded during a jackpot, and a gaming mode such as a high probability mode awarded after the jackpot. In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33, without performing a predetermined lottery process (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33. , a type of gaming machine in which the central winning unit 37 is opened, and the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the 1V winning passage 427 etc. to generate a jackpot (so-called old type 2 pachinko). It may be implemented as a machine).

In addition, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot state occurs in which the central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means opens and closes. In such a case, the variable winning device 32 may be omitted. In other words, in a gaming machine of the type in which a jackpot state occurs in which a specified variable ball entry means (a large winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering a specified starting ball entry means, a movable body may be provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, the game ball is provided with a variable ball entry means such as a central winning unit 37 that becomes open when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, and a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. The game machine may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which a specific game value is awarded when a ball enters a special ball entry means such as a V winning hole. That is, in this type of gaming machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b constituting the specific area, and a game ball that enters the right ball entry opening 403 always passes through the right entrance 601b constituting the specific area, and a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437 constituting the specific detection means. However, various configurations related to the specific area and the specific detection means, such as the position and number at which the specific area and the specific detection means are provided, are not limited to the configuration related to the entrance 601b and the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, one or more specific areas and specific detection means may be provided at a position different from the left and right entrances 601b, such as a configuration in which one exit 601a of the introduction passage 601 is set as a specific area and the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is placed there as the specific detection means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403, etc. (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601, and the pair of left and right inlets 601b) may be omitted. For example, the left ball entry opening 403, etc. (including the left blade member 404, the left part of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet part 601b on the left side) may be omitted, and only the right ball entry opening 403, etc. (including the right blade member 404, the right part of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet part 601b on the right side) may be provided. This results in a configuration in which a ball passage (the right part of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and which can guide the game balls one by one to the outlet part 601a, which is a specific area provided only at one location, is provided only at one location. In other words, the game balls that do not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the internal area 401 by passing through the outlet part 601a. In addition, the ball passage (the right side of the lead-in passage 601) is located in a position where only game balls that are shot with a certain strength (right-handed hit) and fly over the central winning unit 37 can pass through.

Alternatively or in addition to this, a ball passage (such as a ball passage member having a ball passage) capable of guiding game balls one by one to the ball entrance opening 403 on one side (including the blade member 404 on one side, one side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on one side) may be provided at an outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37 (for example, the right side).

In addition, in specific areas such as the exit part 601a and the entrance part 601b of the introduction passage 601, while allowing game balls to pass in a predetermined direction (inner area 401 side), game balls in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction are allowed to pass through. It may be configured to include a regulating means (such as a valve-like member whose state changes from the first state to the second state depending on the force received from the game ball) for regulating the passage of the game ball.

The winning probabilities for various types of lottery (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) related to the pachinko machine 10 are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. . Furthermore, it goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a type of game machine in which the game balls are circulated within the game machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the types of jackpot states are set as a "3-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "15-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 15 times, but the invention is not limited to these and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may also be configured to occur.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot).

(c) The configuration of the game mode granted after the end of the jackpot state (such as the granting period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time-saving mode is applied in which the time (changing time) of the changing display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the changing display is performed four times on the special display device 43, but the period during which the time-saving mode is applied is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving mode may be configured to continue after the end of the jackpot state until the next jackpot state occurs.

Furthermore, as the game mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode, a high probability mode or the like may be provided in which the probability of winning the jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) is high. A specific game mode such as a time saving mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state. When a jackpot that has the right to be given a high probability mode after the end of the jackpot state, a so-called probability variable jackpot, occurs, a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 or the like in a specific manner corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. It's okay. Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine configured such that the time reduction mode, high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the entry assist lottery based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the activation assist lottery conducted based on the passing of the game ball to the special gate switch 651 are explained. The probability is configured to be the same in all modes.

Not limited to this, as a game mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction mode or the above-mentioned high probability mode, the winning probability of the entry assist lottery, the winning probability of the operation assist lottery, the small winning ( In particular, a mode (high support mode) may be implemented in which the probability of winning (especially long small win) is higher than the normal mode. At least one of these high support modes may be a specific game mode.

(d) The configuration related to the device activation lottery (device activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the device activation lottery area 409, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable device 722. If the activation assist lottery is won, the activation condition is met and the movable device 722 is activated.

In addition to this, for example, the configuration may be such that, without performing a lottery process, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, the activation condition is always met and the movable device 722 is activated.

In addition, it may be configured to include a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value becomes a predetermined number or more, the activation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is activated. good. Alternatively, it is provided with a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value becomes a predetermined number or more, a predetermined lottery process is executed to obtain a predetermined lottery result. In this case, the movable accessory 722 may be configured to operate when the operating condition is satisfied.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is not performed by a software lottery process, but by providing a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a croon in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. A configuration may also be adopted in which a lottery is drawn based on the behavior of the game balls. However, it is preferable to perform the lottery process using software in order to simplify the configuration of the central winning unit 37.

For example, in the accessory activation lottery area 409, the game balls do not always pass through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), but the game balls can (or do not) pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate. You can also use it as

(d-3) In addition, in the above embodiment, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the operation trigger of the movable part 722 is configured to be provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, but the location at which the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this and may be a different location.

For example, the central winning unit 37 may be configured to have a second internal area (an area where balls can enter from an entrance portion different from the ball entry opening 403 that is opened and closed by the blade member 404) different from the internal area 401, and a trigger ball entry means (special gate) may be provided in the second internal area.

(d-4) Also, like the through gate 34, a trigger ball entry means (special gate) may be provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter (pass through). The configuration relating to the trigger ball entry means is not limited to a ball entry means such as a through gate through which an entering game ball can pass, but may also be a ball entry means such as a winning port through which an entering game ball is discharged outside the game area. Then, a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined winning port, and the movable device 722 may be configured to operate when a predetermined operating condition is met, such as when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. For example, as described below, when a game ball is detected by the start winning section 33a, 33b (start winning switch 224a, 224b) during a lottery invalid period, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722, and if the activation assist lottery is won, the activation condition is established and the movable role 722 is activated.

In addition, a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 may pass through the special gate 650, be detected by the special gate switch 651, and then return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, rather than being ejected to the back side of the game board 30.

In addition, a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 may pass through the special guide passage 605 without being detected by a specified ball detection means, return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, and then enter a trigger ball entry means (such as a special gate) provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, where it may be detected by a trigger ball entry detection means (such as a special gate switch).

However, if the trigger ball entry means (special gate) that detects the activation trigger of the movable gimmick 722 is located outside the central winning unit 37, there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means (special gate switch) to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to be committed by activating the movable gimmick 722. From this perspective, it is more preferable that the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is located within the central winning unit 37.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display starts on the special gate display device 44, and after a predetermined time, a stationary display is made in a manner corresponding to the result of the activation assist lottery, and if the result of the activation assist lottery is a winning result, the movable device 722 is then configured to operate.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display means (special gate display device 44) for displaying the lottery results of the operation assist lottery is omitted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the change time of the change display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may include multiple change patterns with different change display times.

For example, the main control device 261 may be configured to include a fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times, and a fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a gaming ball by the special gate switch 651, and to control the special gate display device 44 based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means.

This allows the time from when the special gate display device 44 starts to display the change to when it stops to be variable. In turn, it allows the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 to when the movable device 722 actually goes into an operating state (advantageous state) to be variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, even if a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the change display (the result of the activation assist lottery) for that part is not withheld. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that part is invalidated, and the right to activate the movable device 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, when a game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display or the movable accessory 722 is in operation, a predetermined number of times It may also be configured to include a holding means (variable holding area) that can hold the variable display (operation assist lottery result) of minutes.

Here, the holding means (fluctuating holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of holding areas, similar to, for example, the normal changing holding area that stores the value of the input assist random number counter C3 in the above embodiment. , the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 may be stored in the plurality of holding areas in chronological order according to the history of passage of game balls to the special gate 650. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to only the value of the operation assist random number counter C4, and other information may be stored.

(e) The configuration related to route allocation (route allocation area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route allocation member 603 in the above embodiment is supported so as to be swingable, and is normally maintained in a right-inclined state by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown), so that a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 can flow down to the left-side normal guide passage 604. In this state, when a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 is guided to the left-side normal guide passage 604, the route allocation member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614, and is configured to be in a left-inclined state for a predetermined time, so that a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 can flow down to the right-side special guide passage 605.

The configuration (shape, operation mode, etc.) of the route distribution means is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, an axle pin 610 is fixed to the axle 611 of the route allocation member 603, the axle 611 protruding toward the rear side of the upper rear wall 400a, and further, as shown in FIG. 46, an action piece 800 is formed extending downward from the rear end of the protruding axle pin 610, and a pair of coil springs 801, 802 are provided as a maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from the left and right, so that the route allocation member 603 is normally configured to maintain a balanced state (reference posture) with no left-right tilt in the center position of the central piece 613 (position of the axle pin 610)

By configuring it in this way, when a game ball falls onto the route allocation member 603, which is normally in a balanced state, it is not clear whether the game ball will be guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side or the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

When a game ball that has fallen to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state is guided, for example, to the special guide path 605 on the right side, the route distribution member 603 moves away from the game ball that contacts the right side portion 615. Due to the force received, the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 is turned clockwise and becomes the first state (first posture), which is the right tilted state [see FIG. 41(a)]. As a result, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction and enters the left tilted state (see FIG. 41(b)), which is the second state (second posture). Thereafter, the route distribution member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, such as once again being tilted to the right, and then returns to the balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802.

Similarly, when a game ball that has fallen onto the route allocation member 603 in a balanced state is guided, for example, to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, the route allocation member 603 rotates once counterclockwise due to the force of the game ball contacting the left piece 614, becoming inclined to the left, and then rotates clockwise due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, becoming inclined to the right. After that, the route allocation member 603 swings left and right multiple times, becoming inclined to the left again, and then returns to a balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802.

Under such a configuration, when two game balls fall successively to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state, for example, when the first game ball in front is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side. In this case, the second subsequent game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. Conversely, when the first game ball in advance is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side, the second game ball that follows is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side.

In addition, according to the above configuration, a plurality of continuously falling game balls can be alternately distributed to different routes while adopting a relatively simple configuration without providing a driving means for driving the route distribution member 603. configuration can be realized. As a result, the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact.

(e-2) In the route allocation member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, a weight may be attached to the lower end of the action piece 800, so that the route allocation member 603 is normally kept in a balanced state, but can be freely swung by the action of the game ball.

(e-3) In the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, in place of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a drive means (distribution drive means) such as a motor for swinging the route distribution member 603 is provided, The route distribution member 603 may be configured to swing periodically or continuously between a rightward tilt state and a leftward tilted state. Alternatively, the route distribution means such as the route distribution member 603 is normally in a stopped state, and may be configured to enter a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is satisfied and a specific state is achieved.

(e-4) The route distribution means does not have to be movable, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or the like or provided integrally with the housing 400, for example. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which routes are distributed based on random behavior of game balls. In addition, various other configurations related to the route distribution means, such as the location and number of route distribution devices provided, are not limited to the above embodiments, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which one or more route distribution means are provided at a position different from that of the above embodiment (another variable entry means different from the central winning unit 37).

(f) The configurations of various guide routes are not limited to the above embodiments.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the time from when the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) and the movable device 722 is in an advantageous state is shorter than the movable body arrival time from when the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the movable device 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604).

If the time required for the game ball to reach the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 to reach an advantageous state is longer from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 to the movable device 722 (the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604) than the time required for the game ball to reach the movable device 722 (the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604), when two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable device 722 before the movable device 722 operates, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

In addition, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 to reach the movable accessory 722, for example, it is possible to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the normal guide path 604. Conceivable. Further, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying passage of the game ball is installed in the normal guide path 604.

Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane that causes the game ball to go back and forth or make a circuit in the same place several times before moving on, or a rib or the like that stops the momentum of the game ball and allows it to move on over time.

(f-2) For example, in the above embodiment, the second route (opportunity entry ball guidance route) for guiding the game balls sorted by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity entry means (special gate) is to guide the game balls to the special gate. Although the configuration is such that only one special guide path 605 is provided to guide the ball to the route 650, the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) from the route distribution member 603 is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration including a plurality of different second routes (opportunity entry guidance routes).

By providing multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes), the period from the time when the game ball is allocated by the route allocation member 603 (predetermined trigger) to when the movable device 722 actually enters an operating state (advantageous state) can be varied.

In addition, with the above configuration, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 to when it reaches the trigger ball entry means (special gate) can be varied by a mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball, so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further increasing the interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 604a), from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the first opportunity ball entry means (first special gate 650A), and the movable accessory The first second route (first special guide passage 605A) which takes a long time to reach an advantageous state until 722 is activated, and the advantageous state leading to the second opportunity ball entry means (second special gate 650B) It may also be configured to include a second second route (second special guide path 605B) with a short arrival time. Here, the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" constitutes the "first downstream route", and the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" constitutes the "first downstream route". It constitutes a "second downstream route" (the same applies hereinafter).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the first special gate 650A is provided with a first special gate switch 651A that detects a game ball passing therethrough, and the second special gate 650B is provided with a first special gate switch 651A that detects a game ball passing therethrough. A second special gate switch 651B for detection is provided. Here, the "first special gate switch 651A" constitutes the "first opportunity ball entry detection means", and the "second special gate switch 651B" constitutes the "second opportunity ball entry detection means" ( Same below).

The passage width of each of the special guide passages 605A, 605B and the special gates 650A, 650B is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time. In addition, game balls that pass through each of the special gates 650A, 650B are discharged outside the internal area 401 via a discharge passage (not shown).

Further, a slide member 655 that can open and close the entrance portion is provided at the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and by moving to the forward protruding position, the slide member 655 enters a closed state in which the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and returns to the rearward retracted position. By being displaced, the second special guide passage 605B is brought into an open state in which the entrance portion is opened.

When the slide member 655 is in a closed state, the game balls sorted by the route sorting member 603, which serves as an upstream route sorting means, pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and are guided to the first special guide passage 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in an open state, the game balls sorted by the route sorting member 603 are guided to the second special guide passage 605B.

The sliding member 655 may be configured to constantly repeat the sliding movement, or the state of the sliding member 655 may be changed periodically or randomly. In addition, the sliding member 655 may be controlled so that the proportion of the sliding member 655 that is in the open state and the proportion of the sliding member 655 that is in the closed state differ in a particular state.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) in this embodiment, and can change the destination of the game ball to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)." In addition, the route allocation means such as the route allocation member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655.

When a game ball is detected by each of the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722. If the activation assist lottery is won, the movable role 722 is activated for a predetermined period of time. Note that the probability of winning the activation assist lottery may be different when the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A in a specific state from when the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. In other words, the probability that the movable role 722 will be in a predetermined activation state may be different when the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" from when the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)".

In the example shown in FIG. 47, ribs 653A and 653B are provided on the first special guide passage 605A, which is the path along which the game ball moves, to lengthen the path length of the first special guide passage 605A, and the game ball's momentum is stopped so that it moves forward over time.

In addition to or in place of the ribs 653A and 653B, other delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage or a crane, a mechanism that makes the game ball go back and forth or go around the same place several times before moving forward) may be arranged in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A, 650B (special gate switches 651A, 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B, but instead, a game ball passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B may move toward one special gate (special gate switch) and be detected by the same special gate switch.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 47, if the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball will always pass through the first special gate 650A (first special gate switch 651A), and if the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball will always pass through the second special gate 650B (second special gate switch 651B). However, without being limited to this, the game ball may be configured to pass (or not pass) through the first special gate 650A or the second special gate 650B as the trigger ball entry means at a predetermined rate. In addition, the proportion of game balls that can pass through the trigger ball entry means (the proportion of movable device 722 that can be in a specified operating state) may be different when the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)."

(f-3) A configuration with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above is the route exemplified in (e-1) to (e-3) above. The configuration related to the distribution member 603 will be more successful.

If the time required for the game ball to reach the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 to be in an advantageous state is longer from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 to the time the game ball reaches the movable device 722, when the route allocation member 603 guides the game ball to the special guide passage 605, the time required for the game ball to reach the movable device 722 to be in an advantageous state, if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable device 722 before the movable device 722 is activated, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball in advance is distributed to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the normal guide path 604, , the expectation of a jackpot situation increases, and the player watches with anticipation the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide path 605.

On the other hand, the route distributing member 603 allows the game ball to be guided by the special guide rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable object 722 from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distributing member 603. If the game ball is configured to reach an advantageous state from the time it is guided to the passage 605 until it reaches the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the first game ball is distributed to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is normally guided. When distributed to the passage 604, unless the movable accessory 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable accessory 722 ends. Because it becomes clear that the player is going to do something, there is a risk that interest in the game will drop significantly.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball in advance is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the special guide path 605, , the expectation of a jackpot situation increases, and the player watches with anticipation the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide path 605.

Therefore, if the configuration has multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes) as described above, even if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the normal guide path 604 or the special guide path 605, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route (first special guide path 605A) with a long time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route (second special guide path 605B) with a short time to reach the advantageous state." This leaves the possibility that the timing at which the movable device 722 operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable device 722 will match, so the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

(g) The configuration related to the winning/losing lottery (winning/losing lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) is provided as a success/failure sorting means. The rotating body 414 includes one special pocket part 416a for jackpots and two non-special pocket parts 416b for losers, and rotates counterclockwise at a constant speed.

For example, the number and ratio of the pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotary body 414 may be changed to vary the winning probability of the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In addition, the rotating body 414 may be configured to have, for example, a special pocket section 416a for a 3R jackpot and a special pocket section 416a for a 7R jackpot, and a jackpot type lottery may also be conducted in the win/lose lottery area 407. In such a case, the type lottery area 408 may be omitted.

(g-3) Instead of the rotary body 414, a configuration may be provided in which another lottery mechanism such as a croon is provided.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) The type lottery area 408 has a type sorting means (type determining means) that allocates the destination of the game ball to any of the 15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entrance 732, or 3R ball entrance 733. ) is provided.

Instead of the type-sorting mechanism 741, the device may be configured with another type-selection mechanism, such as a crane.

(h-2) The type selection area 408 may be omitted, and the type of jackpot state to be awarded may be determined when a gaming ball enters a special ball entry means such as the first V winning passage 427. In other words, the type determination that determines the type of jackpot state may be performed by software-based determination processing.

(i) The configurations of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 are not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, the configuration may be such that the route distribution area 406 (route distribution member 603) and the accessory activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) are omitted. In such a case, for example, when the ball entry is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, an operation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722.

However, if the movable part 722 is simply configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the ball entry detection by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, the movable part 722 will operate at the same timing every time a game ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

Therefore, in such cases, it is preferable to also employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration described above that makes the fluctuation time variable.

(j) The configuration (position, shape, operation mode, advantageous state, etc.) of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 is not limited to the configuration related to the movable device 722 in the above embodiment, and other configurations such as an opening and closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable accessory 722 according to the above embodiment is in the operating state (advantageous state), thereby avoiding the winning lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism section 741. , is configured so that game balls normally guided to the guide path 604 can be guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731.

In other words, when the movable part 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is configured to make it easier to get a V-winning jackpot than when the movable part 722 is in an inoperable state (non-advantageous state), and it is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the 15R ball entrance 731, which corresponds to the 15R jackpot that is the most advantageous to the player out of the multiple types of special game states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot).

In addition to this, the configuration may be such that the game ball is guided to the entrance of the type lottery area 408 while avoiding the win/lose lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and only the right to generate a jackpot state is granted.

(j-2) Also, a movable body may be provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the movable body changes state to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type allocation mechanism 741 may be avoided, and the game ball may be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731.

(j-3) The rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotating body 414, which normally rotates at a constant speed, may change to an advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, and the special pocket portion 416a for the jackpot may stop temporarily at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435, or the special pocket portion 416a for the jackpot may move at a very slow speed through a position corresponding to the gate portion 435.

(j-4) The rotating body 414 is provided with, for example, a special pocket part 416a for 3R jackpot, a special pocket part 416a for 7R jackpot, and a special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot, and the rotating body 414 is (Non-advantageous state), the special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot is controlled to move at a very high speed at the position corresponding to the gate part 435, and the game ball is moved against the special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot. makes it difficult for the ball to enter, and if the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is in an advantageous state, the special pocket part 416a for the 15R jackpot is temporarily placed at the position corresponding to the gate part 435. It is also possible to perform control such that the special pocket section 416a for the 15R jackpot moves at a normal speed to a position corresponding to the gate section 435.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism 741 (first bridge plate 744, second bridge plate 745) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first transition board 744 and the second transition board 745, which normally swing, change to an advantageous state based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, and temporarily stop at the forward position, or It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball can easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 by increasing the amount of time spent in the forward position.

(j-6) Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of operating states (advantageous states) of the movable bodies (movable accessory 722, rotating body 414, type sorting mechanism section 741, etc.) are set. Alternatively, it may be configured to be determined based on the lottery result of a predetermined operation lottery process. In this way, when the movable body is brought into the operating state (advantageous state), the operating pattern determining means in this embodiment is configured by the function of determining which of the plurality of operating patterns is to be executed.

Furthermore, when a movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), it may be configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the special ball entry means (V entry passage 427, 730, etc.) and it is easier to get a V entry jackpot than when the movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Also, when a movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), it may be configured so that it is easier to get a predetermined type of special game state (for example, a 15R jackpot, which is the most advantageous for the player) out of multiple types of special game states (for example, a 15R jackpot, a 7R jackpot, a 3R jackpot) than when the movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, if a winning result is obtained by the activation assist lottery, during the activation start period before the movable role 722 is activated, the performance display device 42 or other performance means may be configured to be capable of executing an opening performance as a pre-activation performance that suggests that the movable role 722 will be activated.

Incidentally, such opening performance is performed after the stop display when a variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and a stop display is performed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which no variable display is performed), the lottery is performed after the winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262 may be configured to include a performance pattern storage means for storing multiple performance patterns that determine the performance time of the opening performance, a performance pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the multiple performance patterns stored in the performance pattern storage means based on the establishment of an activation condition (for example, when a winning result is obtained through an activation assist lottery), and a performance control means capable of controlling a predetermined performance means based on the performance pattern selected by the performance pattern selection means.

This configuration makes it possible to vary the activation start period (e.g., the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when an activation condition is met) to when the movable device 722 actually enters an advantageous state.

(k-2) Without performing a performance such as the above-mentioned opening performance, the operation start period from a predetermined opportunity (for example, when an activation condition is established) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes in an advantageous state may be made variable. .

For example, the main control device 261 may be configured to include an operation pattern storage means for storing multiple operation patterns that determine the operation start period from when the operation conditions are met until the movable role 722 enters an operating state, an operation pattern selection means that can select one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the special gate switch 651, and a control means that can control the movable role 722 based on the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

(l) In addition to the game performance using movable bodies such as the movable accessory 722, it may be configured to perform other game performances.

(l-1) For example, without being guided to the 1st V winning passage 427 etc., the ejection route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special entry detection switch 462) or the special guide passage 605 (special gate switch 651) ) The configuration may be such that specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of game balls discharged outside the internal area 401 via the player. The functions of the main control device 261 and the like that execute such processing constitute a specific processing execution means in this embodiment.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the 1st V winning passage 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged via the discharge route (second route) are utilized to provide new gameplay. This makes it possible to dramatically increase the interest of players.

(l-2) For example, it is equipped with a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means (discharged ball detecting means) such as the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 or the special gate switch 651, and the counted value is set to a predetermined value. The predetermined condition is met if the count is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, or the predetermined condition is met if the predetermined lottery result is obtained by executing a predetermined lottery process when the counted value is greater than or equal to the predetermined number. , the configuration may be such that specific processing advantageous to the player is executed.

In addition, such specific processing includes, for example, processing to lengthen the time that the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state when it is in the operating state, processing to increase the winning probability in the operation assist lottery, and special pocket part of the rotating body 414. 416a, processing to make it easier to enter the game ball, processing to make it easier for the game ball to be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731 in the type lottery area 408, etc.

(m) The small prize opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the blade member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 and the large prize opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the large prize opening opening member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 are not limited to the above embodiment.

(m-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 is configured with two opening and closing patterns, a "short small hit" and a "long small hit", but this is not limited thereto, and the blade member 404 may be configured with one or three or more opening and closing patterns.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade members 404 of the central winning unit 37 are opened for 0.5 seconds during a "short small win" and for 1.5 seconds during a "long small win", but the opening mode (opening time) of the blade members 404 is not limited to the above embodiment and may be configured to have other opening modes with different opening times.

(m-3) In the above embodiment, the opening and closing operation (opening operation) of the blade member 404 is performed only once (one round) for each small win (the result of one winning or losing lottery performed based on the ball detection by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), but this is not limited to the above, and the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 may be performed two or more times (multiple rounds) for each small win.

(m-4) For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple opening and closing patterns with different numbers of opening and closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, such as a configuration having a first opening and closing pattern in which the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed once (one round) and a second opening and closing pattern in which the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed twice (two rounds). However, when a predetermined opening and closing pattern (for example, a long small win with an opening for 1.5 seconds) is performed among the multiple opening and closing patterns, it is preferable that the movable body such as the movable role 722 is more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening and closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short small win with an opening for 0.5 seconds).

(n) In the above embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring process (step S212) is performed in consideration of the remaining balls in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. In addition, in the first display control process (step S205), it is determined whether or not the wing member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is in the midst of a small win, and if it is in the midst of a small win, a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already started is not ended.

In place of or in addition to these configurations, if a game ball is detected in the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) during the opening of the small win of the wing member 404 of the central winning unit 37, the big win lottery and small win lottery may not be executed. In other words, a lottery invalid period may be set.

In addition, taking into consideration the discharge period of the remaining balls, the lottery invalid period may include the opening period of the blade member 404 as the open game state (small win opening period), as well as a predetermined period after the end of the opening period (after the blade member 404 is closed). Of course, the lottery invalid period is not limited to this, and may be a different period. For example, the lottery invalid period may include the period from when the game ball enters the start winning section 33 to when the small win opening begins. Also, in a type of gaming machine in which a predetermined lottery process is performed even during a predetermined winning state (during the opening and closing control of the variable ball entry means), the lottery invalid period may be a predetermined period (lottery period) during which the predetermined variable ball entry means is caused to execute a predetermined opening.

In the pachinko machine for which the lottery invalidation period has been set, for example, before starting the start-up winning process in step S304, it is determined whether or not the lottery is in the invalidation period, and if it is the lottery invalidation period, the start-up In the prize-winning process, only the payout setting of the prize balls (setting of the prize ball command) related to the starting prize winning section 33 is performed without storing various counter values such as the win/fail random number counter C1. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the process moves to the start winning process.

In addition, when adopting such a configuration, in place of or in addition to the operation assist lottery related to the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), during the lottery invalidation period, the startup prize section 33 (first startup prize section 33a or the second starting winning part 33b), an operation assist lottery is held to decide whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722, and if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated. A configuration may be adopted in which the accessory 722 is activated.

When an activation assist lottery is held for the start winning section 33, the role activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650 and special gate switch 651) and related components may be omitted.

Here, an example of pre-start winning processing that can be executed before starting the start winning processing of step S304 in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48.

First, in step S7700, a predetermined flag or the like is referenced to determine whether or not the lottery is invalid. In this example, the small prize opening period of the central winning unit 37 and a predetermined period after the end of the small prize opening period are set as the lottery invalid period. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the lottery is not invalid, the process ends and the process proceeds to the start winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7700, that is, if it is the lottery invalid period, then in step S7701, the first This is determined based on the detection information of the starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S7701, the process is directly terminated and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, the third displaying flag is turned on in step S7702. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, the process is immediately terminated and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, it is determined in step S7703 whether or not the accessory object in operation flag is on, that is, whether or not the movable accessory object 722 is in operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, this process is directly terminated and the process proceeds to the starting winning process in step S304.

As a result, even if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, and the game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, the activation assist lottery for that portion is invalidated, and no new right to activate the movable device 722 is granted.

Not limited to this, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a new game ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, and the first starting winning section 33b enters the first starting winning section 33a. It may be configured to include a holding means (variation holding area) that can hold a predetermined number of variable displays (operation assist lottery results) when detected by the winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b.

The holding means (variable holding area) may comprise one execution area and multiple holding areas, similar to the special variable holding area that stores the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 in the above embodiment, and the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 may be stored in chronological order in the multiple holding areas in accordance with the winning history of game balls in the start winning sections 33a and 33b. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2, and other information may be stored.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7703 is negative, then in step S7704, the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in a random number storage area for the lottery invalid period set in RAM 503.

In the following step S7705, the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned on, and in step S7706, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 newly stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period is a value corresponding to an assist win. Here, if the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is a value corresponding to an assist win, that is, if an operation assist wins, this corresponds to the case where the specified conditions in this example are satisfied.

In this example, it is determined whether or not the lottery is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalidation period. Specifically, among the numerical values "0 to 19" of the operation assist random number counter C4, "1 to 5" are the winning values. In other words, the assist winning probability is 5/20. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the assisted winning is performed with a different probability of winning.

In the next step S7707, a variable time determination process is performed to determine the variable time in the display device for the invalid period (not shown), which constitutes the second display means, based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period, and then this process ends. Therefore, the second variable pattern selection means in this example is constituted by the function of executing the variable time determination process etc. in step S7707.

Note that the correspondence between the value of the variable time selection counter C2 and the variable time on the invalid period display device is stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a variable time selection table for the lottery invalid period (not shown). Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the second variation pattern storage means in this example.

For example, if the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is any of "0 to 2" out of "0 to 9", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the display device for the invalid period is set to 3 seconds, if it is any of "3 to 5", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the display device for the invalid period is set to 5 seconds, and if it is any of "6 to 9", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the display device for the invalid period is set to 7 seconds.

Next, the fourth display control process performed in the normal process of FIG. 10 in relation to the display device for the invalid period will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. Note that the second display control means in this example is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the fourth display control process.

First, in step S7801, the setting status of the fourth display flag, which indicates whether or not a variable display is being performed on the display device for invalid periods, is checked to determine whether or not a variable display is being performed by the display device for invalid periods. In more detail, if the fourth display flag is on, it is considered that a variable display is being performed on the display device for invalid periods, and if the fourth display flag is off, it is considered that a stopped display is being performed, which corresponds to a state in which the variable display is stopped on the display device for invalid periods. The display device for invalid periods and the display device for special gates 44 may be a common device.

If the result of step S7801 is negative, the process proceeds to step S7802, where it is determined whether the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is on. If the result of step S7802 is negative, i.e., if the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is not on, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is on, the process proceeds to step S7803, where the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned off. In the following step S7804, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the display device for the invalid period have been met. In more detail, the fourth display in progress flag is turned on, and a fourth display timer setting process is performed. The fourth display timer is a means for measuring the variable display time (remaining time) performed on the display device for the invalid period, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, a value corresponding to the variable time determined in the variable time determination process in step S7707 above is set in the fourth display timer. That is, a value of "750" corresponding to 3 seconds, a value of "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds, or a value of "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the fourth display timer.

Then, after step S7804 ends, the fourth display control process ends. Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process of normal processing, the invalid period display device The variable display starts at .

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, that is, if variable display is being performed on the invalid period display device, the process advances to step S7806, and a fourth display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the fourth display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S7807, and it is determined whether the count value of the fourth display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7807, the fourth displaying flag is turned off in step S7808, and in step S7809, a stop display setting is performed to perform a stop display on the invalid period display device. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the invalid period display device in the external output process in the next normal process.

Next, the process advances to step S7810, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory object operation flag is turned on, and the operation time is set in the accessory object operation timer. In this embodiment, a value "3000" corresponding to 12 seconds is set for the accessory activation timer. Thereby, the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state). The movable object control means in this example is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that performs driving processing of the movable accessory 722 based on the setting contents.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7807, then in step S7811, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the invalid period display device, and the process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process in normal processing. As a result, variable display of the invalid period display device is realized at the timing of the fourth display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Therefore, the random number storage process in step S7704 (storage of the actuation assist random number counter C4), the validity determination process in step S7706, etc. constitute the actuation lottery process (actuation assist lottery) in this example, and the main control that executes this actuation lottery process The functions of the device 261 constitute lottery processing execution means (invalid period lottery processing execution means).

Further, the function of the main controller 261 that executes the random number storage process in step S7704 (storage of the variable time selection counter C2), the variable time determination process in step S7707, etc. constitutes the set time selection means in this example.

As described above, according to this example, the small winning opening period in which the central winning unit 37 is made to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning section 33 and the end of the small winning opening period. The subsequent predetermined period (during the remaining ball monitoring period) is set as a lottery invalidation period, and when a game ball newly enters the starting winning part 33 during the lottery invalidation period, it is determined whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722. An operation assist lottery is held to determine the operation assist, and if a winner is won in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated.

As a result, even during the opening period of the central winning unit 37, in which opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the past, the movable accessory 722 can be operated in a predetermined manner by the player based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning part 33. Advantageous conditions may arise.

In the past, when some players realized that the game ball would not enter the V-winning zone at the time the central winning unit 37 related to the start winning zone was opened when the game ball entered the start winning zone 33, some players would stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start winning zone 33 unnecessarily while the central winning unit 37 was open.

On the other hand, according to this example, after the game ball enters the starting winning section 33, even in such a situation, the player can newly start winning in order to receive assistance from the movable accessory 722. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the section 33, a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

Further, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 is during the open period of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to diversify the games.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

In addition, in the configuration of this example, if a relatively small value is set for the reel operation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable reel 722 can be operated immediately after a game ball enters the start winning section 33 during a specified lottery invalid period, and the movable reel 722 can act on a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 during the opening of a small prize before the lottery invalid period.

On the other hand, if a relatively large value is set for the reel operation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable reel 722 can act on a game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37 after the end of a specified lottery invalid period. As a result, even if there is no game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 at the time the game ball enters the start winning section 33 during the lottery invalid period, the movable reel 722 will act on the game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37 that is opened at a specified timing thereafter, providing a chance for a V win.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the gaming ball has entered the start winning section 33 during the lottery invalid period, the player can actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the central winning unit 37. As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional issue A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the moving body would periodically or continuously perform a predetermined action unrelated to the game, or the moving body would perform a predetermined action every time the variable ball entry means was opened. As a result, the presentation related to the moving body could be monotonous, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the moving body tended to wane. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means A1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
an opportunity ball entry means provided to allow the game ball to enter (or pass through);
an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
At least a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the activation lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above means A1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, this means is configured to determine by lottery whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, for example, the movable body will not operate constantly, either periodically or continuously, and it will not perform a predetermined operation every time a predetermined trigger occurs, such as when the variable ball entry means opens. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation related to the movable body from becoming monotonous and to increase the player's anticipation of the movable body operating.

In particular, in this means, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration without the need to provide a new complex mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism that performs a lottery based on the behavior of the game ball.

Here, the placement position of the "opportunistic ball entry means" includes, for example, "inside the internal region of the variable ball entry means", "in a region different from the internal region of the variable ball entry means", and "inside the internal region of the variable ball entry means". ``within the gaming area outside the variable ball entry means.''

Means A2. The gaming machine described in means A1, characterized in that the trigger ball entry means is configured to allow a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game.

According to the above means A2, by providing an opportunity ball entry means (an opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting a motion trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area can be adjusted. Based on this, it is determined whether the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, etc., so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which increases the interest. It is possible to improve the

In addition, if the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to operate is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to occur and activate the movable body.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means A2, by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means A3, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means A4. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means A4, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

In addition, if a configuration is provided with a first flow route (the first first route) through which game balls that have passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means, and a second flow route (the second first route) through which game balls that have passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the first flow route (the first first route), the overall proportion of game balls that flow down to the special ball entry means will be higher. In such a case, in consideration of the balance of interests between the player and the game hall, the probability of the occurrence of a special game state must be set low, which may reduce the interest of the player.

Means A5. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that:

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means A5, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means A5, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above means A5 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the open/close member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.

In addition, the structure related to the above means A5 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means A6. Display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activated lottery process;
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after a stop display is made on the display means.

If the movable body suddenly operates without any warning, the player who has not been paying close attention to the movable body until then may not be able to grasp the situation and may become confused.

On the other hand, according to the means A6, by providing the display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance using the movable body, and to further improve the interest for the players.

Means A7. A fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation display times;
A fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
The gaming machine described in means A6 is characterized by comprising a display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

According to the above means A7, it is possible to make the variable time variable from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the display means. Furthermore, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means A8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to use.

According to the above-mentioned means A8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means A9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means A1 to A8 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means A10. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A9, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means A11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
and an opening/closing control means capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A10, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means A11, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue B. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the moving body would periodically or continuously perform a predetermined action regardless of the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the presentation related to the moving body would tend to be monotonous, causing players to lose interest in the moving body. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means B1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above-mentioned means B1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, in this means, by providing an opportunity ball entry means (an opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting an action trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. As a result, it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In addition, if the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to operate is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to occur and activate the movable body.

In contrast, according to the present means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Means B2. comprising a predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The game machine according to means B1, characterized in that the opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the predetermined detection means, where the game ball detected by the predetermined detection means can enter. .

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, the movable body will operate at the same timing every time with respect to a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means (inner area). I will do it.

As a result, the performance related to the movable body becomes monotonous, and the timing of the operation of the movable body is easily grasped by the player, and there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means B2, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance related to the movable body, and to suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Means B3. comprising an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the operating condition can be satisfied when a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

By using the above-mentioned means B3, it is not necessary to perform a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, thereby simplifying the control process.

Means B4. an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
and a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means,
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means B4, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, so it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means B5. A gaming machine as described in any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that a gaming ball that has entered (or passed through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (cannot enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means B5, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means B6. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means B6, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the ball enters the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Means B7. The gaming machine described in means B6, characterized in that it has a plurality of the second routes configured so that the time required for the gaming ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing every time from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means, the effects related to the movable body will become monotonous, and the movement of the movable body by the player may become monotonous. It becomes easier to grasp the timing of body movements, and there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating a gaming machine in accordance with the timing may occur.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B7, the operation start period from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means to the time when the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body. This in turn reduces the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with that timing.

Note that "the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route allocation means to the trigger ball entry means is different."

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball that passes through each of the "plurality of second routes". may be configured to move toward a single ball opportunity entry means (original ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same opportunity ball entry detection means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means B8. The gaming machine described in means B6, characterized in that it is provided with a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means, if two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. When game balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball ahead is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a certain period of time, the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest. .

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B8, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the possibility remains that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match depending on whether the second game ball is allocated to the "first second route with a long time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a short time to reach the advantageous state", so the player can closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

Means B9. A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B9, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means B9, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means B9 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened and closed during an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means B9 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to have multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means B10. A gaming machine as described in any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the means B10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means B11. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means B1 to B10, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the means B10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means B12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means B13. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means B1 to B12, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body performs the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means B13, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional issue C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as multiple game balls entering the variable ball entry means at the same time in succession, depending on the timing of the entry of these multiple game balls, the multiple game balls may all head toward the special ball entry means, or may not all head toward the special ball entry means and may be guided to the discharge section or non-special ball entry means, etc., which can easily cause problems.

Normally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, even if a new game ball enters the special ball entry means when the right to a special gaming state has been obtained, the special gaming state will not be granted. It is configured.

Therefore, even if two game balls consecutively enter the special ball entry means, two special game states are not granted, but only one special game state occurs, which may cause the player to have negative feelings such as loss, waste, or waste.

As a result, there is a concern that even though a favorable situation for the player, such as being granted a special gaming state, has occurred, the player's interest may be reduced.

Conversely, if all of the game balls were guided to the discharge section, etc., the player's expectations that, since multiple game balls entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, this would be advantageous in getting a game ball to enter the special ball entry means would not be met, and interest would likely decrease.

In this sense, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the excitement when multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means.

Means C1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entry means,
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
a first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of a game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
a movable body that is provided in an internal area of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing at least between an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route (can act on the game ball);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring about a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the above means C1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is configured with a route allocation means that can allocate the destination of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means to a first route or a second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes will flow down to either the first route or the second route. The above-mentioned movable body is provided in order to make it possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. This will result in more effective effects.

As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the occurrence of a special game state may be improved by entering a plurality of game balls into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means C2. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second route,
comprising a maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in the first state,
When the game ball flows down to the first route due to the route allocating means maintained in the first state, the route allocating means is configured to change to the second state due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that:

Under the configuration according to the means C2, in order to operate the movable body, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, and in order to cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. It is necessary to change the sorting means to the second state and guide the game balls to the second route.

In other words, to operate the movable body, at least two game balls must be successively inserted into the variable ball entry means, the first preceding game ball must flow down the first route by the route allocation means maintained in the first state, and the second succeeding game ball must flow down the second route by the route allocation means changed to the second state.

As a result, it is possible to ensure a more reliable gaming experience in which it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. Can be done.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the above-mentioned means C2, for example, "means C2. The route allocation means is,
A route allocating member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means (such as a biasing means) capable of maintaining the route allocation member in the first position,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that, when a gaming ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first position, the route distribution member is changed to the second position (for example, against the biasing force of a biasing means) by the force received from the gaming ball.

Means C3. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. From the moment when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. The gaming machine according to means C2.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach an advantageous state, two game balls may be consecutively entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball that precedes the game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the is activated, there is a risk that the game's interest will be significantly reduced.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means C3 can prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and prevent a decline in the interest of the player.

Note that the above-mentioned "advantageous state arrival time" only needs to be shorter than the above-mentioned "movable object arrival time", for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly from the route distribution means (a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly) This is intended to include configurations in which the distance is zero, etc.).

In addition, one example of how the "movable object arrival time" can be increased is by increasing the distance the game ball needs to travel to pass through the "first route."

Moreover, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the "first route." Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

In addition, "from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means, the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means), and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. The movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means until the game ball reaches the movable body It is preferable that the arrival time is shortened.

If the above-mentioned "movable body arrival time" is longer than the above-mentioned "advantageous end arrival time", two game balls will consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the first game of the preceding one will be played. When the ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player can distribute the game ball after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable object ends. Since it is known that the movable object is reached, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Means C4. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed at least into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a distribution driving means that periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation of changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball is always allocated to either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball is allocated to the other route, then the outcome will be decided when the two game balls that enter in succession are alternately allocated by the route allocation means due to the relationship between the above-mentioned "time to reach advantageous state" and the above-mentioned "time to reach movable body" that is preset, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the means C4, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball that precedes the ball enters the first route or the second route. Since it is not decided which one to allocate, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed.

As a result, players can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state, preventing a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed at least into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
comprising a maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in a reference state between the first state and the second state;
When the route allocating means is maintained in the standard state, the game ball can flow down either of the first route and the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means maintained in the reference state, the route allocating means changes to the second state due to the force received from the game ball,
When the game ball flows down to the second route due to the route allocating means maintained in the reference state, the route allocating means is configured to change to the first state due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that:

The above-mentioned means C5 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means C4. In particular, this means does not require a drive means for driving the route allocation means, so a relatively simple configuration can be adopted, while realizing a configuration in which multiple (two) game balls flowing continuously are alternately caused to flow down different routes. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration and control, make it more compact, etc.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the above-mentioned means C5, for example, "means C5. The route allocation means is,
A route allocation member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which at least the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means (e.g., a biasing means) capable of maintaining the route allocation member in a reference position between the first position and the second position,
When the route allocating member is maintained in the reference position, the game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route.
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocation member maintained in the reference position, the route allocation member is changed to the second position by the force received from the game ball,
The gaming machine described in the means C1 is characterized in that, when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating member maintained in the reference position, the route allocating member is changed to the first position by the force received from the game ball.

Means C6. The gaming machine described in means C4 or C5, characterized in that it is provided with a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is in an advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach an advantageous state, two game balls may be consecutively entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball that precedes the game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the is activated, there is a risk that the game's interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the structure is such that the time required for the movable body to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means to reach the advantageous state is shortened, the two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball that precedes it is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a certain period of time, it will be known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C6, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route with a longer time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a shorter time to reach the advantageous state", so there remains a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match, allowing the player to closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

It should be noted that a structure may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "first said second route" and the "second said second route"; The game ball passing through the "first said second route" or the "second said second route" respectively moves toward one opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means), and the same opportunity ball entry detection means It may be configured to be detected by means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, the configuration may include a trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) that can periodically or randomly change the destination of the game ball to at least the "first second route" or the "second second route." With such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be increased.

Means C7. A gaming machine as described in any one of means C1 to C6, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means C7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means C8. A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C8, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means C8, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the means C8 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period." The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means C8 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after it starts to operate, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means C9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the above-mentioned means C9, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means C10. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means C1 to C9 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means C11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means C12. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means C1 to C11, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to create the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the means C12, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional issue D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing each time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Therefore, in the past, there was a possibility that the player could grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body and commit fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Furthermore, the effects associated with movable objects tend to be monotonous, and in this respect, further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent activities and increase interest.

Means D1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
Movable body control capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by a predetermined ball detection means). and means;
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from at least a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is met) until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the above-mentioned means D1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, in this means, by making variable the period (e.g., the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when the operating condition is met) until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the movable body does not operate at the same timing every time, and this makes it possible to prevent the game presentation using the movable body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will know the timing of the operation of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means D2. A trigger ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
A timing ball entry detection means is provided for detecting a game ball that has entered the timing ball entry means,
The gaming machine described in means D1 is configured so that the operating condition can be established based on the detection of a gaming ball by the trigger ball entry detection means.

If the trigger ball entry means that activates the movable body is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or other material could be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to be committed, resulting in the activation of the movable body.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned method D2, the movable body is configured to operate due to the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunctions can be suppressed.

Here, for example, if the configuration is such that "when a game ball is detected by the trigger ball detection means, the operating condition is met," then it is not necessary to execute a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, and this can simplify the control process. In addition, it can also prevent fraudulent acts such as installing a fraudulent ROM with an altered program related to the lottery process.

Means D3. an operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that define an operation start period from at least the establishment of the operation condition until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state;
and actuation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of the plurality of actuation patterns stored in the actuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to means D2, characterized in that:

According to the means D3, a plurality of patterns of operation start periods (for example, opening periods) are prepared, and a predetermined operation start period is selected from these patterns by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the effects of the means D1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the present means, there is no need to provide the variable ball entry means with a complicated mechanical selection mechanism, and the structure of the variable ball entry means can be simplified.

Means D4. During the operation start period, a performance means capable of executing a pre-performance (opening performance) that suggests that at least the movable body will be in the predetermined advantageous state;
A performance pattern storage means for storing a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
The gaming machine described in means D3 is characterized in that it comprises a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation means based on a presentation pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

According to the above-mentioned means D4, by performing a preliminary effect suggesting that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. .

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know when the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, and has a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state at a timing that is advantageous to him. In addition to the behavior of the game ball, the game effect related to the movable body can be watched closely, making it possible to further improve interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the activation start period from when the activation conditions are met until the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is variable, if the activation start period becomes relatively long, there is a risk that the player will feel anxious or angry that the movable body will not be in a predetermined advantageous state even though the activation conditions are met.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such problems, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for players.

Means D5. comprising a lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D4, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process. .

According to the above-mentioned means D5, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Means D6. Display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activated lottery process;
Fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different times of the fluctuation display;
Variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
Display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is displayed on the display means.

According to the means D6, by providing the display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the movable body may be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know whether the movable object will be in a predetermined advantageous state or not, but he or she watches the behavior of the game ball and the fluctuation display with a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance related to the movable body and further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the means D6, it is possible to make variable the variable time from the start of variable display to the stop display on the display means. Furthermore, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the effects of the means D1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means D7. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any of means D2 to D6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

If a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a continuous ball situation in which two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them). (Similarly.) Even if an advantageous situation occurs for the player, if all of these multiple game balls head toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is, There is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means D7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Note that the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" may be that the game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means.

Means D8. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a distribution driving means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means;
The gaming machine described in means D7 is characterized in that it has a plurality of second routes configured so that the time required for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means differs.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing every time from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means, the effects related to the movable body will become monotonous, and the movement of the movable body by the player may become monotonous. It becomes easier to grasp the timing of body movements, and there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating a gaming machine in accordance with the timing may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means D8, by providing a plurality of second routes, it is possible to make the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means variable.

Furthermore, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means (predetermined trigger) until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

Furthermore, according to the present means, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game balls. This allows the player to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

Note that "the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route allocation means to the trigger ball entry means is different."

In addition, a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) may be provided separately for each of the "plurality of second routes," or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes" may move toward a single trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball entry detection means.

For example, the configuration may include "a first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a first trigger ball entry means, and a second second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a second trigger ball entry means."

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means D9. As the plurality of second routes,
The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. A first route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state; , and a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means, if two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, if the time from when the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is shorter than the time from when the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the movable body, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the first route, it will be clear that the game balls will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, unless the movable body is maintained in the predetermined advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, and interest may be significantly reduced.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means D9, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route with a longer time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a shorter time to reach the advantageous state", so there remains a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match, allowing the player to closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

The "second second route" only needs to take a shorter time for the game ball to pass through than the "first second route," and is intended to include, for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the trigger ball entry means directly from the route allocation means (such as a configuration in which the distance to the trigger ball entry means is zero).

In addition, one possible way to increase the time it takes for the gaming ball to pass through the "first second route" is to increase the distance the gaming ball travels to pass through the "first second route".

In place of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the gaming ball is installed on the "first second route." Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane, which causes the gaming ball to go back and forth or make a circuit of the same location several times before moving on, or a configuration in which ribs or the like are used to stop the momentum of the gaming ball and allow it to move on over time.

Furthermore, a delay means such as that described above may be installed within the "first route" so that the time it takes for the game ball that has flowed down the first route to reach the movable body is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to pass through the "second second route."

Means D10. The game according to any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means D10, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means D11. A gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the means D11, even game balls other than the game balls that entered the timing ball entry means and the game balls that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means D11, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body, the movable body has not yet been activated, and even if the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means D11 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means D11 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means D12. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the above-mentioned means D12, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means D13. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means D1 to D12 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above-mentioned means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means D14. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D13, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means D15. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means D1 to D14, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means D15, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue E. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a guide route that directs game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and also have a deviation route (discharge route) for discharging game balls that deviate from the guide route out of the internal area.

However, in the past, even if a gaming ball had entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, once the gaming ball had deviated from the guide route and been guided to a deviated route, it would not contribute to the game within the variable ball entry means and would simply be ejected. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means E1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first route (guidance route) that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down to the first route out of the internal area;
Ball detection means (discharged ball detection means) capable of detecting game balls that have passed through the second route;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a specific processing execution means capable of executing a specific processing advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of a game ball by the ball detection means.

According to the means E1, based on the detection of game balls ejected via the second route (ejection route), specific processing advantageous to the player, such as making it easier to generate a special gaming state, is executed. be done.

This allows new gameplay to be provided by utilizing not only the behavior of game balls flowing down the first route (guidance route) toward the special ball entry means, but also game balls discharged via the second route, dramatically increasing the interest of players.

Means E2. The gaming machine described in means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means.

According to the means E2, it becomes possible to execute specific processing advantageous to the player each time a game ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the interest for the player can be dramatically improved. .

Means E3. comprising lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery processing based on detection by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means E3, it is no longer necessary to execute a specific process advantageous to the player every time a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the monotony of the specific process can be suppressed and the player's anticipation for the specific process being executed can be increased. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

Means E4. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met when the number of gaming balls counted by the counting means becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined number.

By using the above-mentioned means E4, even if the number of game balls that deviate from the first route (guidance route) and flow into the second route (discharge route) becomes relatively large, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Means E5. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

By using the above-mentioned means E5, it is no longer necessary to execute a specific process advantageous to the player every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, and therefore the same effect as the above-mentioned means E3 is achieved.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; Equipped with a movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
The specific processing execution means is
Any one of the means E1 to E5 is characterized in that the movable body control means is equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. gaming machines.

According to the means E6, by providing a movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means E7. comprising route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine according to means E6, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flown down the first route.

Under the configuration according to the means E6, if, for example, a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time when the above predetermined condition is about to be met (the two game balls are almost spaced apart from each other) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the balls continue to flow down without leaving a gap (the same applies hereinafter), all of these multiple game balls will be sent to the second route (discharge). If the ball goes towards the special ball entry means, there is a risk that even if the movable body is in an advantageous state, a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means E7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or Since it is possible to direct one game ball to the first route, such as flowing down one of the second routes and the second subsequent game ball flowing down the other route, the above-mentioned movable body The provided effects will be more successful.

As a result, the player will be able to watch with anticipation the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means, thereby further increasing his interest.

Means E8. The gaming machine described in means E6 or E7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball is more easily allowed to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the means E8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means E9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The means E6 or E7 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. gaming machines.

According to the means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means E10. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body will be activated to the next game ball that has passed through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be operable.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means E10, game balls other than the game ball that entered the special ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable entry ball means together with the game balls that were involved in (last) the establishment of the predetermined condition, or even if the game balls that were involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition (last) and the other game balls do not enter the variable entry means, Even if other game balls that entered the ball means do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means will have a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. This will give you a chance to play the ball.

This allows the player to actively play the game, trying to get the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, even after confirming that the predetermined conditions have been met. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means E10 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during an open state period following the open state period through which the opening/closing member has passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means E10 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the specified condition is met until the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to cause multiple game balls to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means E11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means E6 to E10 is configured to be able to execute control to cause the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means E11, even during an open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which a release opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Means E12. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means E1 to E10, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Conventional Issue F. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, since conventional variable ball entry means have multiple winning holes (specific areas), such as on both the left and right sides, game balls may enter the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time. there were.

Therefore, even if multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a timing advantageous to the player, depending on the timing of the entry of the game balls, they may interfere with each other, and even one ball may be specially entered. There is a risk that the game ball will not flow down the route desired by the player, such as not heading toward the ball means, and the player's interest will decrease.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means F1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that do not flow down to the first route to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
The game ball is provided so that its state can change between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is more advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and the game ball that has flowed down to the first route. A movable body that can cause a change in behavior (that can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; Equipped with
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A game machine characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means'' or ``a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means'', This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the means F1, by providing a movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this method, by providing a trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

In particular, this means is configured with a route allocation means that can allocate the destination of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means to a first route or a second route.

As a result, for example, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball will flow down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball will flow down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body even more effective.

As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the occurrence of a special game state may be improved by entering a plurality of game balls into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

In addition, in this means, the specific area is provided in only one location through which the game balls can pass one by one, and a ball passageway capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided in only one location, so that the game balls can be appropriately guided one by one to the route allocation means. This makes it possible to more reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the outcome will differ depending on which route the first game ball and the second game ball follow, so players will be more likely to pay close attention with anticipation to the behavior of the game balls that are assigned by the route assignment means. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest.

Means F2. The gaming machine described in means F1, characterized in that gaming balls that do not pass through the ball passage are configured to be unable to pass through the specific area.

If the ball passage were configured to allow game balls that do not pass through the ball passage to pass through the specific area, there is a risk that the game balls that do not pass through the ball passage may interfere with other game balls that pass through the ball passage and flow down toward the specific area. In contrast, the above-mentioned means F2 prevents game balls from passing through the specific area unless they pass through the ball passage, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunction and further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means F1.

Means F3. The gaming machine according to means F1 or F2, wherein the ball passage is provided on either the left side or the right side of the opening/closing member outside the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F3, the game balls can be guided one by one to the opening/closing member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress problems such as a plurality of game balls entering the opening/closing member at the same time and causing the balls to bite.

Means F4. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the ball passage is provided so that only game balls shot with a predetermined intensity by the shooting means can pass therethrough.

According to the means F4, the ball path is provided only at a position (for example, on the right side of the variable ball entry means) through which only the game ball fired with a predetermined intensity (for example, right-handed) by the firing means can pass. The effects of the means F1 etc. can be further enhanced.

Means F5. Means F1 to F4, characterized in that the means F1 to F4 are provided with a regulating means for allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while regulating the pass of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in the specific area. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above-mentioned means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball passage in succession, the behavior of the first preceding game ball can prevent the first preceding game ball from colliding with the second following game ball, thereby preventing them from getting in each other's way. As a result, the effect of the above-mentioned means F1 can be further improved. Here, the above-mentioned regulating means also includes a means that changes state from a first state to a second state due to the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. The game according to any one of means F1 to F5, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means F6, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means F7. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the above means F7, even game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state) are treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means F7, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the means F7 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed." The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the structure related to the above means F7 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means to the time when the movable body starts operating. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means F8. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the means F8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means F9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means F1 to F8 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means F10. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
opening/closing control means capable of performing opening/closing operations of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means F11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any of the means F1 to F10 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-mentioned means F11, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional issue G. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the performance related to the movable body is monotonous, such as the movable body performing a predetermined action every time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest (feeling of excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means G1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
special ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) after passing through the specific area;
a first opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball entry means;
a first flow route that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second flow route that allows the game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route distribution means (downstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first downstream route or the second downstream route;
A movable body that is capable of changing its state at least between an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the specific area. and,
the predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body is caused to perform a predetermined operation when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means; A movable body control means capable of controlling the movable body,
In a specific state, the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can be reached is different depending on whether the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and the case where the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. A gaming machine with special features.

In addition, when "a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first opportunity ball entering means or the second opportunity ball entering means", for example, "the first opportunity entry means" "When a game ball is detected by the ball detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means," or "based on the ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means." This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result is obtained through a predetermined lottery result (winning result).

According to the above-mentioned means G1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this means, by providing various opportunity ball entry means (various opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting movement triggers of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball that enters the internal area can be detected. Since it is determined based on the behavior whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Furthermore, the present means is configured such that the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can be achieved is different between when the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and when the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. There is. This allows the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

Means G2. The time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the first flow route and reach the first opportunity ball entry means, and The gaming machine according to means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for the ball to flow down the downstream route and reach the second opportunity entry means is different.

By using the above-mentioned means G2, the period until the movable body can reach a predetermined advantageous state can be varied depending on whether the game ball flows down the first flow route or the second flow route.

This prevents the moving body from always performing actions at the same timing, making it possible to prevent the game presentation using the moving body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

Means G3. The gaming machine described in means G1 or G2, characterized in that it is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of gaming balls in the first flow route or the second flow route.

According to the means G3, even if the lengths of the first downstream route and the second downstream route are relatively short, by providing the above delay means, it takes a long time until the game ball reaches the predetermined position. can be relatively long. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the gaming space. Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

Means G4. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the detection of the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means,
The predetermined operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (a winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process,
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G3, characterized in that in the specific state, the probability of obtaining the specified lottery result differs when a gaming ball is detected by the first trigger ball entry detection means and when it is detected by the second trigger ball entry detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means G4, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Furthermore, in the present means, the percentage of obtaining the predetermined lottery result is different between when the game ball is detected by the first chance ball entering detection means and when the game ball is detected by the second chance ball entry detection means. Since they are configured differently, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

Means G5. The route distribution means is
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second flow route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4, characterized in that in the specific state, the rate at which the route distribution means is in the first state and the rate at which it is in the second state are different.

The above-mentioned means G5 can diversify the behavior of the game ball, and the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the interest. In addition, the route allocation means may be configured so that the proportion of the first state and the proportion of the second state can be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. a predetermined route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
In the specific state, the game ball includes a route allocating means (upstream route allocating means) capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G5, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flown down the predetermined route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

On the other hand, according to the means G6, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the predetermined route or , the game ball is flown down either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the subsequent second game ball is flown down the other route. Since it becomes possible to direct the object to both directions, the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body becomes more effective.

Means G7. A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G6, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means and/or the second trigger ball entry means) is configured so that it cannot flow down (cannot enter) into the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means G7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that is acted upon by the movable body are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means G8. A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the means G8, a game ball other than the game ball that entered the timing ball entry means and the game ball that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route is entered by the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second In the case where a game ball enters the special ball entry means (a game ball that enters the special ball entry means) and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down the specified route passes the movable body, the movable body has not yet been activated, and even if the game ball that has flowed down the specified route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball to subsequently enter the internal area during the next open state of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area after the next) to flow down the specified route, and the action of the movable body will provide a chance for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above means G8 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in the open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

In addition, the configuration related to the above means G8 is based on the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from when the movable body starts operating after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means G9. A gaming machine described in any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means G9, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be created that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means G10. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player;
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means G11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means G12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means G1 to G11 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-mentioned means G12, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue H. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body was configured to operate at a fixed timing each time, for example, when a gaming ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Therefore, conventionally, the timing of the movement of the movable body could be grasped by the player, and there was a possibility that a fraudulent act could be carried out, for example, by vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, the effects related to moving objects can easily become monotonous, and in this respect, there was a need to further increase the interest.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent activities and increase interest.

Means H1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
The behavior of the game ball that passes through the specific area is provided so that the state can change between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. A movable body that can cause a change in (that can act on the game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: opening/closing pattern determining means for determining which opening/closing pattern to execute among a plurality of opening/closing patterns when performing opening/closing control of the opening/closing member.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the above means H1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body moves in a predetermined manner based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. Since the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the game will be in an advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In particular, in this means, by providing a plurality of opening/closing patterns of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member), the timing at which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means changes. Even if the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means will vary. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body.

When changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means, it is possible to consider a method of changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means by, for example, providing multiple operating patterns for the movable body and changing the probability of selecting the pattern to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means; however, changing the operating mode of the movable body, which changes the behavior of the game ball by performing a specified operation, to adjust the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means to the desired rate is extremely difficult and requires repeated trial and error. In this regard, the present method makes it easier to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means.

Means H2. The gaming machine described in means H1, characterized in that when a predetermined opening/closing pattern is performed among the plurality of opening/closing patterns, the movable body is more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed.

According to the above-mentioned means H2, for example, when a predetermined opening and closing pattern is performed in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently, it becomes possible to cause more game balls to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time, and therefore, due to a synergistic effect with the configuration in which the movable body is likely to enter a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc., by increasing the expectation of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Means H3. Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on the ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
Display means that starts a variable display based on the entry of a ball into the triggered ball entry means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
and a holding means capable of holding the variable display on the display means for a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to means H1 or H2, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process.

By using the above-mentioned means H3, the movable body does not have to move every time a predetermined trigger occurs, which enhances the effect of the above-mentioned means H1, etc., while preventing the presentation related to the movable body from becoming monotonous and increasing the player's anticipation of the movable body moving.

In addition, in this means, by providing the holding means, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the movable body operates. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H4. Any one of the means H1 to H3 is characterized in that it includes an operation pattern determining means for determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is brought into the advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the means H4, by providing a plurality of operating patterns of the movable body, the effects of the means H1 and the like can be further enhanced. Although it is extremely difficult to adjust the ball entry rate into the special ball entry means to a desired ball entry rate, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest, as described above. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Means H5. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, wherein at least one opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns includes a plurality of opening/closing operations.

According to the above-mentioned means H5, the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently, so that more game balls can be allowed to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means.

Means H6. According to means H5, at least one opening/closing operation among the plurality of opening/closing operations has an opening time longer than a firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball by the firing means. gaming machines.

By using the above-mentioned means H6, the effect of the above-mentioned means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

On the other hand, according to the means H7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means H8. The game according to any one of means H1 to H7, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means H8, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means H9. A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. In a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means H9, the game ball other than the game ball that entered the timing ball entry means and the game ball that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means H9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means H9 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the open/close member through which the game ball has passed." A game machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the configuration related to the above means H9 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means H10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the above-mentioned means H10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means H11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means H1 to H10 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means H12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
opening/closing control means capable of performing opening/closing operations of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means H13. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means H1 to H12, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the means H13, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, some players will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issues I. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

However, in such pachinko machines, in order to make the game ball enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to continue firing the game ball into the game area even after the game ball has entered the start ball entry means. In such cases, conventionally, since the variable ball entry means has already been opened, even if a new game ball enters the start ball entry means at this timing, no opening opportunity is obtained and only a prize ball is awarded. This can decrease the interest of players, and there has been a demand for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the interest of players.

Means I1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
An opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
A movable body that is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state by making the movable body perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be awarded when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means and satisfies predetermined conditions during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, when "a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "a starting entering ball capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the starting ball entering means" ``When a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detecting means'' or ``a predetermined starting lottery is conducted based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detecting means'', This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the initial lottery.

According to the above-mentioned means I1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this means, a game ball is newly inserted into the starting ball entering means during a predetermined opening game state in which the variable entering ball means is caused to execute a predetermined release based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The configuration is such that control can be executed to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a ball enters the ball and satisfies a predetermined condition.

As a result, the movable body performs a predetermined operation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, even during the open game state (during the release period of the variable ball entry means) in which release opportunities etc. cannot be obtained in the past. A situation may arise that is advantageous to a player who does.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Means I2. The gaming machine described in means I1, characterized in that the movable body control means is configured to execute control to make the movable body perform the predetermined action and bring about the predetermined advantageous state when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open gaming state and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in pachinko machines, a predetermined time from the time when the variable ball entry means is opened (or when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means that has been opened) is set as a waiting time (remaining ball monitoring period) during which a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means but has not yet been discharged (remaining ball) is detected by a specified detection switch.

However, conventionally, if a new game ball enters the starting ball entry means during this remaining ball monitoring period, prize balls will be paid out, but a lottery based on the entered ball will not be held. , the variable ball entry means is configured so as not to be in an open state.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means I2, even during a predetermined period (remaining ball monitoring period) after the end of a predetermined open game state, a state advantageous to the player in which the movable body performs a predetermined action can be generated based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means. As a result, the action and effect of the above-mentioned means I1 can be further enhanced.

Means I3. The present invention is characterized in that the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means to when the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) starts to open can be changed in a plurality of ways. A gaming machine according to means I1 or I2.

If the time between when the game ball enters the start entry means and when the variable entry means starts to open is always constant, when the game ball enters the start entry means, the player will easily realize that the opening timing of the variable entry means related to the start entry means means that the game ball will not be able to enter the special entry means, and there is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game ball at that point.

In addition, if the time between when the game ball enters the start ball entry means and when the variable ball entry means starts to open is always constant, the player can easily grasp the timing of the opening of the variable ball entry means, and there is a risk that the player may easily perform actions such as firing the game ball to coincide with that timing.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means I3, the opening timing of the variable ball entry means changes, and the variable ball entry means does not always open at a fixed timing, so that the monotony of the game presentation related to the variable ball entry means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the variable ball entry means. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as firing a game ball in accordance with the opening timing of the variable ball entry means will be performed. Furthermore, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I4. a first display means that starts a variable display based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on a lottery result of a predetermined opening lottery process;
a first fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different times of fluctuation display related to the first display means;
a first variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the first variation pattern storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; ,
a first display control means for controlling the first display means based on the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern selection means;
The opening/closing control means is
The game machine according to means I3, characterized in that the game machine is configured to be able to execute the open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened after the first display means displays a stop indication.

According to the above means I4, it is possible to make the variable time variable from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the first display means. Utilizing this, it is possible to make variable the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means until opening of the variable ball entering means is started.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I3 described above can be realized through relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I5. Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operating lottery processing based on a game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof); Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I4, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the activated lottery process.

If the movable body were configured to operate every time a game ball entered the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or a specified period of time after the end of that state), the player would easily understand at the time the game ball entered the start ball entry means that the timing of the operation of the movable body related to the start ball entry would prevent the game ball from entering the special ball entry means, and there is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game ball at that point.

According to the above means I5, the movable body does not operate every time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after its termination). Therefore, it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means I6. The time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined operation of the movable body starts. The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I3, characterized in that (the time it takes for the movable body to reach the predetermined advantageous state) can be changed in a plurality of ways.

If the time between when the game ball enters the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) and when the specified operation of the movable body is started is always constant, when the game ball enters the start ball entry means, the player will easily realize that the timing of the operation of the movable body related to the start ball entry will not allow the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, and there is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game ball at that point.

In addition, if the time between when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) and when the specified operation of the movable body is started is always constant, the player may easily grasp the timing of the operation of the movable body, and may easily perform actions such as firing the game ball to match that timing.

In response to this, according to the above-mentioned means I6, the timing of the movement of the movable body changes, and the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, so that the monotony of the game presentation using the movable body can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body. This reduces the risk of players firing game balls in time with the movement of the movable body. Furthermore, because players will continue to fire game balls, it is possible to prevent a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I7. The gaming machine described in Means I6, characterized in that it is provided with a set time selection means capable of selecting one of a plurality of preset set times based on the game ball entering the start ball entry means during the specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) to the start of the specified operation of the movable body after the game ball enters the start ball entry means during the specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state).

According to the above means I7, the configuration related to the above means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I8. A variable display is started based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), and the lottery result of the predetermined operation lottery process is started. a second display means that performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on;
a second variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different times of variation display related to the second display means;
A plurality of patterns stored in the second fluctuation pattern storage means based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) second fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the fluctuation patterns;
a second display control means for controlling the second display means based on the variation pattern selected by the second variation pattern selection means;
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to means I6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is displayed on the second display means.

According to the above-mentioned means I8, by providing a second display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know whether the movable object will be in a predetermined advantageous state or not, but he or she watches the behavior of the game ball and the fluctuation display with a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, the game presentation related to the moving object can attract more attention, further increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned means I8, the time from when the variable display starts on the second display means until when the stopped display is made can be made variable. By utilizing this, the time from when the game ball enters the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) until when a specified operation of the movable body is started can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the above-mentioned means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I9. A gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area after the end of the predetermined open gaming state (and/or a predetermined period of time after the end of the predetermined open gaming state).

In gaming machines that are configured to have a higher probability of a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means with the aid of a movable body, when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry means (at the time of the operation assist lottery) during a specified open gaming state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state), there is a risk that the player's expectations will fade and interest will decrease if there is no gaming ball in the internal area.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means I9, even if there is no game ball present in the internal area when a game ball enters the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state), a game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means that is opened at a specified timing is given a higher chance of entering the special ball entry means.

As a result, the player can change the variable even after confirming that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end of the state). It becomes possible to actively play the game in order to cause the game ball to enter the ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means I10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means I10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means I11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means I1 to I10 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means I11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of the means B1 to B13. The configuration of a part or all of any of the above means C1 to C12, the configuration of a part or all of any of the above means D1 to D15, the above means E1 to E12 A part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a part or all of the means G1 to G12, a part or all of the means H1 to G12, The configuration of a part or all of any of H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means B1 to B13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means D1 to D15, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following configurations: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A pinball game machine that includes a game area where game balls are guided, and ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, operating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. A more detailed example of the embodiment is "a pinball gaming machine that includes an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a predetermined gaming area (for example, the gaming area is composed of a gaming board surface, etc.) that extends in a substantially vertical direction and to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (a general winning port, a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) that are arranged within the gaming area, and that is configured so that the behavior of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can be visually observed."

(c) The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the pinball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

[Second embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to a second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with the first embodiment described above (same components, same processing contents, etc.) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals. Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment) includes a "rotating body" as the "rotating means" of the present invention.

Figure 50 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 51 is an oblique view, and Figure 52 is an oblique view showing the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 in the open state. Figure 53 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30, etc. Figure 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 55 is an oblique view showing the inner frame 12 and the back pack unit 203, etc. in the open state. However, for convenience, nails and various gimmicks arranged on the game board 30 surface as path changing means, glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted in Figure 52.

As shown in FIG. 52 etc., the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 55, the outer frame 11 is made up of an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy extrusion material, and these frame components 11a to 11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape by removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 50). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 54) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

In addition, a resin valance panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the upper surface of the valance panel 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to form between the valance panel 87 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 52, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as its axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 is designed to be able to be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 when closed. A roughly elliptical window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed structure of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 50, a lower tray 15 is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame set 14 as a ball receiving tray, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 is provided at the front side of the lower tray 15 for discharging game balls from within the lower tray 15.

In addition, a performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The production button 125 is configured so that the player can press it (press it downward). Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as an operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the production button 125. When the production button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to a sub-control device 262, which will be described later. Thereby, when the player presses the performance button 125, a predetermined performance is performed on the performance display device 42, etc., or the content of the performance is changed, as will be described later.

A game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18 is provided to the right of the lower tray 15, protruding toward the front. The handle 18, which serves as an operating means that can be operated by the player, includes, for example, a base fixed to the front frame set 14, a rotation operating part as a first operating part rotatably attached to the base, a variable resistor as an operating amount detection means that detects the operating amount of the rotation operating part, and a launch stop switch as a second operating part that can select whether or not to launch the game ball into the play area.

An upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls, aligns them in a row, and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as the "launching device") 60, which serves as a launching means described below. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray connecting passage 71 and a discharge port 16, described below.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 as operation means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10, loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. In addition, to clarify the ownership of the game balls used in the game hall, predetermined information that can identify the game hall is written by engraving, etc., and fraudulent acts using game balls brought from other game halls are prevented. In addition, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. However, in pachinko machines in which game balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device, etc. to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary.

Further, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball extraction button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, various light-emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light-emitting means are controlled to change their light emission state, such as turning on or blinking, depending on changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play. For example, a frame lamp 102 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window portion 101. Also, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the frame lamp 102, which turn on when a specified error occurs. Incidentally, a number of fine through holes are formed in the upper portion of each error display lamp 104 of the frame lamp 102, corresponding to the speaker SP (see Figure 52) provided on the back of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71).

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figure 53. A launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched from the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39 (game board 30). In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device having a plunger as a movable member is used as the launching device 60.

In this embodiment, when game balls are continuously detected by the full detection switch for a predetermined period of time, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from firing. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer continuously detected for a predetermined period of time), the launching device 60 is permitted to fire.

A ball feeding device 63 is provided above the firing device 60. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by a driving means such as a solenoid.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 52 and 53 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. ) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, so as to almost completely close the exit of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear ends of the lower plate communication path 71 and the upper plate communication path 73. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective entrances of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the payout passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart, and the gap between them is replaced by the game ball. is allowed to pass.

In addition, since the entrance of the lower tray communication path 71 and the entrance of the upper tray communication path 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the balls are not put out. The game balls flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and are delivered to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 53. Note that the game board 30 in this embodiment is based on a transparent plate, which is a light-transmitting member formed into a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties (light-transmitting properties), such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, ABS resin, etc. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not mean only that objects existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be seen in a completely transparent state, but that at least some of the light is transmitted and the presence of the object can be seen. It may also include a so-called semi-transparent state.

With this configuration, the player can view various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear area of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting means are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the gaming area, and the player , the light emitted from the LED can be seen from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emitting manner in response to various game performances, and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game.

Furthermore, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of a band-shaped metal plate, and guide means for guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. A rail 50 is attached. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left in FIG. 53) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 53) of the outer rail component 52. As a result, the game ball fired with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 54 as a movement regulating means and is returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the game board 30. Therefore, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53 serving as a return restriction means, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the play area.

In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. It is discharged.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening (general winning section) 31, a variable winning device (big winning opening) 32, an upper starting winning opening 33YA, a lower starting winning opening 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and a first The special display device 43L, the second special display device 43R, etc. are arranged so as to be fitted into attachment holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, i.e., in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, a large number of nails 49, windmills 57, etc. are arranged to distribute the falling direction of the game balls in a predetermined area or to guide the game balls to a predetermined position. The windmill 57 is a rotating body that rotates when a game ball moving relative to itself comes into contact with it and acts on the flow of the game ball, and changes its state between a rotating state and a stopped state. For example, the windmill 57 has an axis member whose rear end side is fixed directly or indirectly to the game board 30, a central cylindrical portion into which the front end side of the axis member is inserted, multiple contact pieces formed as acted upon parts extending radially outward from the central cylindrical portion, and a decorative disk portion that is circular when viewed from the front and is provided at the front end of the central cylindrical portion, and when a game ball comes into contact with the contact pieces and receives an external force, the external force causes the windmill 57 to rotate with the front-to-rear direction as the axial direction. Of course, the configuration of the windmill 57 is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

The game balls guided to the play area flow down various routes while their flow direction and rotation direction are changed by nails 49 and the like. Some of the game balls guided to the play area are guided to the windmill 57 while moving relatively along various routes, and the falling route is divided to the left and right by the windmill 57. Here, when the game ball passes the left side of the windmill 57 in the first mode and acts on the contact piece in the first proximity state, the windmill 57 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, which is the first operating mode. On the other hand, when the game ball passes the right side of the windmill 57 in the second mode and acts on the contact piece in the second proximity state, the windmill 57 rotates in the clockwise direction, which is the second operating mode.

Under such a configuration, for example, game balls distributed to the right side by a windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the left windmill 57) provided in the left side area of the variable display unit 35 are distributed to the left side by the left windmill 57. Compared to a game ball, it is easier to be guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA by the nail 49 or the like. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the right windmill 57) provided in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 are compared to the game balls distributed to the left side by the right windmill 57. , it becomes easier to be guided to the variable winning device 32.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the left windmill 57 rather than the case where the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game ball passes through the left side of the left windmill 57. When passing through the right side of the ball, the proportion of game balls guided to the upper starting prize opening 33YA is higher than when the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the right side of the left windmill 57. When the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game balls pass through the left side of the left windmill 57, the proportion of game balls guided to the general winning slot 31 increases.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the game area is widely expanded in the left-right direction, the windmill 57 and the like are provided to facilitate guiding the game ball toward the upper start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, and the like. In addition, the nails 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that winning at the upper start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, and the like occurs with a moderate probability.

In this embodiment, the windmills 57 are provided in the left side area and the right side area of the variable display unit 35, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the left windmill 57 or the right windmill 57 is provided. It is also possible to have a configuration including the following. Furthermore, when the game board 30 is configured based on a transparent plate as in the present embodiment, at least a portion of the windmill 57 such as a decorative disc portion is configured as a transparent portion using a transparent resin material or the like. You may. The relative positional relationship between the windmill 57 and the game ball is a first positional relationship in which at least a part of the windmill 57 and at least a part of the game ball do not overlap, and a first positional relationship where at least a part of the windmill 57 and the game ball are in a non-adjacent state. The positional relationship changes to a second positional relationship, which is a close state in which at least a portion thereof overlaps. Therefore, when the transparent part is provided, in the first positional relationship in which the game ball does not pass through the windmill 57, the light transmitted through the game board 30 is visible to the player through the transparent part of the windmill 57. It happens. On the other hand, in the second positional relationship in which the game ball passes through the windmill 57, a part of the game ball that overlaps with the transparent part of the windmill 57 blocks a part of the light that has passed through the game board 30, and also Light such as external light is irradiated from the front through the part of the game ball.

The game board 30 is also provided with winning detection switches as detection means for detecting game balls that have entered various winning ports (ball entry means) such as the general winning port 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning port 31, and a count switch 223 is provided at the variable winning device 32. A first start winning switch 224A is provided at the upper start winning port 33YA, and a second start winning switch 224B is provided at the lower start winning port 33YB. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball wins (balls entered) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and the lower starting winning hole 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15). For example, if there is a prize in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there will be 3 prizes, if there is a winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, one prize will be awarded, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, there will be 10 prizes. When there is a win in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15). Here, the upper starting winning hole 33YA may constitute a first starting ball entering means, the lower starting winning hole 33YB may constitute a second starting ball entering means, and the variable winning device 32 may constitute a specific ball entering means. . Further, a state in which a game ball enters a predetermined winning hole such as the upper start winning hole 33YA may be considered as an advantageous state. For example, the first advantageous state is a state in which a game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA and three prize balls are paid out, and the first advantageous state is a state in which a game ball enters the general winning hole 31 and ten prize balls are paid out. It may also be an advantageous state of 2. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through this out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a grand prize opening (code omitted) into which game balls can be won, a rectangular flat opening/closing plate (great winning opening opening/closing member) 32a as an opening/closing member for opening and closing the grand prize opening, and the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with a solenoid for the big prize opening (not shown) that opens and closes the opening/closing portion 32a.

When the variable winning device 32 is in a normal state where the specified conditions are not met, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. However, when the specified conditions are met, such as when a big win or small win occurs (described below), the large winning opening solenoid is excited, causing the opening/closing plate 32a to tilt forward around its bottom edge as a pivot, opening the large winning opening so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening.

The upper start winning opening 33YA is always capable of receiving a winning ball. In contrast, the lower start winning opening 33YB is equipped with an opening/closing device 37Y as an opening/closing type winning assistance device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya serving as opening/closing members that rotate and displace in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. , the movable blade 37Ya opens and closes in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition, thereby creating an open state in which the game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB, and a gaming ball entering the lower starting winning opening 33YB. The state can be changed between a closed state and an impossible closed state.

As described above, the upper start winning opening 33YA and the lower start winning opening 33YB are provided with the first start winning switch 224A and the second start winning switch 224B, respectively, as detection means for detecting a winning game ball. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state or the like will be generated, and a variable display or a specified effect is performed on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42, which will be described later. If the lottery is won, the jackpot state or the like is granted.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 86, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", and "JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot".

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) with "Long Open" as one special prize state.

In this embodiment, "long open" means that a prescribed time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 has been switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the variable winning device 32 has received a specified number of winnings. It refers to one opening/closing operation until it becomes a closed state on the condition that 10 game balls win a prize.

In the "16R Special Jackpot B" jackpot state, a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds), after which a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated 12 times (twelve rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" means that a specified time of 0.4 seconds has passed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the specified time has elapsed as specified in the variable winning device 32. It refers to one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that three game balls win a prize.

In this embodiment, the launching device 60 launches game balls into the game area at a rate of one every 0.6 seconds based on the operation of the handle 18 by the player. In contrast, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the opening time of the opening and closing plate 32a is set to 0.4 seconds. In other words, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of one opening and closing plate 32a is shorter than the launch cycle of the game balls. Therefore, there are cases where not even one game ball wins with only one "short opening". For this reason, the opening and closing plate 32a is rarely closed based on the condition related to the number of winning balls (three winning balls) out of the two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", and once opened, the opening and closing plate 32a is usually closed based on the passage of the specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period of "short opening" from changing each time.

In the jackpot states of "4R definite variable jackpot A" and "4R definite variable jackpot B", this is repeated four times (4 rounds) with "long opening" as one special prize condition.

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 8 times (8 rounds), "short open" is further set as one special prize state, This is repeated eight times (eight rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", the "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), the "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the "4R Regular Jackpot A" and "4R Regular Jackpot B" jackpot states, a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds).

In the "JUB jackpot" jackpot state, a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times, after which a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated fifteen times. In other words, five "short openings" are performed in the first round, and a "long opening" is performed in each of the second to sixteenth rounds.

In addition, when any of the above-mentioned "special jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, the "high probability mode (high probability state)" is granted as the lottery mode after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when any of the "normal jackpots" occur, the "low probability mode (low probability state)" is granted after the jackpot state ends.

"High Probability Mode" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased compared to the "Low Probability Mode" that is normally set. The "High Probability Mode" that is set after a jackpot ends will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the above-mentioned various jackpots are completed, the winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is maintained while the special display devices 43L and 43R display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode (high ball entry state)" is given as a.

"High support mode" refers to a state in which the ratio of open to closed states per unit time in the opening/closing device 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is higher than in the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" that is normally set.

For example, the "high support mode" includes (1) a state in which the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 described below is shorter than that in the "low support mode", (2) a state in which the movable blade 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is (3) A state in which the opening time (regulated time) is longer than in the "low support mode"; (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode"; , (4) If a winning result is obtained by the opening/closing lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of times the opening/closing process of the movable blade 37Ya is executed per time is set to "low support mode". (5) A state in which the winning probability in the open lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than the winning probability in the "low support mode." The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB, increasing the number of times jackpot lottery is executed, and making it possible to hold balls well.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "high support mode" is assigned, by changing the fluctuation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) is configured so that the variable display time is shorter than that in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", a "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot condition occurs. The "high support mode" will hereinafter be referred to as "until next time/high support mode."

After the "16R High Success Big Win B" and "4R High Success Big Win B" end, a "high support mode" is granted while the special display devices 43L and 43R display the variable "20 times", "30 times", "40 times", or "50 times". Hereinafter, this "high support mode" is referred to as the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", or "50 times high support mode", respectively.

After the "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A" end, the "high support mode" is granted while the special display devices 43L and 43R display the "30 times" variable display. This "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as the "30 times high support mode S."

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" "Support mode" will be added.

After the "JUB jackpot" ends, the "Until next time - high support mode" will be granted.

In this embodiment, various gaming states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if a state is given a "high probability mode" and a "high support mode", it becomes a so-called "probability variable state".

When "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are applied, it becomes what is known as the "normal state."

When the "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are added, it becomes a so-called "time saving state".

When a state is provided with a "high probability mode" and a "low support mode", it becomes a so-called "potential state (potential probability variable state)". In other words, in the "potential state", the probability of winning a jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is no different from the "normal state", so the state with the "high probability mode" This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the various "big wins" mentioned above, a "small win" occurs when a predetermined result is obtained in the win/lose lottery. In the small win state, a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times (five rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode granted after the small win state ends are the original modes before the small win state occurred. For example, if the lottery mode before the small win state occurred was the "high probability mode," the "high probability mode" will be maintained even after the small win state ends.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the prize is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery in the case where the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The distribution of jackpot types is different. If you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the upper starting winning slot 33YA, "16R definite strange jackpot A", "16R sure strange jackpot B", "4R sure strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot B" ”, “16R regular jackpot A”, “16R regular jackpot B”, and “4R regular jackpot B”, and if you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the lower starting winning slot 33YB. The winnings will be divided into one of the following: "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Regular Jackpot A," and "JUB Jackpot." Furthermore, the "small win" is configured to occur only when a winning lottery is triggered by a game ball landing in the lower starting prize opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L, 43R are each composed of two segment display devices and are installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or to light up any combination of display segments. This allows each segment display device to individually display a predetermined symbol (including letters and numbers).

When a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, a variable display is displayed on the first special display device 43L, and when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB, a variable display is displayed on the second special display device 43R. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the display mode when the variable display stops, whether or not you have won the jackpot lottery, etc. is definitively displayed. Ru. For example, when a game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, a fluctuating display is made at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for a few seconds) )do. If the player wins the jackpot lottery, numerical values corresponding to various jackpots (see FIG. 86) are displayed when the fluctuations are stopped, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode" is displayed. If you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "16R Guaranteed Variable Jacket B", "84" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In addition, if you win the "JUB jackpot", "1.-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and if you win the "small win", the first or second special display will stop displaying. "1-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, in order to enhance the production effect of the "JUB jackpot", the stopping modes of both "1.-" and "1-" for the "JUB jackpot" and the stopping mode "1.-" for the "JUB jackpot" are important. It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the stop modes of the special display devices 43L, 43R corresponding to various winning types are not limited to the above modes. For example, there may be multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, rather than just one. For example, when a "16R special jackpot A" is won, one of "91", "92", "93", ... may be selected and stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R.

Even if there are multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, it is preferable that the multiple stop modes related to the "JUB jackpot" and the multiple stop modes related to the "small win" are configured to be confusingly configured. For example, any of "-1.", "-2," "-3.", "-4," ... may be displayed as multiple stop modes related to the "JUB jackpot," and any of "-1," "-2," "-3," "-4," ... may be displayed as multiple stop modes related to the "small win." In such a configuration, one of a pair of a specific symbol (here, "1," "2," "3," ...) with a predetermined display segment (here, ".") lit and a specific symbol that is not lit is included in the multiple stop modes related to the "JUB jackpot," and the other is included in the multiple stop modes related to the "small win," and they are configured to be alternately switched.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in any or all display segments can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning hole 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variable display is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper starting winning slot 33YA and the gaming balls that have entered the lower starting winning slot 33YB. Correspondingly, up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are suspended. Further, the number of times of holding is displayed by lighting on the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. Incidentally, when a new game ball enters the starting prize opening 33YA, 33YB during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also suspended.

In addition, basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the upper start winning opening 33YA and is consumed in the order in which they entered, and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the lower start winning opening 33YB and is consumed in the order in which they entered. However, if both the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB are reserved (if one or more of the first reserved lamp 46a and the second reserved lamp 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is consumed preferentially. In other words, unless all the variable displays triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB are consumed, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA will not be displayed. For example, when one first reserved lamp 46a is lit, if a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB and one second reserved lamp 46b is lit, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is postponed, and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed first. For ease of explanation, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is also referred to as the "first variable display," and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is also referred to as the "second variable display."

The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through it one by one. As will be described in more detail later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a lottery is held to determine whether the opening and closing device 37Y (lower start winning hole 33YB) should be opened, and a variable display is performed on the normal pattern display device 41. If the opening lottery is won, the opening and closing device 37Y is opened for a specified period of time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display when passing through the through gate 34, and an effect display device 42 that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. is provided.

Furthermore, the variable display unit 35 is provided with a variable identification lamp 40 that indicates which winning event the variable display being performed on the performance display device 42 corresponds to, either the upper start winning port 33YA or the lower start winning port 33YB.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light and display "O" or "X" as a normal symbol, and each time the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing manner, for example, from "O" → "X" → "O" → ... Then, when the changing display stops at the "O" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the opening and closing device 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened for a predetermined period of time. The display content of this normal symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 while the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variation, the variation display for that part will be displayed after the current variation display has finished. In other words, the variation display will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of times that the variation display can be held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times can be held, and the number of times that the display is held is displayed by lighting up the hold lamp 44.

The performance display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 described below. That is, in the performance display device 42, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and is displayed by the display control device 45 described below.

As shown in FIG. 92, the performance display device 42 is provided with three pattern display areas, for example, upper, middle, and lower, and multiple types of patterns (numbers) are displayed (variably displayed) in each pattern display area in sequence, and then the patterns are displayed in order for each pattern display area (for example, in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area). For example, when the main control device 261 determines the above-mentioned various "certain jackpot" or various "normal jackpot", the first or second special display device 43L, 43R displays a display corresponding to the jackpot, and the performance display device 42 displays the patterns in a combination corresponding to the jackpot (for example, the patterns displayed in the upper pattern display area, middle pattern display area, and lower pattern display area are the same), and the jackpot state is started. In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or a "small jackpot", the combination of patterns displayed in the performance display device 42 does not correspond to a jackpot, as described later.

Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state.

In addition, if a reach state occurs but a jackpot state does not occur, a pattern different from the pattern displayed in the upper pattern display area and the lower pattern display area is displayed in the middle pattern display area. Also, in the case of various "probable jackpots" or various "normal jackpots", a repeated number is displayed in the performance display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, depending on the type of pattern displayed, it is impossible to determine the game state (such as "high probability mode" or not) that will be awarded after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", a predetermined specific combination of numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of a double. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and "small win" which is less advantageous to the player. ” can be expected to occur, so it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Of course, the specific number combinations displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas may be different for a "JUB jackpot" and a "small jackpot". Also, when a "JUB jackpot" or a "small jackpot" is obtained, instead of a specific predetermined number combination, a random miss combination may be displayed, as in the case of a miss.

Furthermore, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the number of pending changes in the special display devices 43L, 43R corresponding to the above-mentioned pending lamps 46a, 46b (see FIG. 92, etc.).

In this embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. Therefore, the player will be able to understand the game status and lottery results, etc. solely through the display contents (pattern display, hold display, etc.) of the performance display device 42.

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R, etc. may be configured to be visible. However, as mentioned above, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the gaming area where the player cannot easily see them, and the size of the display section is small, and the characters for identification are displayed in a stopped state. The time is also relatively short. Therefore, unless one takes his eyes off the special display devices 43L and 43R and carefully observes them, it is virtually impossible to grasp the game state to be granted.

The fluctuation specific lamp 40 is equipped with an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and when a fluctuation display is performed on the effect display device 42 triggered by a winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It emits blue light, and it emits red light when a variable display triggered by a winning in the lower start prize opening 33YB is performed.

Next, the configuration of the variable display unit 35 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 56 and 57, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, so that they are integrated into the variable display unit 35.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 55) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side of the opening 213a. The liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42 is a known one in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members laminated is disposed on the front side of a backlight serving as a light emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be viewed through the opening 751.

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member, but includes various decorative members plated on the base member, lens members made of transparent resin that transmit light such as LEDs, etc. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. The stage portion 770 has gentle undulations formed along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the center of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770, which opens toward the front and into which a game ball can fall. Furthermore, a communication path 775 communicating with the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened at the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. In addition, in the state where the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 53, the discharge port 776 is located above the upper starting winning port 33YA.

A guide groove 778 is formed in the center of the stage section 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and slopes gently downward toward the back. This allows the game ball to fall from the stage section 770 to the drop hole 774.

A ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass is formed inside the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47. The entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while the exit portion 764b opens toward the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It's open. This ball passage 764 allows the game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage section 770 within the center frame 47.

After the game ball guided onto the stage section 770 rolls on the stage section 770, it falls from the front onto the game board 30 surface or falls into the above-mentioned drop hole 774. Among these, the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 are guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, an upper performance accessory unit 761 and a lower performance accessory unit 762 are arranged between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213.

Specifically, the upper performance device unit 761 is disposed on the back side of the upper edge portion 47a of the center frame 47, and under normal circumstances (see FIG. 56), it is almost entirely covered by the upper edge portion 47a, etc., and only a portion of it is visible to the player.

Further, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is arranged on the back side of the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, and in normal times (see FIG. 56), it is almost entirely covered by the lower side 47b etc. Only the player can see the player.

Here, the configurations of the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 will be explained in detail. First, the upper performance accessory unit 761 will be explained in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47.

The upper performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 810 disposed on the upper front surface of the frame cover 213, an upper movable accessory 811 that is swingably provided with respect to the unit base portion 810, and the upper movable accessory unit 761. A swing drive mechanism 812 for swinging an object 811 is provided.

The swing drive mechanism 812 includes a support arm 814 that supports the upper movable accessory 811, and a swing motor 815 that serves as a drive source for driving the support arm 814.

As the support arm 814 is rotated based on the drive of the swing motor 815, most of the upper movable accessory 811 is located behind the upper side 47a of the center frame 47, making it difficult for the player to see. It is possible to oscillate between a standby state (see FIG. 56) and an exposed state (see FIG. 58) in which most of the part is located on the front side of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 and is easily visible to the player. . The area in front of the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 constitutes the effect area (predetermined area) in this embodiment.

The swing motor 815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable part 811 (support arm 814) can be controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signal. At the same time, the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable part 811 (support arm 814) from the reference position can be grasped by monitoring the number of drive pulse signals input. Although not shown in the figure, the swing drive mechanism 812 is provided with a position detection sensor for detecting the rotational position of the support arm 814.

Here, the upper movable part 811 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 101 to 105. The upper movable part 811 comprises a base part 817 fixed to the tip of the support arm 814, and an upper rotating body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base part 817. The upper rotating body 820 is a rotating body for performance purposes, and constitutes the first rotating body as the first rotating means.

The base portion 817 has a generally circular shape when viewed from the front, and a support shaft portion 818 is formed in the center thereof to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open back side.

On the back side of the base portion 817, an upper rotating body drive motor 821 is attached and fixed. A pinion gear 821b is fixedly attached to the front end of the rotating shaft 821a of the upper rotating body drive motor 821. The driving force of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the upper rotary body 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

A circular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front surface of the base portion 817. A circular opening 822a is formed in the center of the cover body 822.

The upper rotating body 820 mainly consists of a rotating base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 arranged in a ring shape on the front side of the rotating base plate 823.

The rotating base plate 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction, and six extension pieces 827 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical portion 826. The six extension pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (60° intervals) around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 826.

The cylindrical portion 826 is externally fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817 . As a result, the rotating board 823 is rotatably supported by the base portion 817. Although not shown in the drawings, the cylindrical portion 826 or the spindle portion 818 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the rotary board 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off from the base portion 817 (spindle portion 818). ing.

Each extending piece 827 is formed with a slit 829 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 . A cylindrical pinion support shaft 830 is formed on the back surface near the tip of each extending piece 827 to protrude rearward.

An annular central gear member 831 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating board 823 from behind.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large diameter gear portion 831a at its front side and a small diameter gear portion 831b at its rear side, forming a step from front to rear.

Further, a pinion gear 832 is fitted onto each of the pinion support shafts 830 and meshed with a large-diameter gear portion 831a of a central gear member 831.

Furthermore, an annular presser plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotating board 823 (see FIG. 105). The circular opening 835a of the holding plate 835 has a slightly larger diameter than the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831, through which the small diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted, and has a smaller diameter than the large diameter gear portion 831a.

As a result, the pressing plate 835 is fixed to the tip of the pinion shaft 830 while covering the six pinion gears 832 and the large diameter gear portion 831a from the rear and passing through the small diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is held rotatably around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823.

The pinion gear 821b of the upper rotor drive motor 821 meshes with the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831. This transmits the rotation of the upper rotor drive motor 821 to the central gear member 831.

In other words, the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. constitute a main power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the upper rotor drive motor 821 to the upper rotor 820 to slide the movable piece 825 and drive the rotating base plate 823 to rotate.

Furthermore, a second drive gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823. As shown in FIG. 105, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with a second transmission gear 842. The second transmission gear 842 is connected to an oil damper 843. A support member 844 is fitted into the oil damper 843 from the rear, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817.

This brakes the rotating base plate 823 so that it does not rotate at torques below a predetermined level. Here, the second drive gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, etc. form a restrictive power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the upper rotating body 820 and restricts the operation of the upper rotating body 820.

The regulating power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and directly transmits power between the upper rotating body drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without going through the rotating board 823. is configured so that it is not transmitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 101 and the like, the upper rotating body 820 is formed with the motif of one flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to imitate one flower petal.

Each movable piece 825 is formed from a transparent resin material that has translucency. However, the surface of the general part of each movable piece 825 (excluding the magnifying lens part 828 described later) has fine uneven parts (not shown). As a result, the general part of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the performance display device 42 located at the rear, resulting in a uniform surface emission state as a whole, but it is difficult to identify the display object (object) displayed on the display part 42a through the general part of the movable piece 825.

In contrast, one of the six movable pieces 825 has a magnifying lens portion 828 formed thereon. Hereinafter, when the movable piece 825 having the magnifying lens portion 828 is to be distinguished from the other movable pieces 825, it may be referred to as a "specific movable piece 825A." The movable piece 825 and the magnifying lens portion 828 constitute the light-transmitting portion in this embodiment.

The magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can enlarge and display objects located behind it, allowing the player to view them. For example, the player can enlarge and view display objects such as letters and characters displayed on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 through the magnifying lens section 828.

A rack portion 838 extending linearly is integrally formed on the back surface of the movable piece 825. The rack portion 838 is inserted into the slit 829 of the extending piece 827 of the rotating board 823. This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 (the direction in which the extending piece 827 extends). Although not shown, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off from the rotary board 823.

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 is engaged with the pinion gear 832 on the back side of the extending piece 827. As a result, the movable piece 825 is moved along the slit 829 of the extending piece 827, that is, in the radial direction of the rotating base plate 823, by transmitting the power of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 via the main power transmission mechanism. It becomes possible to slide along the line.

When the upper rotor 820 is in this configuration and in a normal standby state, the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extension pieces 827 are each slid to the innermost position in the radial direction and are in a reduced diameter state (see Figures 101 and 102).

When the upper rotor 820 is in a contracted state, the base ends of the six movable pieces 825 are in approximate contact with the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823, and both side edges on the base end side of each movable piece 825 are in approximate contact with the base end side edges of the adjacent movable pieces 825.

On the other hand, when a specific performance is being performed, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter as the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extension pieces 827 simultaneously slide radially outward (see Figures 103 and 104).

Further, a motor control board (motor driver) 845 is attached to the back side of the base portion 817 to control the upper rotating body drive motor 821 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

The upper rotor drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via the motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes according to the number of input pulses. In other words, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement and rotation speed of the upper rotor 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, the amount of rotational displacement of the upper rotor 820 from the reference position can be grasped.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a position detection sensor 846 for detecting the rotational position of the upper rotary body 820 (rotary substrate 823) is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817. In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 846, a known photosensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light blocking piece 847 is formed to protrude from the rear side of the rotating base plate 823 (the second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). When the light blocking piece 847 is detected by the position detection sensor 846, it is determined that the upper rotating body 820 is in the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the reference position is the position where the specific movable piece 825A is placed on the right side in the horizontal direction when the upper rotating body 820 is viewed from the front.

Further, although not shown, an upper accessory control board is provided on the base portion 817 to monitor and control the position detection sensor 846 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

Assuming that the upper rotor drive motor 821 rotates once with a 360-pulse excitation signal (drive pulse signal) under this configuration, the angle change (angle change per step) based on one excitation signal pulse is 1°. In other words, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec in this embodiment, it takes a minimum of 720 msec (= 2 msec x 360 pulses) for the upper rotor drive motor 821 to rotate once.

Further, if it is assumed that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 and the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, the upper rotary body drive motor Under the configuration in which the upper rotating body 821 rotates once with an excitation signal of 360 pulses, the upper rotating body 820 rotates once in 2880 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses x 4) at the shortest.

However, the amount of angle change based on a one-pulse excitation signal and the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small diameter gear portion 831b are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 103 and the like, when the upper rotary body 820 stops rotating, the six movable pieces 825 are set at six locations in the rotational direction of the upper rotary body 820 (clockwise in this embodiment). Predetermined stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, a first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the upper rotating body 820, a second stop position EA2 located on the lower right side, and a third stop position EA2 located on the lower left side) The vehicle is configured to stop at any one of a stop position EA3, a fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, a fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally on the upper left side, or a sixth stop position EA6 located on the diagonally upper right side. ing.

Here, the operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 configured as described above will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 101, 102, etc., in normal times when no accessory performance is performed, the six movable pieces 825 are each located at the radially inner slide limit position of the upper rotating body 820. In other words, the upper rotary body 820 is in the most contracted state.

In this state, when the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is rotated forward, the central gear member 831 first begins to rotate clockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b.

At the beginning of rotation, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base plate 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotary base plate 823 remains stopped and does not move.

Meanwhile, as the central gear member 831 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, each of the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large diameter gear portion 831a rotates. Power is then transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portions 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and each of the six movable pieces 825 slides radially outward in the radial direction of the upper rotor 820 along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. In other words, the upper rotor 820 expands in diameter.

As shown in Figures 103 and 104, when each of the six movable pieces 825 reaches the radially outer sliding limit position of the upper rotor 820 and the upper rotor 820 reaches its maximum diameter, rotational power is transmitted to the rotating base 823. When the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotating base 823 begins to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

After that, when the upper rotor drive motor 821 stops, the upper rotor 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 each stop at one of the stop positions EA1 to EA6.

When the reel performance ends and normal operation resumes, the upper rotor drive motor 821 is rotated in reverse, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front via the pinion gear 821b.

Even in this case, when the central gear member 831 first starts to rotate, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotating base plate 823 via the above-mentioned regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotating base plate 823 remains stationary and does not move, and only the movable piece 825 moves.

As a result, each of the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotates. Then, power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 slide and displace radially inward of the upper rotor 820 along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827, causing the upper rotor 820 to reduce in diameter.

Then, when each of the six movable pieces 825 slides to the radially inner sliding limit position of the upper rotor 820, the upper rotor drive motor 821 is stopped. This causes the upper rotor 820 to return to its normal contracted state.

Next, the lower prop unit 762 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in Figures 56 to 58, the lower prop unit 762 is provided on the back side of the lower edge portion 47b of the center frame 47.

The lower prop unit 762 includes a unit base 850 arranged to cover the lower front surface of the frame cover 213, a lower movable prop 851 arranged to be movable up and down on the back surface of the unit base 850, and a vertical drive mechanism 852 for moving the lower movable prop 851 up and down.

The lower movable accessory 851 includes a slide base part 853 that is displaceable in the vertical direction, a pair of left and right pillar parts 854A and 854B that project upward from the slide base part 853, and the pillar parts. Driving motors 855A and 855B for the lower rotary body provided at the upper ends of 854A and 854B, respectively (see FIG. 107); It includes lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, and motor control boards (motor drivers) 857A, 857B (see FIG. 107) provided on the back side of the drive motors 855A, 855B. The lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating bodies for presentation, and constitute a second rotating body as a second rotating means.

As shown in FIG. 106, the left lower rotary body 856A (hereinafter referred to as "lower left rotary body 856A") is provided with a first information writing portion 856Aa having a circular shape when viewed from the front at one end in the longitudinal direction. A second information writing section 856Ab having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided at the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing sections 856Aa and 856Ab constitute affected sections in this embodiment.

Both information sections 856Aa, 856Ab are made of a translucent material and are configured to transmit light emitted from the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the performance display device 42 located at the rear at a predetermined transmittance.

In this embodiment, the first information section 856Aa has "SMALL" written in clear letters against a colorful, transparent (e.g., rainbow-patterned) background component with a relatively high light transmittance (hereinafter, such writing may be referred to as "strong SMALL"). The second information section 856Ab has "SMALL" written in dull letters against a dark, semi-transparent background component with a relatively low light transmittance (hereinafter, such writing may be referred to as "weak SMALL").

On the other hand, the general part of the lower left rotating body 856A, excluding the two information writing sections 856Aa and 856Ab, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and serves as a light-shielding section that does not transmit the light emitted from the display section 42a of the performance display device 42.

Similarly to the lower-left rotating body 856A, the lower right rotating body 856B (hereinafter referred to as the "lower-right rotating body 856B") has a first information portion 856Ba that is circular in front view at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a second information portion 856Bb that is circular in front view at the other end in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. 106. The information portions 856Ba and 856Bb constitute the acted upon portion in this embodiment.

Similar to the two information display sections 856Aa, 856Ab of the lower-left rotating body 856A, the two information display sections 856Ba, 856Bb of the lower-right rotating body 856B are made of a translucent material and are configured to transmit light emitted from the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the performance display device 42 located at the rear with a predetermined transmittance.

In the first information writing section 856Ba of the present embodiment, "BIG" is written in clear letters against a background component that has a relatively high light transmittance and is brightly colored and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "BIG"). (This description is sometimes referred to as "Strong/BIG.") The second information writing section 856Bb has "BIG" written in dull letters against a dark semi-transparent background component with relatively low light transmittance. (hereinafter, such description may be referred to as "weak/BIG").

On the other hand, the general part of the lower right rotating body 856B, excluding the two information writing sections 856Ba, 856Bb, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and serves as a light-shielding section that does not transmit light emitted from the display section 42a of the performance display device 42.

The lower rotor drive motors 855A and 855B are stepping motors whose rotation is controlled by the drive pulse signals applied to them, and the amount of rotation of the lower rotors 856A and 856B can be controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signals. At the same time, the amount of rotational displacement of the lower rotors 856A and 856B from the reference position can be grasped by monitoring the number of drive pulse signals input.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, position detection sensors 858A and 858B for detecting the rotational positions of the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are attached to the lower surfaces of the lower rotary body drive motors 855A and 855B. . In this embodiment, known photosensors in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other are used as the position detection sensors 858A and 858B.

Correspondingly, light shielding pieces 859A and 859B are formed to protrude from the back sides (near the side edges) of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. Then, when the light shielding pieces 859A, 859B are detected by the position detection sensors 858A, 858B, it is recognized that the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the longitudinal direction of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B is along the vertical direction, and the first information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ba side are higher than the second information writing parts 856Ab, 856Bb side. The position where , becomes the reference position.

The vertical drive mechanism 852 is composed of a vertical drive motor 860 disposed on the unit base portion 850 and a rack portion 861 provided on the right edge of the slide base portion 853. A pinion gear 860a fixed to the rotating shaft of the vertical drive motor 860 is engaged with the rack portion 861 of the slide base portion 853.

Although not shown in the figure, the unit base part 850 has a guide groove part extending in the vertical direction, and the slide base part 853 has a protrusion part that is assembled to the guide groove part. This prevents the slide base part 853 from shifting left and right when it moves up and down. In other words, the guide groove part and the protrusion part form a guide means that guides the lower movable part 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B).

With this configuration, by rotating the vertical drive motor 860, the lower movable accessory 851 can be slid in the vertical direction.

Normally, the lower movable accessory 851 is in a standby state where most of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are located at the standby position behind the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, making it difficult for the player to see (see FIG. 56). There is. Then, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates forward, and the slide base portion 853 slides upward, so that the lower movable accessory 851 is moved so that the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are connected to the production display device 42. It is located on the front side of the display section 42a and is in an exposed state where it is easily visible to the player (see FIG. 58).

Also, from this state, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates in the reverse direction, causing the slide base portion 853 to slide downward, and the lower movable part 851 returns to its normal standby state.

The vertical drive motor 860 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by the applied drive pulse signal, and the vertical movement amount of the lower movable part 851 (lower rotors 856A, 856B) can be controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signal. At the same time, the vertical displacement amount of the lower movable part 851 from the reference position can be grasped by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 863 is attached to the unit base 850 to detect the vertical position of the lower movable part 851. In this embodiment, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are arranged facing each other at a distance is used as the position detection sensor 863.

Correspondingly, a light blocking piece 864 is formed protruding from the lower end of the rack section 861 of the slide base section 853. Then, when the light blocking piece 864 is detected by the position detection sensor 863, it is determined that the lower movable part 851 (slide base section 853) is in the reference position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the position where the lower movable part 851 is in the above-mentioned standby state becomes the reference position (standby position).

Here, although not shown in the drawings, it may be configured to include a movement regulating means such as a stopper capable of regulating the movement of the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) by a predetermined amount or more.

Although not shown in the figure, the unit base section 850 is provided with a lower role control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and performs drive control of the up/down drive motor 860 and monitors and controls the position detection sensor 863.

In this embodiment, while the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B are rotating or stopped, the positional relationship between the upper rotor 820 and the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B changes between a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the upper rotor 820 does not overlap with at least a part of the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the upper rotor 820 overlaps with at least a part of the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B. As described below, when a predetermined condition is met (when the high support mode continues), the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B are configured to be in the second positional relationship (proximate state) more frequently than when the predetermined condition is not met.

Specifically, when the lower-left rotating body 856A stops rotating, the first information description section 856Aa (strong, SMALL) and the second information description section 856Ab (weak, SMALL) are configured to stop at one of four predetermined stop positions EB1 to EB4 set in the rotation direction (clockwise in this embodiment) of the lower-left rotating body 856A (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EB1 located on the upper side of the lower-left rotating body 856A, the second stop position EB2 located on the right side, the third stop position EB3 located on the lower side, or the fourth stop position EB4 located on the left side).

When the first information section 856Aa (strong, small size) or the second information section 856Ab (weak, small size) stops at the first stop position EB1 and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, the first information section 856Aa (strong, small size) or the second information section 856Ab (weak, small size) that has stopped at the first stop position EB1 is enlarged and displayed via the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, and can be viewed by the player (see Figures 110 and 111).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A corresponds to the first and second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the mode in which the magnifying lens section 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) corresponds to the first mode in this embodiment, and the upward rotation The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the fourth stop position EA4 corresponds to the first operation mode in this embodiment.

When the lower right rotating body 856B stops rotating, the first information section 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information section 856Bb (weak/BIG) are each configured to stop at one of four predetermined stop positions EC1 to EC4 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EC1 located on the upper side of the lower right rotating body 856B, the second stop position EC2 located on the left side, the third stop position EC3 located on the lower side, or the fourth stop position EC4 located on the right side) set in the rotation direction (counterclockwise in this embodiment) of the lower right rotating body 856B.

Then, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop. When stopped at position EA1, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or second information writing section 856Bb (strong/BIG) stopped at the first stop position EC1 is Weak/BIG) is enlarged and displayed for the player to see (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower right rotating body 856B corresponds to the second second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the mode in which the magnifying lens section 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) corresponds to the second mode in this embodiment, and the upward rotation The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the first stop position EA1 corresponds to the second operation mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, due to the various table configurations, when the first information portion 856Aa (strong, SMALL) or the second information portion 856Ab (weak, SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1 and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, that is, when the first information portion 856Aa (strong, SMALL) or the second information portion 856Ab (weak, SMALL) stopped at the first stop position EB1 is enlarged and displayed via the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, the first information portion 856Ba (strong When the first information section 856Ba (strong, BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (weak, BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1 and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop position EA1, that is, when the first information section 856Ba (strong, BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (weak, BIG) stopped at the first stop position EC1 is enlarged and displayed through the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player, such as the continuation of the high support mode, is increased, as described below. Furthermore, the rate of a second advantageous state (high support mode "continued until next time") that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (high support mode "continued +10 times").

Next, the back structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, etc. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 55 and the like. As described above, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 53) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind. It is provided so as to protrude from the rear. Furthermore, on the back side of the frame cover 213, an effect display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 are removably mounted in a stacked state. installed.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a storage box (numeral omitted) with an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and is fixed to the rear side of the performance display device 42 (storage box). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and is fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the insides can be seen. An LED control board or the like that drives the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning openings 33YA, 33YB, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different paths such as the various winning openings and the outlet 36 mentioned above. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217 described below, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

In contrast, the start winning switches 224A and 224B, which detect winnings at the start winning ports 33YA and 33YB, are connected directly to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are input to the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In this embodiment, the back frame set 215 also functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, a board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened toward the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 54, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is provided with multiple external connection terminals for relaying various information transmissions to the hall computer of the gaming hall, etc., and is not labeled for convenience. For example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), terminals for outputting information regarding the opening of the front frame set 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91, 92 described below, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as winning error, lower tray full error, no ball in the tank error, and payout error, and terminals for outputting information regarding the number of winning balls paid out from the payout control device 311 are provided.

However, in this embodiment, there is no terminal for outputting information about a "small win", and the configuration is such that information about the occurrence of a "small win" is not output. In this embodiment, since "small wins" tend to occur relatively frequently during "high support mode", constantly outputting occurrence information every time a "small win" occurs may result in a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such problems are relatively unlikely to occur, such as during "low support mode", the configuration may be such that information about the occurrence of a "small win" is output.

In addition, it is preferable to output the occurrence information of a "JUB jackpot" when the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" is confirmed, for example, after the five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" have ended, that is, after the situation in which it is impossible to distinguish it from a "small jackpot" has been overcome, at the timing of outputting an opening command (jackpot notification performance) described later. If only the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is output in advance when it is still impossible to distinguish it from a "small jackpot," the player may see the information display device installed in the island equipment of the hall corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 and know in advance that a "JUB jackpot" has occurred, which may weaken the performance effect of the "JUB jackpot."

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 54) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It happens.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 with an opening on the top side is provided, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has two rows of ball passages that allow the game balls to flow horizontally, and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and further, a case rail 357 that allows the game balls to flow vertically is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls are paid out as appropriate by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is also provided with a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24 V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, which is supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened to the rear. As shown in FIG. 55, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 as a rear guide means into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow, and at the most downstream part of the discharge passage section 217, a discharge chute (not shown) is formed for discharging the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The game balls are rotating bodies that flow down the game area. The game balls rotate and flow down while coming into contact with the nails 49, the windmills 57, etc. in the game area. The game balls that have won at each winning port, such as the general winning port 31, are collected through the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage 217, and game balls that do not enter any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed integrally.

Also, as shown in FIG. 54, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314, which serve as a payout control means, are removably attached in a front-to-back stacked state to the rear side of the lower frame set 251.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a circuit board box 313a and fixed to the rear side of the lower frame set 251. For convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but in reality they are composed of a single board (printed circuit board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside can be seen.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

As shown in Figure 55, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see Figure 50, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. The inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed thereon that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or the like from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defensive performance. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the rear side, and when the inner frame 12 is in a closed state, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, in this embodiment, various conductive members made of conductive metal materials, such as the reinforcing frame of the front frame set 14, the locking device 600, the rail components 51 and 52, and the left and right frame components 11c and 11d, are used. First, various conductive members made of conductive resin materials, such as the tank 355, tank rail 356, and case rail 357, are electrically connected to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown). Incidentally, game balls are generally made of a metal material, the surface of which is polished or plated, and has a luster that reflects light and is electrically conductive. Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the various conductive members, the static electricity charged on the game ball can be released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 54, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right (lower left in FIG. 54) on the back side of the inner frame 12. The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the working area is not backed up.

The CPU 501, which incorporates the ROM 502 and RAM 503, is connected to an input/output port 505 via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and a normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the performance display device 42, which serves as a display means, is controlled via the sub-control device 262. The sub-control device 262 constitutes the light emission control means in this embodiment.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221, count switch 223, start winning unit switches 224A and 224B, and through gate switch 225, as well as various electrical components such as various boards, are connected to the input/output port 505. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 551, and a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555, and is also connected to the display control device 45. In addition, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the performance button 125, the performance role units 761 and 762, various illumination units, and the lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the effect display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not there is a jackpot, etc. The effect display device 42 controlled by the player performs a display that matches the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a may be backed up, and data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state is restored to before the power was cut off, and is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a launch control device 312, a payout device 358, etc.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that this is not the case, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. Thereby, the player can change the movement amount and operation mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 executes the display of the decorative patterns on the performance display device 42 according to instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input port 527 is connected to an input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. The input port 527 is also connected to the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 via the bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via the bus line 531, and the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

Video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and the display content of the performance display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524. Character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as designs to be displayed on the performance display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the performance display device 42. The VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of the CPU 521, video RAM 524, etc., and mediates the reading and writing of data, and reads out display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a specified timing and displays it on the performance display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24V AC power supplied from an external source, generates a +12V power supply to drive various switches and motors, a +5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supplies to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc. Note that the launch control unit 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V power supply, +5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control unit 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, we will explain the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, a jackpot random number counter CB1 is used for jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a jackpot type determination counter CB2 is used to determine the jackpot type. It is used to set the initial values of the reach selection counter CB3 and the jackpot random number counter CB1, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a reach state when the effect display device 42 is removed and varied, and to determine the type of reach to be generated. The initial value random number counter CINI and the fluctuation used for determining the fluctuation display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42), determining the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) in the effect display device 42, etc. By using the type counters CS1, CS2 and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 used for the lottery of the regular symbol display device 41 (the opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB). There is.

The counters CB1, CB2, CB3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CB4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM503 has a special variable reserve area in which the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area in which the value of the normal pattern random number counter CB4 is stored. The normal variable reserve area has one execution area and four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4).

Further, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are set according to the winning history of game balls to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal variable holding area, the value of the normal pattern random number counter CB4 is stored in chronological order according to the passage history of the game ball through the through gate 34.

By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times each, as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (i.e., 599), it returns to the lower limit value of 0 as the opening value. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CB1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter CB1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is stored in the first special variable reserve area or the second special variable reserve area. Therefore, this process forms part of the various lotteries.

Two types of random number values that result in a jackpot are set: "low probability mode" and "high probability mode". In this embodiment, in "low probability mode", there are two random number values that result in a jackpot, with the values being "7, 307", and in "high probability mode", there are 20 random number values that result in a jackpot, with the values being "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In other words, in "low probability mode", there is a 1/300 chance of winning the lottery (a jackpot state occurs), and in "high probability mode", there is a 1/30 chance of winning the lottery.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a validity determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two validity determination tables, the first validity determination table storing "7, 307" and the second validity determination table storing "7 to 16, 307 to 316". be.

In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is also used to determine a "small jackpot." The number of random numbers that result in a "small jackpot" is 50, and the values are "101 to 125, 401 to 425." In other words, there is a 1/12 probability of winning the lottery (a small jackpot occurs).

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19), it returns to the lower limit, 0. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 determines the jackpot type to be awarded, i.e., "16R special jackpot A", "16R special jackpot B", "4R special jackpot A", "4R special jackpot B", "16R regular jackpot A", "16R regular jackpot B", "4R regular jackpot A", "4R regular jackpot B" or "JUB jackpot".

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins into the upper start winning hole 33YA or when it wins into the lower start winning hole 33YB. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, with reference to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 87), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0, 1". The granting of “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A” is determined.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "2", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "3", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "4", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded, and if it is "5", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "6", it is determined that a "4R special jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "7", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "8", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "9", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded, and if it is "10", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "11", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "12", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "13", "30 times/high support mode" is awarded. If it is "14", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "16", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "17", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "18", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "19", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded.

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning the upper start winning slot 33YA, there is a 10% chance of a "16R special jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "16R special jackpot B", a 5% chance of a "4R special jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "4R special jackpot B", a 5% chance of a "16R regular jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "16R regular jackpot B", a 20% chance of a "4R regular jackpot B", a 5% chance of a "16R regular jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "16R regular jackpot B", and a 20% chance of a "4R regular jackpot B".

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start prize opening 33YB, with reference to the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 88), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0 to 9", " If it is "10, 11", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A", and if it is "12, 13", it is decided to award "4R regular jackpot A". If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode". If it is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times / high support mode". If it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "Normal jackpot B", and if it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "JUB jackpot".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 10% probability that it will be a "4R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability. % probability will be "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability will be "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability will be "JUB jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

Furthermore, the reach selection counter CB3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, the reach selection counter CB3 determines the "out-of-front reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops after the reach occurs with respect to the decorative symbol, and the final stop after the reach occurs in the same way. We will draw a lottery between ``reach except before and after,'' where the symbol stops at a point other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``completely miss,'' where no reach occurs. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 stores a reach determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and which reach it corresponds to. It is provided. The reach judgment table stores values from 0 to 238, CB3 = 0, 1 corresponds to a reach that is out of the front and back, CB3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to a reach other than the front and back, and CB3 = 22 to 238 is a complete reach. It has a configuration that falls under the category of outliers.

The reach selection counter CB3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area) of the RAM 503. area or second special fluctuation holding area).

Of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters CS1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 198), while the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as the "first fluctuation type counter" and CS2 as the "second fluctuation type counter." This is also shown in Figure 60.

For example, in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table (see FIG. 90) related to the normal state, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough fluctuation patterns. The second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation aspects such as variation time. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of variation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode using only the first variation type counter CS1.

The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the changing decorative symbols. The super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols while the changing decorative symbols are being displayed (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. The premium reach is a presentation mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and is performed in a mode in which characters and the like in a different pattern from the super reach are displayed in addition to the decorative symbols while the changing decorative symbols are being displayed (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. The buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the decorative pattern variation by the performance display device 42.

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to use different prime numbers for the jackpot random number counter CB1, reach selection counter CB3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and to use numbers that are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter CB4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The normal symbol random number counter CB4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is obtained when the game ball passes through the through gate 34.

When a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable pattern for a predetermined period of time, after which the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (in this example, a circle) is displayed stationary, and the opening/closing device 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened for a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", there are two winning random numbers, "0 and 1". On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight from "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, followed by the main processing.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control device 261 at the time of the power outage to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 63, first, in step SB301, the process of reading the various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the state of the various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switches 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information is saved.

In step SB302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step SB303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, the reach selection counter CB3, and the normal pattern random number counter CB4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their upper limit values, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter CB1, CB2, CB3, and CB4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step SB304, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, and in step SB305, a through gate passing process is executed as the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the start winning process of step SB304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 64. The execution area of the special variable reserve area and each reserve area are provided with a jackpot random number memory area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, a jackpot type random number memory area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and a reach random number memory area that stores the value of the reach selection counter CB3.

First, in step SB501, it is determined based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224B whether the game ball has won in the lower starting winning hole 33YB. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB502, the value of the lower reservation counter Nb that counts the number of reservations in the variable display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB502, the process moves to step SB509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB502, the process proceeds to step SB503, where the lower holding counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step SB504, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 updated in the random number update process of step SB303 are set among the vacant reservation areas in the second special fluctuation reservation area. Store in the first area. After step SB504, the process moves to step SB505.

In step SB505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step SB506, when it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a second jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the second jackpot type determination table. If the value is one of "0 to 9", turn on the "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "10, 11" corresponding to "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" , turn on the "4R Probable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to "4R Normal Jackpot A", turn on the "4R Normal Jackpot A Flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'', and select one of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to ``JUB jackpot''. If so, turn on the "JUB jackpot flag".

Here, if a "16R High-Speed Jackpot A", "4R High-Speed Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" is won, i.e. if a "High Support Mode Until Next Time" is granted after the jackpot ends, a lottery is held with a probability of, for example, about 1/100 to determine whether or not a non-notification effect will be performed that does not notify the player that the granted "High Support Mode" is the "High Support Mode Until Next Time". If the lottery result indicates that a non-notification effect will be performed, the non-notification effect execution flag is turned on.

In the next step SB507, if it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area. The reach determination process will be described in detail later.

Further, in step SB508, a holding control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for informing the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the change display) held and stored in the second special change hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SB201). The hold control command includes, as hold information, for example, information indicating the results of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process and jackpot type determination process, and information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the winning of the variable display. It can be done.

Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step SB505 will be explained with reference to FIG. 65.

First, in step SB5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be either "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first judgment table. Determine if they match. Although the process of step SB5101 is shown in a simplified manner in FIG. 65 for convenience, in reality, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "7" and if the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "307" or not, and if either of these determinations is affirmative, an affirmative determination is made in step SB5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step SB5101, a negative determination is made in step SB5101.

If a positive judgment is made in step SB5101, i.e., if it is judged that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and then the process proceeds to step SB5105. The first game value imparting means (first special game state generating means) in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to a first game value (first special game state) in step SB5102.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5101, it is determined in step SB5103 whether or not the "high probability mode" is in progress based on the value of a lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If step SB5103 returns a positive result, i.e., if the game is in "high probability mode," step SB5104 determines whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area is one of the values corresponding to the jackpot stored in the second win/loss determination table, excluding the above-mentioned "7" and "307," namely, "8 to 16, 308 to 316." Note that, even during this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot, as described above.

If the result of step SB5104 is positive, i.e., if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode," the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and then the process ends.

The judgment process of steps SB5101 and SB5104 constitutes the first lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes this constitutes the first lottery means.

If the result of step SB5103 or step SB5104 is negative, i.e., if it is not a "jackpot," proceed to step SB5105.

Further, in step SB5105, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to a small win. .

If the result of step SB5105 is positive, i.e., if it is determined that a small win state will occur, the small win flag is turned on in step SB5106, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB5105 is negative, this process ends as is.

The judgment process in step SB5105 constitutes the second lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main control unit 261 that executes this constitutes the second lottery means. Also, the function of the main control unit 261 that generates a small win state equivalent to a second game value (second special game state) in step SB5106 constitutes the second game value granting means (second special game state generating means) in this embodiment.

Next, the reach determination process in step SB507 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

First, in step SB5301, it is determined whether a winning flag (big hit winning flag or small winning winning flag) was set in the jackpot determining process performed immediately before. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, when a jackpot state or a small win state occurs, the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SB5301 is positive, i.e., if a winning state does not occur, then in step SB5302, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special variable pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach." If the determination in step SB5302 is positive, then in step SB5303, the front or rear miss flag indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB5302 is negative, then in step SB5304, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special variable pending area matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to a "reach other than a front or rear miss." If the result of step SB5304 is positive, then in step SB5305, the non-front or rear miss flag is turned on, and this process is terminated.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB5304, that is, if the result is "completely missed", the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, after the process in step SB508, or if a negative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB509, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper starting prize opening 33YA or not. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SB509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, in step SB510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning hole 33YA is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB510, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB510, the process proceeds to step SB511, where the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SB512, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special fluctuation reservation area. After step SB512, the process moves to step SB513.

In step SB513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Incidentally, the jackpot determination process in step SB513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step SB505 above, except for the small hit determination, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the winning in the upper starting winning opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

In the following step SB514, when it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2. Then, a first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, the above-mentioned first jackpot type determination table is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area is either one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "16R certain variable jackpot A", the "16R certain variable jackpot A flag" is turned on, if it is one of the values "2-5" corresponding to "16R certain variable jackpot B", the "16R certain variable jackpot B flag" is turned on, and if it is the value "6" corresponding to "4R certain variable jackpot A", the "4R certain variable jackpot A flag" is turned on. is turned on, and if the value is any of "7-10" corresponding to the "4R special jackpot B", the "4R special jackpot B flag" is turned on, if the value is "11" corresponding to the "16R normal jackpot A", the "16R normal jackpot A flag" is turned on, if the value is any of "12-15" corresponding to the "16R normal jackpot B", the "16R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on, and if the value is any of "16-19" corresponding to the "4R normal jackpot B", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on.

If the "16R High-Speed Jackpot A" or "4R High-Speed Jackpot A" is won, that is, if the "Until Next Time High Support Mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the non-notification effect will be performed, as in step SB506. If the lottery result indicates that a non-notification effect will be performed, the non-notification effect execution flag is turned on.

In the next step SB515, if it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area. Note that the reach determination process in step SB515 is the same as the reach determination process in step SB507 above, and the only difference is that the information on the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning hole 33YA, so for convenience, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the subsequent step SB516, a holding control command setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step SB516 is the same as the setting process of the hold control command in step SB508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SB305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 67.

In step SB601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If the result of step SB601 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB601 is positive, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step SB602, it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB602 is positive, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, then the process proceeds to step SB603, where the normal hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Then, in the following step SB604, a random number related to the win/lose is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 updated in the random number update process in step SB303 above is stored in the first free memory area of the normal variable reserve area of RAM503. After that, the through gate passing process ends. Therefore, the process of step SB604 forms part of the third win/lose lottery.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. In the following step SB102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step SB103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON) or not, and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step SB112 to clear (delete) the backup data. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SB104 to determine whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case, the process proceeds to step SB112 as well. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB105, and in the next step SB106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. If the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process proceeds to step SB112 as well.

In the process of step SB112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. The sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization process as described later, and sets the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting to the gaming state Store in the status storage area.

Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return to the initial state when you turn on the power, for example when the hall opens for business, you turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process moves to RAM 503 initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). That is, in step SB113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step SB114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step SB103: NO), the process at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed on the condition that the power outage occurrence information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step SB107, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored, and in step SB108, the power outage occurrence information is cleared.

In step SB109, a game state check process is executed to check the game state stored in the RAM 503 at the time of power-off.

In the subsequent step SB110, a return command is sent to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., which are the sub-side control devices, to the gaming state at the time of power-off. Note that the return command sent to the sub-control device 262 includes information regarding the gaming state at the time of power-off identified in the gaming state check process (gaming state determination value Xj described later).

In step SB111, the registers in use are restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Then, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

The game status check process of step SB109 will now be described with reference to Figures 68 and 69. Figure 68 is a flow chart showing the game status check process, and Figure 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the lottery mode flag, support mode flag, game status identification counter Kj, and game status determination value Xj, which will be described later. The game status check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step SB807) and the winning end setting process (step SB1216), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 68, in step SB1901, a process is executed to read various information related to the game state at the time of power failure that is backed up and stored in RAM 503. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the game state identification counter Kj are each read from RAM 503.

The lottery mode flag is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode", and the flag value indicates whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode". In the case of "high probability mode", "50 (H)" is set, and in the case of "high probability mode", "53 (H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "5" of the upper four bits in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added as a countermeasure against noise, and is not particularly used to determine the gaming state.

The support mode flag is state determination information for determining what state the winning support mode is in. As the flag value, if the winning support mode is "low support mode", "A0 ( H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "A" of the upper four bits in the support mode flag is uniformly added as a noise countermeasure, and is not specifically used to determine the gaming state.

In addition, if the winning support mode is "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode", the flag value is set to "A1 (H)".

In addition, if the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", the flag value is set to "A2 (H)", and if it is "Until next time/high support mode", the flag value is set to "A3 (H)".

The game state identification counter Kj is state determination information that counts the number of times a variable display is executed after the end of a jackpot and identifies the timing of switching of the game state. A predetermined initial value is set when the jackpot ends, and one is subtracted each time a variable display is executed. For example, as described below, if the initial value of the game state identification counter Kj is set to "50", and the value of the counter Kj then becomes "31", the variable display at that time can be identified as the 20th variable display after the end of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, if a "16R sure-change jackpot B", "4R sure-change jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" is won, i.e., if a "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is awarded after the jackpot ends, the initial value is set to "50".

In addition, if you win "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A", that is, if "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. Ru.

In addition, if a "16R High-Speed Jackpot A", "4R High-Speed Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" is won, i.e., if the "Until Next Time High Support Mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the initial value is set to "0". However, if the non-notification performance execution flag is turned on and a non-notification performance is executed, the initial value is set to "30". The non-notification performance execution flag is turned off after the initial value is set.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, in step SB1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read in step SB1901 is added to the value of the support mode flag.

In the following step SB1903, the addition value calculated in step SB1902 is ANDed with a predetermined mask value (in this embodiment, "07 (H)"), the lower 3 bits of data are extracted, and the data is processed for a predetermined operation. Set the game state determination value Xj in the area.

In step SB1904, it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "1". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", or "50 times high support mode".

If the result here is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1905, where it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "4". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", or "50 times high support mode".

If the determination in step SB1904 or step SB1905 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1909. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1905 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1906.

In step SB1906, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1907, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1906 or step SB1907, the process moves to step SB1912. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1907, the process moves to step SB1908.

In step SB1908, it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "6". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time, high support mode".

If the result here is positive, the process proceeds to step SB1914. On the other hand, if the result here is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value "6" of the game state determination value Xj is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, and in step SB1909, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1910.

In step SB1910, it is determined whether the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "21". In other words, it is determined whether the variable display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1911.

In step SB1911, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1912.

In step SB1912, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the "50th time (in the case of the initial value "50")" or the "30th time (in the case of the initial value "30")".

If the result here is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value of the game state determination value Xj ("1", "4", "2", or "5") is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB1912 is positive, i.e., if the value of the game state determination counter Kj is "1", the process proceeds to step SB1913, where the value of the game state determination value Xj is changed to "7". After that, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, if a positive judgment is made in the above step SB1908, the process proceeds to step SB1914, where it is determined whether the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the winning support mode is the "Until next time, high support mode" in which the above non-notification performance is not performed. If a positive judgment is made here, the value of the game state judgment value Xj, "6", is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB1914 is negative, i.e., if the mode is "Until next time, high support mode" in which a non-notification effect is performed, the process proceeds to step SB1915, where the value of the game state determination value Xj is changed to "5". After that, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value of this game state determination value Xj, "5", is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 503, and the process ends. As a result, even if the mode is in "Until next time, high support mode", for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment), the lottery mode will be in "high probability mode" and the same effect as when the winning support mode is in "30 times, high support mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 62. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps SB201 to SB210 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SB211 and SB212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SB201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, opening/closing accessory 37Y, etc. updated in the previous process are sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each sub-side device. Execute external output processing such as sending to a control device. Some more detailed examples are listed below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches described above, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, and if there has been a winning, the prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings are determined. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

Furthermore, if a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

In addition, in the external output process, information for understanding the gaming state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall, taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot flag described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, if a winning error is detected, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the gaming hall via a specified terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no winning error, an OFF signal is output.

When the decorative pattern is changed and displayed by the performance display device 42, a change pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are sent to the sub-control device 262. In response, the sub-control device 262, which has received the change pattern command, pattern command, etc., determines the change mode of the performance display device 42 based on the various commands, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display (change display) the change mode on the performance display device 42.

In step SB202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the following step SB203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SB204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step SB205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R are set to determine what control is to be performed on the special display devices 43L, 43R, and the big win determination and the change pattern of the decorative symbols on the performance display device 42 are set. The details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step SB206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32 are set, such as what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when a jackpot or a small win occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step SB207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal pattern display device 41 are set to determine what control is to be performed on the normal pattern display device 41. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step SB208, opening/closing accessory control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, such as what kind of control is to be performed on the opening/closing accessory 37Y, are set. Details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step SB209, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SB210, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process moves to step SB201, and the processes from step SB201 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing of the next normal processing execution (step SB211, step SB212).

That is, in step SB211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SB212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step SB202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198, 240 in this example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SB201 to SB209 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1) can be randomly updated, and fluctuations can be similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SB209: YES), the power is cut off, and the processing from step SB213 onwards is performed as power failure processing when the power is cut off. In the power failure processing, first, in step SB213, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited, in step SB214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area, and in step SB215, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. Then, in step SB216, a power failure notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step SB217, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 503. Then, in step SB218, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

The processing of step SB209 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to changes in the game state performed in steps SB201 to SB208, or at the end of one cycle of processing in steps SB211 and SB212 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle, and it can be stored easily. In addition, when returning to the state before the power interruption, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing burden of the main control device 261 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step SB213), it is possible to prevent the data at the time of the power interruption from being changed, and the state before the power interruption can be reliably stored.

Next, the first display control process in step SB205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

In FIG. 70, in step SB801, the various winning flags (big win flag and small win flag) described in detail later are referenced to determine whether or not the current state is a winning state (big win state or small win state). The winning state (big win state and small win state) includes a predetermined time during the winning state and after the winning state ends. The predetermined time after the winning state ends here is the time from the winning state ends to the start of normal play (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R), and generally during this time period, the performance display device 42 displays the end of the winning state and various game states and modes that are granted after the winning state. In addition, the period from when the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the performance display device 42 stops in a manner corresponding to a winning state until the variable winning device 32 is opened (generally during this time period, the performance display device 42 displays the start of the winning state) is also included in the winning state.

If the result of the judgment in step SB801 is positive, that is, if the winning state is reached, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in step SB801 is negative, in step SB802, the setting status of the first display flag, which will be described in detail later, is checked to determine whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (performance display device 42) is displaying a change. In detail, if the first display flag is set (if it is in the ON state), it is considered that the change is being displayed, and if the first display flag is released (if it is in the OFF state), it is considered that the change is being displayed in a stopped state, which corresponds to a stopped state. In addition, as will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the change display of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R starts (see step SB920, see step SB807), and is turned off when the change display of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R is displayed in a stopped state (see step SB814).

If the result of step SB802 is negative, i.e., if the winning state is not occurring and the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SB803, where it is determined whether the value of the lower pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending variable displays (second variable display) triggered by winning at the lower start winning port 33YB, is greater than 0.

If the answer is yes in step SB803, that is, if at least one second change display is stored as pending, then in step SB804, 1 is subtracted from the lower pending counter Nb. Note that in this embodiment, if the second change display is stored as pending due to the determination process in step SB803, the second change display is executed without executing the first change display. In other words, even if the first change display is stored as pending earlier than the second change display, the second change display is consumed first (the first change display is postponed).

In the following step SB805, processing for shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SB805, in step SB806, the process of turning on and off the second hold lamp 46b and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process moves to step SB807.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if no second variable display is stored in storage, in step SB808, the variable display (first It is determined whether an upper suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions (variable display) is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step SB808, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB808 is affirmative, in step SB809, 1 is subtracted from the upper reserved counter Na. In the following step SB810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special variable reserved area is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special variable reserved area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After step SB810, in step SB811, a process of turning on and off the first reserved lamp 46a and a process of making the variable specific lamp 40 emit blue light are executed, and then the process proceeds to step SB807. In this embodiment, the special variable reserved area has one execution area, and the data stored in the first special variable reserved area and the second special variable reserved area are shifted to a common execution area when a variable display based on the data is performed.

In step SB807, the variable display setting process is performed. Details of the variable display setting process are explained below with reference to FIG. 72.

First, in step SB900, a game status check process is executed. Note that this game status check process is the same as the game status check process in step SB109 (see FIG. 68) described above, so a detailed description is omitted.

Next, in step SB901, it is determined whether the small win flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to a small win.

If it is determined that the win corresponds to a small win, the process moves to step SB910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process moves to step SB902.

In step SB902, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a jackpot, the process moves to step SB903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step SB912.

In step SB903, it is determined whether any of the various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variable jackpot A flag", "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", "4R probability variable jackpot B flag") are on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to a "probability variable jackpot".

If the result of step SB903 is positive, i.e., if it is a "high probability jackpot", then in step SB904, the system refers to the variation pattern table corresponding to the "high probability jackpot" to determine the variation pattern and sets it in the variation pattern command. Next, in step SB905, the system refers to the symbol table corresponding to the "high probability jackpot" to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, an odd number symbol or an even number symbol), and sets the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ1" or "BZ2" described later). Then, the system proceeds to step SB920.

If the result of the negative judgment in step SB903 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB906, where it is judged whether any of the above-mentioned various normal jackpot flags ("16R normal jackpot A flag", "16R normal jackpot B flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot B flag") is on, thereby judging whether the variable display corresponds to a "normal jackpot". If the result of the positive judgment in step SB906 is positive, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", the variable pattern is determined in step SB907 by referring to the variable pattern table corresponding to the "normal jackpot" and set in the variable pattern command. Next, in step SB908, the jackpot pattern (whether it is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern in this embodiment) is determined by referring to the pattern table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and the corresponding pattern command (in this embodiment, "BZ1" or "BZ2" described later) is set. Then, the process proceeds to step SB920.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, depending on the type of symbol displayed on the performance display device 42, the game state such as the lottery mode that is given after the end of the jackpot cannot be determined. In other words, there is no clear relationship between the variable pattern or the stopped symbol and the jackpot type, such as "odd symbols" being displayed as stopped for a "high probability jackpot" and "even symbols" being displayed as stopped for a "normal jackpot". In this embodiment, the tables are simply divided so that the appearance rate of the predetermined variable pattern or symbol differs depending on the type of jackpot, for example, "odd symbols" are more likely to be displayed as stopped for a "high probability jackpot". Therefore, for example, when a jackpot occurs, the variable pattern or the stopped symbol may be selected based on one jackpot table, regardless of the jackpot type, such as "high probability jackpot" or "normal jackpot".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB906, the process moves to step SB909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to "JUB jackpot". Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step SB909, that is, if it is a "JUB jackpot", the process moves to step SB910.

In step SB910, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", and is set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step SB911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6", which will be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step SB920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB902, that is, if it is "missing", it is determined in step SB912 whether or not the front and rear missing flags are on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB912, that is, in the case of "out-of-front reach", in step SB913, a fluctuation pattern is determined by taking into account the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "out-of-front reach", and the fluctuation pattern command is , and turn off the front and back out-of-line flags. Continuously, in step SB914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3", which will be described later) corresponding to the front-back out-of-place symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SB920.

On the other hand, if the result of step 912 is negative, then in step SB915 it is determined whether the non-front/rear miss flag is on. If the result of step SB915 is positive, i.e., if the result is a "non-front/rear miss reach", then in step SB916 the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "non-front/rear miss reach", and the fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the non-front/rear miss flag is turned off. Then, in step SB917 it is set to the pattern command corresponding to the non-front/rear miss pattern (in this embodiment, "BZ4" described later). Then, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Also, if the result of step SB915 is negative, i.e., if it is a "complete miss", then in step SB918, the miss variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to a "complete miss" and set in the variation pattern command. Then, in step SB919, it is set in the pattern command corresponding to the complete miss pattern (in this embodiment, "BZ5" described later). Then, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and the variation pattern command will be explained. In this embodiment, a variation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "probable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as the "probable jackpot variation pattern table"), a variation pattern table corresponding to a "normal jackpot", a variation pattern table corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small jackpot", a variation pattern table corresponding to a "reach for a miss before or after", a variation pattern table corresponding to a "reach for a non-reach for a miss before or after", and a variation pattern table corresponding to a "complete miss" (hereinafter referred to as the "complete miss variation pattern table") are provided in multiple locations according to the game state (the game state determination value Xj has a value of "0" to "7").

For example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), in the reference address "100", the probability variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state" where the game state determination value Xj is "0" is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a variable probability/variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of gaming state determination value Xj is "2". A variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "103" is stored, a variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value Xj of "3" is stored at "address 104" , when the variable pattern table is stored, when the gaming state determination value Xj corresponds to the value "4", the fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 105", when the variable probability jackpot corresponds to the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5", A variable pattern table is stored, and at "address 106", a variable pattern table for a probability variable jackpot corresponding to the value "6" of the gaming state judgment value A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

In addition, regarding the complete failure/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(b), at "address 700" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0", which corresponds to the "normal state". A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a complete failure/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state judgment value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2". A complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "703" is stored, a complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value "3" is stored at "address 704", , when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 705", when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "5", the completely off state/ A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a fluctuation pattern table for when the gaming state determination value Xj is completely off corresponding to "6" is stored; A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, there are other fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "foreign and off reach", and As for the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and back misses", as in the case of the above-mentioned variable pattern table for variable jackpot and fluctuating pattern table for complete miss, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0" ~ A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the fluctuation pattern in step SB904, step SB907, step SB910, step SB913, step SB916, and step SB918, first, based on the gaming state determination value Xj specified in the gaming state check process (step SB900), Next, a process is performed to select a table corresponding to a predetermined gaming state (values of gaming state determination value Xj from "0" to "7") from a plurality of table groups. At this time, the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified by adding the value of the gaming state judgment value can do. In other words, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table (for example, the variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "address 100": see FIG. 90). and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment is composed of two bytes, and the upper four bits of the upper byte are composed of information that specifies the game state. In this embodiment, the value of the game state determination value Xj is set as is. In addition, the lower four bits of the upper byte are composed of information that specifies the jackpot type, etc., and the lower eight bits of the lower byte are composed of information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the probability jackpot fluctuation pattern table for the normal state (Xj = 0) [see Figure 89 (a)], in the probability jackpot fluctuation pattern command for the normal state, the upper four bits of the upper byte are set to "0", which is the value of the game state determination value Xj, and the following lower four bits are set to "F", which indicates a "probability jackpot". Then, the remaining eight bits of the lower byte are set to a value that specifies the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 503. The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these fluctuation pattern commands and the fluctuation mode (presentation pattern) of the decorative pattern in a table, and when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation pattern (presentation pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command can be executed.

Next, the symbol commands will be explained in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine the symbol to be stopped. In this embodiment, there are six categories: combinations of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of symbols other than front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of completely out-of-place symbols, and combinations of chance symbols. is specified. These categories are indicated by, for example, "BZ1," "BZ2," "BZ3," "BZ4," "BZ5," and "BZ6," and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and stop symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The even jackpot symbol combination is a symbol combination consisting of the repeated numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and the symbol command corresponding to the even jackpot symbol combination is set to "BZ2." When "BZ2," which indicates an even jackpot symbol, is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of the repeated numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 as the stopping symbol.

The combination of front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front and back off symbols. “BZ3” is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to the "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the combination of symbols other than front and rear off is the pattern that corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs, and "BZ5" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the complete miss symbol combination.

Moreover, "BZ6" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear out-of-reach symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command selects the front and rear out-of-reach symbols stored in the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to a missed reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and back misses is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than front and rear misses stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear misses in the RAM 553 is sent to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stopping symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely missed symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects the combination of symbols corresponding to a completely missed symbol stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Also, if the symbol command is set to "BZ6", the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and symbol command set as described above are output in an external output process (step SB201) which will be described later. Then, the sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on these commands, and performs display control to display the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variable display). An instruction is issued to the device 45.

Now, in step SB920, a start setting process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In this start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the change time (remaining time of the change display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change display.

In this embodiment, the variable display time of the special display devices 43L, 43R is set to a value corresponding to the variable pattern of the decorative pattern selected by the above-mentioned variable type counters CS1, CS2. Based on this setting of the first display timer, when a control signal to start a variable display is output to the special display devices 43L, 43R in the external output process of the next normal process, the variable display is started on the special display devices 43L, 43R. Then, after step SB920 is completed, the variable display setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 70, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB802, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SB812, where a first display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Then, the process proceeds to step SB813, where the value of the first display timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not a predetermined variation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", step SB813 is judged to be positive.

When a negative determination is made in step SB813, in step SB817, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the present process ends. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SB813 is affirmative, the first display flag is cleared (turned off) in step SB814, and the stop display setting is performed in step SB815 to display a stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R.

In addition, based on the settings of the stop display settings, a control signal to display a stop is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process of the next normal process. For example, in the case of a "16R special jackpot A", a "9-" is displayed as a stop (e.g., lit for a few seconds).

Next, in step SB816, the process for setting the end of the fluctuation is performed, and then this process is terminated. The process for setting the end of the fluctuation is now explained with reference to FIG. 71.

First, in step SB1001, it is determined whether the stop display corresponds to a jackpot or a small win, taking into account the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag. Here, if it corresponds to a big win or a small win, the process moves to step SB1002, and win settings are made. Specifically, setting processing is performed for the medium jackpot flag, medium small win flag, first variable flag, first variable timer, open number counter, winning counter Vx, etc. After step SB1002 is completed, the variation end time setting process is ended.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress, and here, "1" indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value (turned on).

The small win flag is state determination information for determining whether or not a small win state is occurring, and here, like the big win flag, the flag value is set to "1" (turned on), indicating the occurrence of a small win state.

The first variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state.

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 (the time when the special prize state occurs) and the interval between each special prize state, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has passed since the opening start or end of the opening plate 32a. In the winning setting process of step SB1002, a predetermined value corresponding to each type of winning is set by taking into consideration the opening and closing pattern control table (see FIG. 91). For example, if the first time is the above-mentioned "long opening" such as "16R sure-variable big win A", the first variable timer is set to "7500", and if the first time is the above-mentioned "short opening" such as "JUB big win", the first variable timer is set to "100". As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 32a is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 91, the opening/closing pattern control table includes the number of times the special prize state occurs in each winning state (number of rounds), the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a in each special prize state (each round), and the time between each special prize state. The interval time etc. are set in advance.

The open number counter is used to determine the number of times the special prize state occurs during the jackpot state or the small win state, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process (“long open” or “short open”) of the variable winning device 32 is executed. This is the status determination information. In the win setting process of step SB1002, initial values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", the total of 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings" is set. "20" indicating 20 times is set as the initial value.

The winning counter Vx is a winning counting means that counts the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there is a winning prize, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is incremented by 1.

In addition, in the winning setting process of step SB1002, the opening and closing pattern control table is consulted to set the specified number K1, which is the maximum number of expected winnings in the variable winning device 32 per opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 32a (one special prize state). As described above, the specified number K1 is pre-determined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening and closing member related to one opening and closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, for a "long opening", the specified number K1 is set to "10", and for a "short opening", the specified number K1 is set to "3".

In the hit setting process of step SB1002, the opening command that announces the start of a big hit or small hit is also set. However, in the case of a "JUB big hit", the opening command is set after five "short openings" have ended (such as the special prize state start process of step SB1217 described later). As a result, in the case of a "JUB big hit", the big hit notification performance is performed after five "short openings" have ended, and up to this point, it is indistinguishable from the case of a small hit.

Now, in step SB1001, if it is determined that the result does not correspond to a big win or a small win, i.e., the big win winning flag and the small win winning flag are off, the process proceeds to step SB1003.

In step SB1003, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the fluctuation is displayed), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the values corresponding to various jackpots are set as the counter value. Ru.

If the counter value of the support count counter is "0", this process ends. On the other hand, if the support count counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that high support mode is set, and in step SB1004, the process of subtracting 1 from the support count counter is performed. In step SB1004, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the game state specification counter Kj is also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step SB1005.

In step SB1005, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the high support mode is applied). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", processing is performed to switch the value of the support mode flag to "A0 (H)" indicating "low support mode" in step SB1006, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process of step SB206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step SB1201, it is determined whether the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is on. If a negative determination is made here, the process is directly terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1202, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in the subsequent step SB1202.

In the following step SB1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the process advances to step SB1204, and it is determined whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. It is determined whether there is an opening time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") remaining for each opening/closing operation ("long opening" or "short opening").

If the result of step SB1204 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1205, where it is determined whether the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the specified number K1, i.e., whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state has reached the maximum number of expected winning balls (the specified number "10 balls" or "3 balls"). If the result of step SB1205 is negative, i.e., if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (the timing for the special prize state to end) has not yet arrived, the process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB1204 or step SB1205, the process proceeds to step SB1206, where a first variable timer setting process is performed.

Here, the first variable timer is set to a predetermined value (for example, a value of "750" equivalent to "3 seconds", or "250" equivalent to "1 second") with reference to the opening and closing pattern control table to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of a big win or small win, or whether an interval has elapsed between the end of a predetermined special prize state and the start of the next special prize state, etc.).

Then, proceed to step SB1207 and determine whether the counter value of the opening count counter is "0", i.e., whether the number of times the special prize state ("long opening" or "short opening") has been executed has reached a specified number of times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1207, an open end setting process is performed in step SB1210, and this process ends. In the end setting process of step SB1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the winning end flag is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step SB1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state (“long release” or “short release”) has not reached the specified number of times, special prize sending processing is performed in step SB1211, and this processing is continued. finish.

In the special prize sending process of step SB1211, the value of the open number counter is subtracted by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. As a result, the opening/closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB1203, that is, within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning, or during the interval between special prize states), the process advances to step SB1212. , it is determined whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If the answer is YES in step SB1212, i.e., if a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state and it is time to move on to the next process (the start of the next special prize state or the start of normal play), the process proceeds to step SB1215. On the other hand, if the answer is NO in step SB1212, the process ends.

In step SB1215, it is determined whether or not to end the jackpot state or small win state, taking into consideration the winning end flag.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1215, a winning end setting process is performed in step SB1216, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1215, special prize state start processing is performed in step SB1217, and then this processing is ended.

In the win end setting process of step SB1216, the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is turned off, and the lottery mode flag switching process, the support mode flag switching process, the support number counter setting process, and the game status notification command setting process , setting processing of an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot or small win, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flag" or "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of "high probability mode" is set as a flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small winning winning flag is on, the lottery mode flag switching process is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of a small win (the flag value of the lottery mode flag is "53 (H)"), even after the small win ends, the "high probability mode" (lottery mode The flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the flag value is set to "A1 (H)", if "30 times high support mode S" is granted, the flag value is set to "A2 (H)", and if "Until next time high support mode" is granted, the flag value is set to "A3 (H)".

In the setting process of the support count counter, the support count counter is switched based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot, the value of the support count counter is set to "20", which corresponds to 20 times of fluctuation display, "30", which corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display, "40", which corresponds to 40 times of fluctuation display, or "50", which corresponds to 50 times of fluctuation display. When the "30 times high support mode S" is granted, the value of the support count counter is set to "30", which corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display. When the "Until next time high support mode" is granted, the value of the support count counter is set to a value that cannot be reached practically (for example, "99999", which corresponds to 99999 times of fluctuation display).

The game status notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the game status that will be set after the big win ends. When setting this command, a game status check process is first performed. This game status check process is similar to the game status check process in step SB109 above (see FIG. 68), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The gaming status notification command includes a gaming status determination value Xj related to the new gaming status ascertained through the gaming status checking process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that receives this switches the gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj) that it knows to a new gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj). Note that the gaming state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the gaming state determination value Xj may be included in, for example, an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot state.

The big win flag, small win flag, and various "big win flags" are turned off after various processes such as the lottery mode flag switching process are completed. Also, when a win is set (step SB1002) in the end-of-variation setting process in FIG. 71, the lottery mode flag may be reset once (set to "50 (H)"), and the "high probability mode" may be interrupted during a big win or small win.

In the special prize state start process of step SB1217, the first variable flag is turned on, and the opening time ("7500" or "100") related to the next special prize state is set to the first variable with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. In addition to setting the timer, the specified number K1 for the next special prize state is also set. Furthermore, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is reset to "0".

In addition, based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the large winning opening is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, the second display control process in step SB207 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74.

In FIG. 74, in step SB2101, the setting status of the second display flag, which indicates whether or not a variable display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, is checked to determine whether or not a variable display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41. In more detail, if the second display flag is on, it is considered that a variable display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, and if the second display flag is off, it is considered that a stopped display is being performed, which corresponds to a state in which the variable display is stopped on the normal pattern display device 41.

If the result of step SB2101 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process ends.

Also, if the change is not being displayed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is > 0, proceed to step SB2103. In step SB2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step SB2104, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the normal change hold area. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the normal change hold area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Thereafter, in step SB2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 are satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the change time of the variable display performed by the normal pattern display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, so the second display timer is set to "500". Also, in the "high support mode", the change time of the variable display performed by the normal pattern display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, so the second display timer is set to "100".

Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the normal symbol display device 41 will display the variable display. Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and if the displayed symbol is "○", it will be displayed as "×" or "×". ”, the display is switched to “○”. Then, after step SB2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, if the judgment in step SB2101 is positive, i.e., if the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a variable number, the process proceeds to step SB2106, where the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is subtracted by 1.

The process then proceeds to step SB2107, where it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB2107, the second displaying flag is turned off in step SB2108, and in step SB2109, the normal symbol stop display setting for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Then, based on the setting contents of this normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a win, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for a few seconds), and in the case of a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed.

As mentioned above, whether or not a win has been made is determined based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 stored in the execution area of the normal variable pending area.

Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the winning values are two, "0 and 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". There are 8 pieces.

Next, the process advances to step SB2110, where a variation end setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is state determination information for determining whether the opening/closing device 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing device 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the opening started. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing device 37Y differs between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode." In the "high support mode," the second variable timer is set to "1000," and in the "low support mode," the second variable timer is set to "100."

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB2107, a switching display setting is performed in step SB2111 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and the present process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", the display is switched to "x", and if the current lighting is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control process in step SB208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75.

First, in step SB2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag, which indicates whether the opening/closing device 37Y is in the open state, is on. If it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the opening/closing device 37Y is in the closed state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SB2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step SB2203, where the value of the second variable timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified open time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0", step SB2203 is judged as positive. If the judgment here is negative, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step SB2203, the process proceeds to step SB2204, where the end setting process is performed, and then the process ends. In the end setting process in step SB2204, the second variable flag is turned off.

Based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal to open the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal to close the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the closed state. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a game ball into the lower starting winning hole 33YB.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to FIG. 76, and then explain the main processing with reference to FIG. 77.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt processing is a processing executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311 is put on hold for a while, and the reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step SB3001, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step SB3002, the command reception flag is turned on to store that the command has been transmitted from the main control device 261, and this reception interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated to store the next command received in the next storage area.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step SB3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB3101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SB3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SB3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step SB3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB3107, and in the following step SB3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power outage information is not set in step SB3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SB3108, the process proceeds to initialization of RAM 513 from step SB3115 onwards.

In step SB3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SB3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. Then, in step SB3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SB3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, if the power failure information has been set in step SB3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SB3108, processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored in step SB3109, the power failure information is cleared in step SB3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step SB3111. Also, in step SB3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SB3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SB3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SB3114, in the process of step SB3122, it is determined whether or not power interruption information is set in the backup area 513a. If the power interruption information is set here, it means that the power has been cut off, so the process from step SB3123 onwards is carried out as power outage processing when the power is cut off. In the power outage processing, first, in step SB3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step SB3124, a command judgment process to be described later is executed. Then, in step SB3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step SB3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, in step SB3127, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 513a, and in step SB3128, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step SB3122 checks for information on the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage can be made easier. Also, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step SB3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 79.

Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the command determination process performed by the dispensing control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SB3124, SB3201), it is first determined in step SB3301 whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 76).

If it is determined in step SB3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step SB3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SB3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SB3303, the processing of steps SB3302 to SB3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps SB3304 to SB3306. In step SB3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SB3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SB3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step SB3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed the initialization of RAM 513 when the power was turned on, so in step SB3308 the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SB3309 the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step SB3311 the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step SB3307, the command judgment process is terminated without clearing the working area of RAM 513 and initializing RAM 513. That is, the process of step SB3307 prohibits the initialization of RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received with the payout permission flag on. In such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the payout permission flag is on and the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step SB3308) and the initial value setting of RAM 513 (step SB3309) is executed, a disadvantage such as not being paid out when there are remaining winning balls occurs, causing a loss to the player, but since the initialization of RAM 513 is prevented with the payout permission flag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Also, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout return command (step SB3304: NO, step SB3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step SB3311 to permit the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information of a power outage and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SB3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step SB3305: NO, step SB3306: YES), in step SB3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step SB3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a specified buffer area, and stores it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command sent from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. In addition, when a prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the payout of prize balls can be performed early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SB3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SB3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SB3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SB3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 78. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step SB3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB3202 is positive, step SB3203 sets the launch control device 312 to allow launch, and step SB3204 checks the state return switch 321. If it is determined that the state return operation should be started, the state return operation is executed. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball jam (return to normal state).

After that, in step SB3205, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full/unfull state according to the change in state. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full/unfull state is set. Also, in step SB3206, the tank ball no state (bulb out state) or the tank ball no state (bulb present state) is set according to the change in state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball no state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when the tank ball is no longer empty, the tank ball no state is set.

After that, in step SB3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step SB3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step SB3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step SB3210.

In step SB3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step SB3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is jammed. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 80. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In this normal processing, first, in step SB3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, in step SB3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is configured as a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands have been stored in all of the storage area, the storage area returns to the beginning and the commands are updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

In the following step SB3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, the command determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 83.

First, in step SB4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM553. In subsequent step SB4102, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, in step SB4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SB4104 it is determined whether or not it is a pending control command, and in step SB4110 In step SB4111, it is determined whether or not it is a gaming state notification command, and in step SB4112, it is determined whether or not it is a symbol command.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is an initialization command, this means that the main control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 553 when the power was turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step SB4105, and the initial value of the RAM 553 is set in step SB4106. As a result, the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value "0" of the game state determination value Xj, which corresponds to the initial setting of "normal state". After that, this process ends.

Also, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a return command (step SB4102: NO, step SB4103: YES), the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power was cut off, and the sub-control device 262, which does not have a backup function, reads out the value of the game status determination value Xj (any of "0" to "7") included in the return command in step SB4107 and stores it in the game status information storage area of RAM 553. Then, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a pending control command (step SB4103: NO, step SB4104: YES), in step SB4108, a storage process is performed to store various information included in the pending control command (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, information indicating which of the start winning slots 33YA and 33YB the variable display was triggered by, etc.) in the sub-variable pending area, and this process is terminated.

The sub-fluctuation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261. In other words, the sub-variation holding area includes a first sub-variation holding area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub fluctuation holding area corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, and one sub-execution area. Each of the two sub-fluctuating reservation areas includes four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area).

In each pending area, information related to the variable display executed by the performance display device 42 (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) is stored in chronological order according to the reception history (reception order) of the pending control commands and the winning history of the game balls included in the pending control commands (such as whether the winning was based on entering the starting winning slot 33YA or 33YB). This allows the sub-control device 262 to grasp the number of pending variable displays and their contents.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a game status notification command (step SB4104: NO, step SB4110: YES), in step SB4107, the value of the game status determination value Xj (any of "0" to "7") included in the game status notification command is read and stored in the game status information storage area of RAM 553. Then, this process is terminated.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a variable pattern command (step SB4110: NO, step SB4111: YES), it is time to start variable display on the effect display device 42, so start setting is performed in step SB4113. The process is performed and the process moves to step SB4114.

In the start setting process of step SB4113, various settings related to the variable display performed by the performance display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub-fluctuation holding area to the sub-execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display timer. The variable display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of the variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, a presentation pattern for the display of decorative symbols is selected based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, and the stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) to be displayed after the variation time has elapsed is determined based on the hit type information (including "miss"). Information on the presentation pattern and stop patterns determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation pending area. The correspondence between the variation time information and the presentation pattern, and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop patterns are stored in a table in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262.

In the sub-controller 262, similar to the main controller 261, a number of table groups corresponding to the game state determination value Xj values "0" to "7" are stored in consecutive order from a predetermined reference address for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "guaranteed jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "reach for a miss before or after", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "reach for a non-miss before or after", and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "complete miss".

That is, when determining the display mode on the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined gaming state (gaming state judgment value The table corresponding to the values of Xj ("0" to "7") is selected. At this time, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address is the same as when selecting the above-mentioned variable pattern table.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a pattern command (step SB4111: NO, step SB4112: YES), pattern setting processing is performed in step SB4116, and this processing is terminated.

In the symbol setting process of step SB4116, the symbols stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 81) of the RAM 553, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect display device 42 based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area. It is set in the above sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th symbols is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the zero, 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and back out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely missed symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When “BZ6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” is set as a stop symbol in accordance with the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the production display device 42. decide.

Now, in step SB4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command matches the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of RAM 553. If the two values match, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the status error flag is turned on at step SB4115, and at step SB4117, the value of the gaming status determination value Xj included in the newly received fluctuation pattern command is regarded as the appropriate value. , the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in the gaming state information storage area. After that, this process ends. If the two values are different by turning on the status error flag, this fact will be notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and the error notification may be performed using the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

In recent years, gaming machines have a backup function in their main controllers, so even if the power is cut off due to a power outage, various data including the gaming mode (gaming state) at that time will be stored. Since the power can be maintained, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume playing the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function, it becomes possible for amusement halls to set gaming machines to high probability mode from the start of business, commonly known as "morning". This is done to attract more customers at the start of business, but there is a risk of mischievously inviting players' gambling greed. There are various methods for setting the above-mentioned behavior, and one example is a method in which gaming machines that were in high probability mode at the end of business on the previous day are not reset to their initial state. In addition, in a configuration in which the main control unit transmits information about the gaming mode (gaming state determination value Xj) to the sub-control unit by a return command or the like when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine, as in this embodiment, if the cable connector connecting the main control unit and the sub-control unit is removed when the power is turned on, the sub-control unit will not be able to grasp the actual gaming mode set by the main control unit, and will instead control the initial gaming mode, i.e., the "normal mode".

In general gaming machines, when performing effects on a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color, etc.) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode, so that players, etc. This makes it easy to understand the current game mode.

In addition, sub-control devices that control liquid crystal displays and the like generally do not have a backup function, so when the power is turned off, control is performed for the initial setting game mode ("normal mode").

Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to set the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to be in the normal mode even though the actual gaming mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In this case, the current gaming mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action through a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a gaming machine where a high probability mode that is superficially difficult to distinguish from the "normal mode", such as the "latent probability variable state" of the present embodiment, is set, the high probability mode is activated by the above action, and the gaming hall starts operating. If the game mode is set from time to time, it becomes impossible to determine the actual game mode from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is made to that effect, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the gaming state information storage area. In other words, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate gaming mode at that time. As a result, even if an action such as the above-mentioned "Morning" is performed and the actual gaming mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the performance mode in the sub-control device 262 will be changed to the mode in the normal mode. Even if the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the performance mode corresponds to the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by game halls can be suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, after step SB3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SB3901, the process moves to step SB3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SB3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step SB3912.

In step SB3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, it is used to set the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5, the accessory effect counter CB8, and each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area. Upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used.

The losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured so that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, resulting in randomly changing numerical values. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is used to determine the pattern (jackpot pattern) that is stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42 when a jackpot occurs (either a "high probability jackpot" or a "normal jackpot"). In this embodiment, five odd-numbered patterns and five even-numbered patterns are set as the jackpot patterns. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared for the jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5. In other words, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 4, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (i.e., 4). Then, when the symbol command sent from the main control device 261 is "BZ1", which indicates a combination of odd jackpot symbols, the odd jackpot symbol combination is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols) such that, for example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" (double number), if it is 1, it is "3" (double number), if it is 2, it is "5" (double number), if it is 3, it is "7" (double number), and if it is 4, it is "9" (double number).

In addition, if the symbol command is "BZ2", which indicates a combination of even jackpot symbols, the combination of even jackpot symbols is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols) in the following way: if the counter value is 0, it is "0" (double number of 1); if it is 1, it is "2" (double number of 1); if it is 2, it is "4" (double number of 1); if it is 3, it is "6" (double number of 1); if it is 4, it is "8" (double number of 1);

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a symbol command is received. You can also do this.

The special feature counter CB8 is used to determine whether or not a special feature (additional feature) will be executed and what type it will be. The special feature counter CB8 has 400 counter values (0 to 399). In other words, the special feature counter CB8 is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 399, and to return to 0 after it reaches the upper limit (i.e. 399).

The accessory performance counter CB8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905 and stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553. Then, it will be taken into account in the accessory performance setting process of step SB3910, which will be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stopping symbols (combinations of losing symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the jackpot lottery results in a "losing" drawing. Since each column displays one of 10 decorative symbols, 10 counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each column. The upper/missing symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle/missing symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower/missing symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbol in the lower symbol display area. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted and the current value is determined. Ru. The winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combination of these winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the RAM 553 as the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffers, front and rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffers, and It is stored in one of the completely missed symbol buffers.

Here, the update process of each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 82, in step SB4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the top/losing symbol counter CL, and in step SB4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the middle/losing symbol counter CM. The top, middle, and bottom losing symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the bottom/losing symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step SB4001. Also, if the top/losing symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step SB4002. Then, if it is time to update the top/losing symbol counter CL (step SB4001 is YES), proceed to step SB4003 and update the top/losing symbol counter CL. Also, if it is time to update the center/miss pattern counter CM (step SB4002 is YES), proceed to step SB4004 and update the center/miss pattern counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the bottom/miss pattern counter CR (steps SB4001 and SB4002 are both NO), proceed to step SB4005 and update the bottom/miss pattern counter CR. When updating the miss pattern counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SB4003 to SB4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 10 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the miss pattern counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update process, the top, middle, and bottom losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of each counter value do not overlap. This allows one set of losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR to be updated every time the update process is performed three times.

Then, in step SB4006, it is determined whether the combination of the updated losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the center symbol display area are different), and if it is a reach symbol combination (step SB4006 is YES), it is further determined in step SB4007 whether it is a front and rear missing reach. If the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear missing reach (front and rear missing symbols) (step SB4007 is YES), it proceeds to step SB4008, and the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear missing reach symbol buffer of RAM553. If the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of a reach other than a front or rear miss (a pattern other than a front or rear miss) (step SB4007 is NO), proceed to step SB4009 and store the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time in the reach pattern buffer other than a front or rear miss in RAM 553.

If the combination is other than the reach pattern (step SB4006 is NO), proceed to step SB4010 to determine whether the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a losing pattern combination. If the combination is a losing pattern (completely losing pattern) (step SB4010 is YES), proceed to step SB4011 to store the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time in the complete losing pattern buffer of RAM 553. Note that if both steps SB4006 and SB4010 are NO, the patterns are aligned on the top, middle, and bottom, which corresponds to a combination of jackpot patterns, but in this case, this process ends without storing the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR in the buffer.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the chance pattern that is stopped and displayed in the case of "JUB jackpot" has one combination of decorative patterns ("3", "4", "1"), There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in step SB3907, a display setting process is performed to perform various displays on the performance display device 42. This display setting process mainly involves variable display setting process for performing variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 42, and hold display setting process for performing hold display.

First, the change display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. As shown in FIG. 84, in step SB4301, the setting status of the change display flag is checked to determine whether or not a change display is in progress on the performance display device 42. In more detail, if the change display flag is set (if it is in the on state), it is deemed that a change display is in progress, and if the change display flag is released (if it is in the off state), it is deemed that the change display is in a stopped state, which corresponds to a stopped state. As described above, the change display flag is turned on when the change display of the performance display device 42 is started (start setting process of step SB4113), and is turned off when the change display of the performance display device 42 is stopped (see step SB4305).

If the answer here is positive, i.e. if the fluctuation has started or is still occurring, proceed to step SB4302; if the answer is negative, terminate this process.

In step SB4302, a variable display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10,000 msec), the variable display timer is set to "2500" and is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec.

The process then proceeds to step SB4303, where it is determined whether a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303.

If a negative judgment is made in step SB4303, in step SB4304, a change execution process is performed to execute a change display on the performance display device 42, and this process is terminated.

In this variation execution process, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, for example. .

Thereby, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in accordance with the command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of symbols on the effect display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the value of the fluctuation display timer set in the start setting process of step SB4113 is Until it reaches "0"), the variable display of symbols continues under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", in step SB4305, the stop display setting for performing a stop display on the effect display device 42 is set. and end this process. In the stop display setting, the fluctuating display flag is canceled (turned off), and a stop command that instructs the display control device 45 to stop the fluctuating display on the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the variation execution processing of step SB4304, production mode switching setting processing for performing the display mode on the production display device 42 in a mode (production mode) according to the type of gaming state is also performed.

In this embodiment, the presentation mode is switched between "normal mode" where "high support mode" is not applied, "high support mode" where "chance mode" is applied and the duration is unknown, and "gold mode" where "until next time high support mode" is applied and the player is explicitly notified of this, depending on the game state (the value of game state determination value Xj).

More specifically, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are assigned, The effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 92).

In addition, when the value of the game state judgment value Xj is "3", that is, after the end of the "high support mode" for a specified period, the state in which the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are applied becomes a so-called "latent state", so that even in such a case, the state appears to be no different from the "normal state", so the presentation mode in the presentation display device 42 is set to "normal mode".

When the value of the game status judgment value Xj stored in the game status information storage area of RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5" or "7", that is, during the non-alert presentation of "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", "50 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode S", "Until next time high support mode", or during the "support continuation presentation" described below, the presentation mode in the presentation display device 42 is set to "chance mode" (see FIG. 94).

When the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, when the "until next time/high support mode" is assigned (excluding the non-announcement production period), , the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 95).

Next, the hold display setting process will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 85. First, in step SB4501, the winning type information stored in the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower start prize opening 33YB among the sub-variation reservation areas is information corresponding to a small win (small win). (win information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if small win information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step SB4502. As shown in FIG. 92, in the normal hold display, hold images TA1 to TA1 corresponding to four hold areas (hold first to fourth hold areas) are displayed in the first hold display area W3a and the second hold display area W3b, respectively. TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed as each holding image TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4.

Then, in the normal hold display update process of step SB4502, a display update process is performed to increase or decrease the number of hold images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in a lit or unlit state depending on the increase or decrease in the number of holds in the sub-variable hold area.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4501, that is, if small hit information is included in any of the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area, reservation display change processing is performed in step SB4503. After that, this process ends.

By performing the hold display change process of step SB4503, one of the four hold images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second hold display area W3b that corresponds to the hold area containing the small win information is replaced with a "star-shaped image" from the "hold lamp image" displayed during normal hold display. For example, in the example shown in Figure 97, the third hold image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image."

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in the lamp setting process of step SB3908, the lighting pattern of the lamps and decorative lights is set to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SB3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Furthermore, if a command related to voice, such as a notification of an error occurrence, is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SB3909.

In step SB3910, accessory effect setting processing is executed. In the accessory performance setting process, various settings regarding the accessory performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 are performed. Note that the accessory performance setting process is a process that is performed as an additional performance when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, which will be described later, and is executed only when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed. It is processing. Details of the accessory effect setting process in step SB3910 will be described later.

In step SB3911, other processes such as control settings for customer waiting effects (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed with no variable display on the effect display device 42) are performed. .

In step 3912, external output processing is performed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings in steps SB3905 to SB3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern is changed and displayed by the performance display device 42. In addition, when a special feature performance is executed, various control signals such as motor control signals (drive pulse signals) are output to the special feature units 761, 762, etc.

After the processes in steps SB3905 to SB3912, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SB3904, the process moves to step SB3913, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information or not. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If no information about the power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step SB3914, where it is determined whether or not RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step SB3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop in order to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3913 that the power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step SB3915. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring and each output port is turned off. The stored information on the power failure occurrence is also erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing is looped infinitely.

Next, the display mode on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 will be explained along with the flow of the game played by the player.

In the normal state (when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "0"), a variable display area W1 consisting of three pattern display areas, upper, middle, and lower, is set on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 (see FIG. 92). In addition, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 is set that instructs (recommends) the player on the mode of launching the game ball, and further below that, a pending display area W3 is set that shows the number of pending variable displays.

The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b, corresponding to the first sub-change hold area and the second sub-change hold area. In each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) are displayed (see FIG. 92).

The pending images TA1-TA4, TB1-TB4 are normally (non-pending) displayed in an off state (see shaded areas), and when a variable display is pending in a specific pending area, the pending images TA1-TA4, TB1-TB4 corresponding to that pending area are switched to a lit state (see white areas).

In the example shown in Figure 92, the first pending image TA1 and the second pending image TA2 in the first pending display area W3a are displayed in a lit state, and the remaining pending images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in an unlit state. In other words, it shows that a variable display is reserved in the first and second reserved areas of the first sub-variable pending area, and the current number of pending variable displays is "2" related to the upper start winning slot 33YA.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 is displayed with "← "Left-handed" is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left."

When "hitting to the left", most of the game balls are guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35 by the nails and the like. Among them, how many game balls will be won into the upper starting prize opening 33YA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34, which triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33YB (opening/closing device 37Y), is located in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, i.e., in a position that cannot be reached by the game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Therefore, if the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing device 37Y will not be opened and the game ball will not enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

In other words, under normal circumstances, the game is set up so that players who play by hitting with the left hand have a greater advantage in the game.

When the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the performance display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and displayed periodically from right to left in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In such a case, in the upper pattern display area, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display stops in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area, and the decorative patterns Z are displayed stationary in each pattern display area.

If the jackpot lottery is won based on the entry of a game ball into the upper start winning slot 33YA, the player will go through a reach state, and then a decorative pattern Z of the jackpot combination will be displayed stopped on a specified jackpot line. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, center, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (called five lines). Therefore, when three decorative patterns Z of the jackpot combination are displayed stopped in a row on any of the five lines in the top, middle, and bottom pattern display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and a game ball can enter the jackpot opening, and a predetermined jackpot effect is displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42. will be started. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 32 is located in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position that cannot be reached by the game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35), if the player continues to "hit from the left", the game ball cannot win the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, when the big win performance starts, the instruction display area W2 displays "right hit →" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (such an action will be referred to as "right hit" below). In response, the player switches from "left hit" to "right hit" to play the big win game so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35.

In the case of "hitting to the right" here, most of the game balls will be guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nails and the like, and will be won into the variable winning device 32. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not win into the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB by the nails and the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, on the way to the variable winning device 32, a through gate 34 is provided which triggers the opening of the lower starting winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y). The game ball passes through the through gate 34.

If the game ball wins the opening lottery that is held when it passes through the through gate 34, the opening and closing device 37Y opens, allowing the game ball to enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

After the jackpot ends, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42) display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode" will be added as a mode.

Accordingly, on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, a predetermined support performance ("chance mode" performance or "gold mode" performance) related to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is reduced. Is displayed. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line.

During this support effect, a support count display area W4 is set on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 (see Figures 94 and 95). The support count display area W4 displays the number of support times that have apparently been confirmed to be granted. Therefore, for example, even if the internal lottery has confirmed that "50" support times will be granted, for the sake of effect, "20" will initially be displayed.

More specifically, when a "16R normal jackpot B" or a "4R normal jackpot B" is won and "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is awarded, that is, when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "1", the support count display area W4 initially displays "20 times". Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Similarly, when a "16R High-Speed Jackpot B" or a "4R High-Speed Jackpot B" is won and "20 Times High Support Mode", "30 Times High Support Mode", "40 Times High Support Mode" or "50 Times High Support Mode" is awarded, i.e., when the game state determination value Xj has a value of "4", the support count display area W4 initially displays "20 times". Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

On the other hand, if a "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times high support mode S" is awarded, that is, if the game state determination value Xj is "2" or "5" (excluding Xj = "5" in the case of non-notification performance), the support count display area W4 initially displays "30 times." Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" and are granted "Until next time/high support mode", that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is " 6", "until next time" is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the above-mentioned non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

As mentioned above, while the "high support mode" is in effect, the game ball is more likely to enter the lower start winning hole 33YB, so even if the jackpot game has ended, it is preferable for the player to continue "hitting to the right" in order to get an opportunity to open the opening and closing device 37Y. In other words, during the "high support mode," the game is set up so that players who play by "hitting to the right" can play more advantageously. Therefore, in the "high support mode," the instruction display area W2 of the performance display device 42 displays "Hit to the right" to recommend that the player "hit to the right."

In this embodiment, the change time during normal times fluctuation in "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support times display area W4 is not the final value of "1 time"), i.e., when the game state determination value Xj has a value of "1", "2", "4", or "5", is set to "1 second" by the change pattern table selected based on each game state determination value Xj (except for a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance that matches this is determined and executed by the sub-control device 262.

Also, when the "high support mode" changes a specific number of times (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 is the ending value "1 time", that is, the "20th time" or "30th time" after the end of the jackpot) , the "40th" or "50th" variation time), that is, the variation time when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "7" is selected based on the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" according to the fluctuation pattern table (excluding when there is a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

When the specific number of changes occurs (25-second change), the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 performs a support continuation effect that increases the player's interest, such as determining by lottery whether the "high support mode" will continue or not.

For example, in this embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time of the above-mentioned specific times variation. In the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 96, a roulette symbol TR is displayed. The roulette symbol TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Items such as "until" are listed.

In the roulette effect, the roulette symbol TR rotates and the subsequent gaming state is determined by the item that stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Which item the ball will land on is determined by the number of times the "high support mode" has been awarded ("20 times," "30 times," "40 times," "50 times," or "until next time") determined at the time of the big win lottery, and the number of times support has been awarded at that time (the value of the support count counter).The item that has been determined is then displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode" and after "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, if you reach the roulette effect, the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are "30" remaining support grants, so the item "+10 times" is selected.

For example, if you win "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are no more support grants left, the "End" item is selected.

Also, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A" with "Until Next Time/High Support Mode", a non-announcement effect is performed (the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj becomes "5"), and the support count display area W4 is displayed. When the roulette effect is reached after "30 times" is initially displayed, the upper limit is "until next time", so the item "until next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode," the display state on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 92). Therefore, "← left hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 of the display unit 42a.

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small win information is stored in any of the holding areas of the second sub-variation holding area related to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, , among the pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the display mode of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area storing the small winning information is changed to an image in a mode different from the normal mode. (See FIG. 97). In the example shown in FIG. 97, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image". In this embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even if the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", if small win information is stored in the hold area, the above display will be displayed and the player will receive a small win. This suggests that this will occur.

As mentioned above, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small win state is extremely short, so if you switch from "hitting left" to "hitting right" after the small win occurs, it will be too late, and in order to make the game ball win the variable winning device 32, you need to "hit right" in advance. In this regard, in this embodiment, the small win hint allows the player to know that a small win will occur, so they can prepare in advance and miss out on fewer small wins.

As described above, when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, a performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 may be performed as an additional performance. .

Here, the accessory effect setting process in step SB3910 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 98 and 99.

First, in step SB6001, it is determined whether or not the current variation is the execution time of the roulette performance (support continuous performance), taking into consideration the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

If the result is negative, i.e., if the roulette effect is not being executed, in step SB6002, the value of the effect status flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0," and the process ends.

The performance state flag JF is discrimination information for determining the performance state of the additional performance (mainly the performance performance using the performance accessory units 761 and 762).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6001, that is, if the current variation is the execution time of the roulette effect, the process moves to step SB6003.

In step SB6003, it is determined whether or not the additional performance is currently in the pre-start stage (JF=0), taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the additional effect has started (JF≧1), the process moves to step SB6006.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6003, that is, if it is before the start of additional effects, the process moves to step SB6004.

At step SB6004, based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553, performance determination processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the performance performance and its type.

The relationship between the value of the reel effect counter CB8 and whether or not a reel effect is being executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as a reel effect pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, in the roulette performance of the performance display device 42, multiple role performance pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the final display items of the roulette pattern TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Specifically, three tables are provided to correspond to three confirmed display items: "End", which indicates that the number of support times ends here; "+10 times", which indicates that the number of support times will be increased by another 10 times; and "Until next time", which indicates that the number of support times will continue until the next big win; a "End" reel performance pattern determination table; a "+10 times" reel performance pattern determination table; and a "Until next time" reel performance pattern determination table.

In addition, the rate at which various presentation patterns are selected in each table varies depending on whether it corresponds to the "end", "+10 times", or "until next time". If the number of support times continues, and if it corresponds to the "until next time", the various tables are configured so that the probability of a special feature presentation being performed, and the rate at which a development presentation pattern, which will be described later, is performed, are higher than in the "end" case.

For example, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "end", the "end"/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 is CB8=0 to 249, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the special feature counter CB8 is CB8 = 250 to 399, "Special feature with special feature" is selected, and special feature is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8 = 250 to 299, the special feature of "no development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 300 to 329, the special feature of "first development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 330 to 359, the special feature of "second development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 360 to 379, the special feature of "third development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 380 to 389, the special feature of "fourth development pattern" is executed, and when CB8 = 390 to 399, the special feature of "fifth development pattern" is executed. Details of the special feature of the first to fifth development patterns will be described later.

Further, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "until next time", the "until next time" time/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 is CB8=0 to 9, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter CB8 is CB8=10 to 399, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8=10 to 99, the "no development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CB8=100 to 199, the "first development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and CB8= In the case of CB8=200-249, the accessory effect of the "second development pattern" is executed, and in the case of CB8=250-299, the accessory effect of the "third development pattern" is executed, and when CB8=300-349. If CB8=350 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fourth development pattern" is executed, and if CB8=350 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fifth development pattern" is executed.

Note that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character performance pattern determination table, which is referred to when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "+10 times", are omitted from illustration, but are similar to those mentioned above. A table with contents different from the ``'End'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' and the ``'Until next time'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' is set.

If the "No reel effect" option is selected, the reel effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The reel effect pattern flag PF is discrimination information for discriminating the reel effect pattern.

Similarly, if a "no development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "1". If a "first development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "2". If a "second development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "3". If a "third development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "4". If a "fourth development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "5". If a "fifth development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "6".

Therefore, when performing the performance determination process in step SB6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined one from among the plurality of role object performance pattern determination table groups based on the information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette performance. An accessory performance pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and an accessory performance pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553.

Then, in the following step SB6005, the start request setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated.

In the start request setting process of step SB6005, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "1" indicating that the start request period for the accessory performance is in progress, and the value of the operation effective timer ST is set to a predetermined value (main In the embodiment, it is set to 5 seconds).

Note that the operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125.

Furthermore, in this start request setting process, a display setting process is performed to perform a start request display performance on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 to prompt the player to press the effect button 125. A display effect prompting operation is executed.

Now, in step SB6006, which is reached when a negative judgment is made in step SB6003, the value of the performance status flag JF is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the current period is one in which a request to start a reel performance is being made (JF = 1). If a negative judgment is made here, i.e., if the current period is not one in which a request to start a reel performance is being made (JF ≥ 2), the process moves to step SB6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6006, that is, if it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance, it is determined in step SB6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the period of requesting the start of the accessory production, and the operation validity period has passed, the process moves to step SB6008.

In step SB6008, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6007 is negative, i.e., if the value of the operation validity timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SB6009.

In step SB6009, taking into account the value of the button operation flag BF, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the period of requesting the start of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period). Discern.

The button operation flag BF is discrimination information for determining whether or not the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, and if the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, its value is "1". , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If the result of step SB6009 is negative, i.e., if the effect button 125 has not been pressed, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB6009 is positive, i.e., if the effect button 125 has been pressed, the process of setting the effect pattern is performed in step SB6010.

In the performance pattern setting process of step SB6010, a value corresponding to the performance pattern selected in the performance determination process of step SB6004 is set as the value of the performance status flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF, if "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, if "Accessory effect is included (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern, third development pattern, fourth development pattern, or fifth development pattern)" is selected, the performance state flag JF Set the value to "3".

Thereafter, in step SB6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing is ended.

Now, in step SB6012 to which the process proceeds after a negative determination is made in step SB6006, it is determined whether or not the performance pattern of the additional performance is "no accessory performance (JF=2)", taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Determine.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the performance pattern is "no accessory performance", notification setting processing is performed in step SB6013.

By performing this notification setting process, the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 displays a notification performance that notifies the user that the accessory performance will not be performed, such as displaying characters such as "Unfortunate that it does not move". executed.

Thereafter, in step SB6014, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the answer is NO in step SB6012, the process proceeds to step SB6015, where it is determined whether the value of the performance status flag JF is "3".

If the result here is positive, the presentation pattern is "with special feature presentation (JF = 3)", but it is considered that the current stage is before the start of the special feature drive presentation, and the upper special feature drive setting process is performed in step SB6016, and this process ends.

In the upper role drive setting process of step SB6016, the sub-control device 262 first reads from the ROM 552 the upper role performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper role performance, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the superior role performance control data according to the timetable, and also The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

The multiple operation process data include, for example, data that specifies an operation process such as driving and controlling the swing drive mechanism 812 (swing motor 815) of the upper prop unit 761 to lower, raise, or stop the upper movable prop 811, and data that specifies an operation process such as driving and controlling the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate or stop the upper rotating body 820.

As a result, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern is "with accessory performance", when the player presses the performance button 125, the upper movable accessory 811 is first moved to the standby position (the upper side of the center frame 47). 47a) to the lower performance position (see FIGS. 56 and 58).

Then, after the upper movable accessory 811 descends to the performance position and stops so as to cover a part of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating. In this embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is set to rotate clockwise at a constant speed.

At the same time, the roulette symbol TR (see Figure 96) is displayed in a reduced size on the display unit 42a and hidden behind the upper rotating body 820, making it difficult for the player to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 108, various display objects are displayed on the display section 42a around the roulette symbol TR along the orbit EF of the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 108, a plurality of star-shaped light emitting points EG are displayed blinking along the orbit EF of the magnifying lens section 828. As a result, the display target (for example, the star-shaped light emitting point EG) located at the position through which the magnifying lens section 828 passes is displayed in an enlarged manner through the magnifying lens section 828, and is visible to the player. Of course, the display target displayed here is not limited to the star-shaped light emitting point EG illustrated in FIG. 108, and a configuration in which a different display target is displayed may be adopted.

When the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, a predetermined value based on the various performance patterns (operation process data) is set for the value of a predetermined process timer. Once the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, it continues to rotate until the value of the process timer becomes "0". The process timer decrement process is performed separately in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal processing described above.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the upper rotary body 820 entered the constant speed rotation state (after the series of rotation start operations are completed), the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the performance state flag JF to the value after the start of execution of the accessory performance. "4" is set to indicate that the operation is valid, and a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the operation valid timer ST.

At the same time, a display setting process is performed on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 to perform a development request display performance.

By carrying out this display setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned display objects, etc., the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays a display effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 125, such as by displaying text such as "Press the button."

Now, in step SB6017 to which the transition is made after a negative determination is made in step SB6015, taking into account the value of the performance state flag JF, the current performance initial state (JF=4 ).

In this embodiment, the presentation mode in the initial presentation state after the start of the execution of the role device presentation and before the presentation development stage is the same regardless of whether the "first development pattern," "second development pattern," "third development pattern," "fourth development pattern," or "fifth development pattern" is set.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the performance is not in the initial state of the accessory performance (JF≧5), the process moves to step SB6030.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6017 is positive, i.e., if the device is in the initial state of the reel performance (the upper rotating body 820 is rotating independently), then step SB6018 determines whether the value of the operation validity timer ST is "0".

If the answer is yes, i.e., if the value of the operation validity timer ST is "0", the player does not press the effect button 125 during the initial state of the role-play effect, and the operation validity period has elapsed, and the process proceeds to step SB6019.

In step SB6019, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6018, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step SB6020.

In step SB6020, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the initial state of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period), taking into account the value of the button operation flag BF. do.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6020, that is, if the effect button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the performance button 125 is pressed, then in step SB6021, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF corresponds to the "no development pattern (lower accessory performance pattern)". It is determined whether it is "1" or not.

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the presentation pattern is a "no development pattern," then no development presentation setting processing is performed in step SB6022.

When this no-development performance setting process is performed, a notification performance is executed on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 to inform the player that no development performance will be performed, for example by displaying text such as "Too bad there was no development."

Thereafter, in step SB6023, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and this process ends.

Now, if the answer is negative in step SB6021, the process proceeds to step SB6024, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "2", which corresponds to the "first development pattern (pattern without expansion stop)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "first development pattern," the first development performance setting process is performed in step SB6025, and this process is terminated.

In the first development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role object performance has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the first development pattern from the ROM 552. The first development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data contained in the first advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

Note that, although the same applies to the following various development effect patterns, the plurality of operation process data includes, for example, controlling the drive motor 821 for the upper rotary body to rotate or stop the upper rotary body 820, etc. The data that defines the operation process of the lower movable accessory unit 762 and the vertical drive mechanism 852 (vertical drive motor 860) are controlled to raise, lower, or stop the lower movable accessory unit 762. data that defines the operation process such as controlling the drive motors 855A, 855B for the lower rotary bodies to rotate or stop the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B, etc. It is.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the first development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the first development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Incidentally, although the same applies to the following various advanced effect patterns, the process timer subtraction process is separately performed in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal process. In addition, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 based on the contents of the various setting processes performed in this process, and the upper movable accessory Various controls related to the accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 will be performed. Then, when the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to various advanced production patterns is started, the operation control continues until the value of the process timer becomes "0". This will be done.

In this configuration, when the first development performance pattern is executed in this embodiment (the same applies when the various development performance patterns described below are executed), first, the rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 is controlled to be reduced to an extent that the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can be seen. At the same time, a setting process is performed to execute output processing of a predetermined sound (for example, a sound shouting "big or small") from the speaker SP as a development notification performance. Based on this setting process, the output control process of the speaker SP is performed by the sound setting process of the above step SB3909.

Next, the lower movable part 851 is raised from its standby position (see FIG. 56) on the back side of the lower edge 47b of the center frame 47 while the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are rotated.

The lower left rotating body 856A is configured to rotate at a constant speed in a clockwise direction, and the lower right rotating body 856B is configured to rotate at a constant speed in a counterclockwise direction. The rotation speeds of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are set to be relatively slow so that the player can see the characters "SMALL" and "BIG" written in each of the information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb.

After that, when the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B reach a predetermined performance position in front of the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42, only the upward movement of the lower movable part 851 is stopped while maintaining the rotation of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B. As a result, the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are each rotating at a position behind the rotation path of the movable piece 825 of the rotating upper rotating body 820 (see Figure 58, etc.).

In this state, while the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating, the positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B is such that at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap; and a condition where at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B overlap. Changes to

Then, in the first development performance pattern, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the stopping position of the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 does not match the stopping position of either the first information section 856Aa (strong, SMALL) or the second information section 856Ab (weak, SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A, and does not match the stopping position of either the first information section 856Ba (strong, BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (weak, BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as the "stopped state without magnification display"), and the performance ends.

However, the combination of stopping modes of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B that results in a "stopped state without enlarged display" is not limited to the combination exemplified in FIG. 109, and the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to stop in a different combination. In this case, the combination pattern of these stopping modes may be determined based on the value of the above-mentioned role performance counter CB8.

Now, if the answer is negative in step SB6024, the process proceeds to step SB6026, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "3", which corresponds to the "second development pattern (weak/small expansion stop pattern)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "second development pattern," the second development performance setting process is performed in step SB6027, and this process is terminated.

In the second development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role object performance has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the second development pattern from the ROM 552. The second development effect control data that defines the following is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data contained in the second advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 executes the operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the second development pattern based on the second development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

Under such a configuration, when the second advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotary body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotary body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4, and the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as "weak/SMALL"). The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so as to reach the "SMALL enlargement stop state", and the performance ends.

However, the stopping mode of the lower right rotating body 856B in the "weak/small expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 110, and the lower right rotating body 856B may be configured to stop in a different mode. In this case, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the reel performance counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6026, the process moves to step SB6028, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "4", which corresponds to the "third development pattern (strong/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "third developed pattern," a third developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6029, and the present process is ended.

In the third development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role object performance has been developed.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the third development performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper movable part 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable part 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) that correspond to the third development pattern, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data included in the third advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 will execute operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the third development pattern based on the third development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

Under such a configuration, when the third advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, after the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotary body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotary body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4, and the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state will be referred to as "strong/SMALL"). The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so as to reach the "SMALL enlargement stop state", and the performance ends.

However, the stopping manner of the right-bottom rotating body 856B in the "Strong/SMALL expansion stopped state" is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 111, and the right-bottom rotating body 856B may be configured to stop in a manner different from this. In this case, this stopping manner may be determined based on the value of the reel performance counter CB8.

Now, if the result of step SB6028 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB6030, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "5", which corresponds to the "fourth development pattern (weak/BIG expansion stop pattern)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "fourth development pattern," the fourth development performance setting process is performed in step SB6031, and this process is terminated.

In the fourth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the fourth development pattern from the ROM 552. The fourth development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data included in the fourth advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 will execute operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the fourth development pattern based on the fourth development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

Under such a configuration, when the fourth advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotary body 856B finally match, that is, the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 matches, A state in which the specific movable piece 825A stops at the first stop position EA1, and the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B stops at the first stop position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as " The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the state is "weak/BIG enlargement stop state"), and the performance ends.

However, the stopping mode of the lower left rotating body 856A when the "Weak/BIG expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 112, and the lower left rotating body 856A may be configured to stop in a different mode. In this case, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the reel effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6030, the process moves to step SB6032, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "6", which corresponds to the "fifth development pattern (strong/BIG expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "fifth development pattern," the fifth development performance setting process is performed in step SB6033, and this process is terminated.

In the fifth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the fifth development performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper movable part 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable part 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) that correspond to the fifth development pattern, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data included in the fifth advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 will execute operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the fifth development pattern based on the fifth development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

In this configuration, when the fifth development operation pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same operation control as when the first development performance pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 113, the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the stopping position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stopping position of the first information description section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the right lower rotating body 856B finally coincide with each other, that is, the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stopping position EA1 and the first information description section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the right lower rotating body 856B stops at the first stopping position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as the "Strong/BIG expansion stop state"). The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop, completing the performance.

However, the manner in which the lower left rotating body 856A stops when the "strong/BIG enlargement stop state" is reached is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 113, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a manner different from this. It may also be a configuration. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8.

Now, in step SB6035 to which the transition is made after a negative determination is made in step SB6017, it is determined whether or not the role performance is currently in the developing state (JF=5), taking into account the value of the performance state flag JF. . If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6035, that is, if the accessory performance is in the developing state (the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in operation), the process moves to step SB6036.

In step SB6036, it is determined whether the value of the process timer is "0". If the determination is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6036 is positive, i.e., if it is time for the reel performance to end, the end setting process is performed in step SB6037, and this process ends.

In the end setting process of step SB6037, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the reel performance end control data that specifies the end process of the reel performance, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

Based on this, the upper rotary body 820 (upper rotary body drive motor 821) is stopped, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B (lower rotary body drive motors 855A, 855B) are stopped, and the upper movable accessory 811 is moved to the standby position. The operation setting process for raising the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, the operation setting process for lowering the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, etc. are sequentially performed, and the accessory production ends.

As described above in detail, according to this embodiment, the second rotating body, which is movable in a predetermined region and rotatable in a predetermined manner, is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating body, and the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a front view of the predetermined region can be changed between a first positional relationship in which at least a part of the first rotating body does not overlap with at least a part of the second rotating body, and a second positional relationship in which at least a part of the first rotating body overlaps with at least a part of the second rotating body. In the first positional relationship, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating body, and in the second positional relationship, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating body that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating body.

In this way, by having the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body and the second rotating body) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap and move apart, it is possible to create a more dynamic game presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visibility of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be changed without controlling the light-emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform motion effects of the first rotating body and the second rotating body as well as effects using light. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to the above-described embodiments in any combination of all or part. It is also possible to combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is of the first type in which a jackpot state in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning holes 33YA and 33YB. It is a gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. Note that the gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to players, special prize states (rounds) awarded during jackpots, gaming modes such as high probability modes awarded after jackpots, etc. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

For example, the second type of gaming machine may be provided with a variable winning device that opens when a small jackpot is won in a winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering a specified starting winning section, and the game ball that entered the variable winning device enters a specified special winning section (V winning port) to generate a jackpot state. Here, the game machine may be configured so that, when a game ball enters the starting winning section, no specified lottery process is performed (or lottery process with a 100% winning probability may be performed), and the variable winning device opens based on the ball entering the starting winning section, and the game ball that entered the variable winning device enters the V winning port or the like to generate a jackpot state.

Furthermore, it may be implemented as a third type gaming machine (for example, a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) that has both the functions of the first type gaming machine and the functions of the second type gaming machine.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities associated with various types of lottery related to pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. Furthermore, as will be described later, it goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a type of game machine in which the game balls are circulated within the game machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) occur, a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) occur, etc. are set, but the number of rounds is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which other different jackpot states occur.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot).

(c) The configuration of the game mode granted after the end of the jackpot state (such as the granting period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "high support mode" is always given after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the "high support mode" is not given depending on the jackpot type. Good too.

In addition, this pachinko machine does not change the lottery mode (``high probability mode'' or ``low probability mode''), but only switches to the winning support mode (``high support mode'' or ``low support mode''). It's okay. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, the pachinko machine may be configured to provide points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card. A specific game mode such as a high support mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above embodiment is constructed based on a transparent plate, which is a translucent member, but is not limited thereto, and may be constructed from an opaque member such as wood that does not have translucency.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C equipped with multiple LEDs are arranged at the rear of a specific area of the play area, making it possible to perform various light-emitting effects. However, this is not limited to the above, and other light-emitting means such as lamps or liquid crystal displays may be arranged at the rear of the play board 30 in place of or in addition to the LED board 48A, etc.

(d-2) In place of or in addition to the above embodiment, a light emitting device such as a lamp or an LED is arranged at at least one of the top, bottom, left and right end faces of the game board 30 so as to face the end face. , the light emitted from the light emitting means enters into the game board 30, and a part of the light is emitted from a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 30, making it visible to the player. Good too. In other words, the game board 30 may be configured to function as a light emitting member or a light guiding member. Of course, a portion of the light incident from the first position in the front view of the front part (or rear part) of the game board 30 is emitted from the second position in the front view of the front part of the game board 30, and becomes visible to the player. It is also possible to have a configuration like this.

(d-3) Instead of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display device having a display screen that is large enough to cover substantially the entire back side of the play area or substantially the entire back side of the play board 30 may be provided at the rear of the play board 30.

Further, the game board 30 may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the performance display device 42. At this time, nails or the like may be placed on the front surface of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the performance display device 42, to make this an area where the game ball can flow down. Of course, this may be an area where the game ball cannot fall.

(e) The configuration of the first rotating means is not limited to the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating body of the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 which is the first rotating means (first rotating body) is the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the effect display device 42 which becomes the effect area (predetermined area). Although it is configured to rotate on the front side, the area in which the first rotating means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotating operation in the front region of the center frame 47. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotating means is fixed, or a configuration may be adopted in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotating means is displaceable.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotation means performs a rotational operation in the internal area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32. Here, the rotation axis of the first rotation means may be fixed, or the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means may be displaceable.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotating operation in the front area (play area) of the game board 30. Here, the rotation axis of the first rotating means may be fixed, or the position of the rotation axis of the first rotating means may be displaceable.

(e-2) The moving mechanism of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, as the support arm 814 swings and displaces, the upper rotating body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) moves between the standby position on the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47 and the display part of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced to the presentation position on the front side of 42a.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position of the upper rotary body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) may be configured to linearly move between the standby position and the performance position, such as in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, or may be configured to move in a linear manner. It may be configured to move between the standby position and the presentation position by combining a plurality of movements such as curvilinear movements. Of course, the first rotating means may be rotatably supported (fixed) at a predetermined position without moving.

(e-3) The shape of the first rotating means (first rotating body) and the configuration related to the light-transmitting portion are not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is configured to have six movable pieces 825 resembling petals as light-transmitting portions, but the number, arrangement, shape, etc. of the light-transmitting portions are not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted. A configuration with only one light-transmitting portion may also be used.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the movable piece 825, which is the light-transmitting part, slides and displaces in the radial direction of the upper rotating body 820, causing the upper rotating body 820 to expand or contract in diameter, but this is not limiting, and the light-transmitting part may not be displaced in the radial direction of the first rotating means, that is, the size of the first rotating means may not change. For example, the first rotating means may be a disk body that is circular when viewed from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the general part of each movable piece 825 is made of a semi-transparent member that makes it difficult to identify the display target displayed on the display unit 42a, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display object may be made of an identifiable transparent member.

Further, the movable piece 825 does not need to be made of a light-transmitting material, and the movable piece 825 may be made of a light-shielding material. In such a case, each specific movable piece 825 may have a configuration in which a through hole or a notch through which light can be transmitted (visually recognized) is formed. Alternatively, a first rotating means may be employed in which a predetermined number of through holes, etc., which serve as light-transmitting portions, are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of a circular disc body when viewed from the front. In other words, the first rotating means may have portions with different light transmittances.

(e-4) In the above embodiment, it acts on the acted parts (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means (second rotating body). As an action part, a magnifying lens part 828 is formed in one movable piece 825 (specific movable piece 825A) among the six movable pieces 825.

This is not a limitation, and the configuration may omit the magnifying lens unit 828. Also, instead of or in addition to the magnifying lens unit 828, a reduction lens unit may be provided as the acting unit. By using this, for example, a miss effect may be performed in which the acted upon parts (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are displayed in a reduced size.

(e-5) The rotational drive source of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotary body 820 is configured to rotate using the upper rotary body drive motor 821 as the drive source, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other actuators such as a solenoid may be employed as the rotational drive source. It's okay.

A configuration may also be adopted in which the first rotation means rotates using game balls that are shot into the play area. For example, a rotation drive member such as a waterwheel may be placed inside the outlet 36, and a drive transmission mechanism may be placed that transmits the force of the rotation drive member to the first rotation means, and the first rotation means may be rotationally driven using out balls that are frequently discharged from the outlet 36. The first rotation means may also rotate using game balls that flow down a predetermined position in the play area. In short, any configuration is acceptable as long as the first rotation means can rotate using game balls that are launched into the play area by the launching means.

(f) The configuration of the second rotating means is not limited to the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B as the second rotating body in the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the plate-shaped lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are substantially rectangular in front view, are used as the second rotating means (second rotating body), but the number of second rotating means The configuration, shape, and configuration of the information writing section are not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, either the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B may be omitted, and a configuration may be provided in which only one second rotating means is provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with three or more 2nd rotation means.

The second rotation means may be, for example, a rotating body that is circular when viewed from the front and can rotate around its axial direction, and the rotating body may be provided with one or three or more information-writing sections.

(f-2) The second rotating means may be a rotating body of a different shape, such as a sphere.

For example, as shown in FIG. 114, a movable part for the second rotating means (second rotating body) may be adopted, which includes a predetermined support section 880 that is movable by a moving drive means (not shown), a storage section 881 provided at the upper end of the support section 880, a spherical member 882 as the spherical second rotating means (spherical body) stored in the storage section 881, and a rotation drive means consisting of a plurality of actuators (not shown) for controlling the attitude, orientation, etc. of the spherical member 882.

In the movable part illustrated in FIG. 114, one of the information sections 884 provided at multiple locations (e.g., four locations) on the surface of the ball member 882 can be seen through an opening 883 formed in the front portion of the container 881. Such information section 884 may contain text information such as "hit" or "miss."

Here, the ball member 882 may be made of a translucent member. Then, light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means disposed behind the housing section 881 enters the ball member 882 through the rear opening (not shown) of the housing section 881, and enters the ball member 882 through the opening 883 to play the game. It may also be made visible to the public.

Alternatively, the ball member 882 may be made of a metal material, or the surface of the ball member 882 may be plated or the like. Then, light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means (including light entering from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 101) may be irradiated onto the ball member 882 from the front through the opening portion 883, and the light reflected here may be visible to the player.

(f-3) In the above embodiment, the lower rotors 856A, 856B are configured to be rotatable with the axial direction being the front-to-rear direction, but the axial direction of the second rotating means is not limited to this.

For example, the ball member 882 as the second rotation means illustrated in FIG. 114 may be configured to rotate in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, or diagonal direction as the rotation axis direction. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis direction (attitude) of the second rotation means can be changed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 114, ball receiving members (not shown) capable of supporting the ball member 882 are provided at eight corners of the accommodating portion 881, and by controlling the ball receiving members, the ball receiving member is A configuration may also be adopted in which three-dimensional attitude control of the spherical member 882 is performed through the spherical member 882.

(f-4) The information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the above embodiment are made of a translucent material, and the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 located at the rear It is configured to be able to transmit light emitted from it at a predetermined transmittance.

In addition, at least the information writing portion 856Aa, etc. (which may be the entire lower rotor 856A, 856B) may be made of an opaque material that does not have light-transmitting properties (e.g., a metal material). Furthermore, the information writing portion 856Aa, etc. may be polished or plated to become a reflective portion that can reflect light.

The light emitted from the predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window 101) is transmitted from the front through the movable piece 825 of the upper rotating body 820 to the information writing section. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which 856Aa or the like is irradiated.

Furthermore, the information written in the information writing section 856Aa, etc. may be made visible to the player through the magnifying lens section 828.

Further, the information writing portion 856Aa and the like may be configured to be curved into a spherical shape so as to be convex toward the outside. With this configuration, not only light incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 but also light irradiated from multiple directions such as the side of the game board 30 can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

(f-5) The moving mechanism of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the embodiment described above, the lower movable accessory 851 is provided with a vertical drive mechanism 852 that moves the lower movable accessory 851 up and down, and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are placed between the standby position on the back side of the lower side 47b of the center frame 47 and the display section of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced in the vertical direction between it and the presentation position on the front side of 42a.

Without being limited to this, for example, the position of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable part 851) may be configured to be movable not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction, front-rear direction, etc.

In addition, in a configuration that allows movement in the forward and backward directions, for example, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable role 851) may be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30. Furthermore, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable role 851) may be configured to be movable in the up-down or left-right directions in the rear area of the game board 30. In this case, the configuration may include a guide member as a rear guide means that can guide the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B that have moved to the rear area of the game board 30 to a predetermined position.

Further, the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B may each be independently movable and may be relatively movable. Of course, each may be configured to be movable individually in the up-down direction, left-right direction, front-back direction, etc. Further, each may be configured to be movable individually from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30, or each may be configured to be individually movable in the rear area of the game board 30.

The configuration may also be such that the movement path, movement speed, rotation speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are set in multiple ways (multiple patterns), and the movement path, movement speed, rotation speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B change appropriately. In addition, the configuration may also be provided with a path changing means capable of executing a process to change the path along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move. For example, a predetermined lottery is held to change the movement path, and the movement path of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is determined based on the results of this lottery.

(f-6) The rotation drive source of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are configured to rotate using the lower rotating body drive motors 855A, 855B as the drive source, but this is not limiting, and other actuators such as solenoids may be used as the rotation drive source.

Also, a specific movable member that can contact the lower rotors 856A, 856B and cause a change in the movement of the lower rotors 856A, 856B may be provided, and the lower rotors 856A, 856B may be moved by the force received from the movable member.

For example, the lower rotors 856A, 856B may be configured to start moving or rotating by colliding a specific movable member (such as a hammer-type device) with the lower rotors 856A, 856B, which are in a stopped state.

(f-7) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotation means, rotate on the front side of the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the effect display device 42, which becomes the effect area (predetermined area). However, similar to the first rotation means, the area in which the second rotation means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, in the front area of the center frame 47, the internal area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32, and the front area (gaming area) of the game board 30, a configuration is adopted in which the second rotating means is rotatable and movable. Good too. Further, in the rear region of the game board 30, the second rotation means may be configured to perform a rotation operation.

(g) The configuration related to the rotating body effect, such as the timing when the rotating body effect is performed using the first rotating means and the second rotating means (the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B), is limited to the above embodiment. However, other configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is performed as an additional effect when a support continuation effect (roulette effect) is performed. However, this is not limited to the above, and the rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be performed in a different situation, such as an additional effect of a reach effect.

For example, the above-mentioned pattern without development (rotation performance of only the upper rotary body 820 without any minor role performance) may be used for a one-shot notification performance to notify the player of winning a jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, the lottery performance is performed to determine whether or not to continue the support mode after the jackpot (number of times of support); , a type lottery is held to determine the type of jackpot state (number of rounds) based on the entry of a ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and as a performance for teaching the result of the lottery, for example, A configuration may also be adopted in which rotating body effects such as the various advanced effect patterns described above (effects using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) are performed.

In addition, when performing a rotating body performance during or at the end of a jackpot state, for example, if the lottery result that was suspended when the ball entered a predetermined entry means during the jackpot state includes a jackpot winning result (so-called pending series). occurs), the first information writing section 856Aa of both information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab of the lower left rotating body 856A (or both information writing sections 856Ba, 856Bb of the lower right rotating body 856B) ” (or “BIG” in the first information writing section 856Ba) may be displayed in an enlarged and stopped manner, or may be configured to be more likely to be displayed in an enlarged and stopped state. On the other hand, if the reserved lottery results do not include jackpot winning results (so-called pending results do not occur), "WEAK/SMALL" in the second information entry section 856Ab (or "SMALL" in the second information entry section 856Bb) is selected. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which "Weak/BIG") is displayed in an enlarged and stopped state, or a structure in which it is more likely to be displayed in an enlarged and stopped state.

(g-3) In the above embodiment, the rate at which the special effects and further development effects (rotating body effects using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) are performed is changed according to the expected degree that the high support mode will continue to be granted (the expected degree that game value will be granted).

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained through a predetermined lottery process (result that gaming value is awarded such as a big hit, small win, high probability mode, high support mode, etc.) , a configuration may be adopted in which the percentage of role performance and further development performance (rotating body performance using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) being performed is higher than when no winning result is obtained.

In addition, only when the grant of high support mode continues (when the game value is granted), or when a winning result is obtained through the prescribed lottery process (big win, small win, high probability mode, high support mode Only when a result that a game value is given such as It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done.

(h) In the above embodiment, the upper rotary body, which is the first rotation means, is 820 (magnifying lens section 828) acts, but the structure in which the first rotation means and the second rotation means act on each other is not limited to this, and other structures may be used. May be adopted.

(h-1) For example, the lower rotors 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, may act on the acted portion of the upper rotor 820, which is the first rotating means. As a specific configuration, for example, in the upper rotor 820, a "specific information section (e.g., characters such as "win")" may be provided as the acted portion instead of the "magnifying lens section 828", and in the lower left rotor 856A, a "reducing lens section" may be provided as the first acting portion instead of the "first information section 856Aa", and a "magnifying lens section" may be provided as the second acting portion instead of the "second information section 856Ab". In this configuration, the lower left rotor 856A may be configured to rotate and stop at a position forward of the upper rotor 820, and when the upper rotor 820 and the lower left rotor 856A are stopped, the specific information section (characters such as "win") may be enlarged by the "magnifying lens section" or reduced by the "reducing lens section".

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the probability of a predetermined advantageous state being achieved that is advantageous to the player is higher when the display acts in the second manner (when the display is enlarged by the "magnifying lens unit") than when the display acts in the first manner (when the display is reduced by the "reducing lens unit"). Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the probability of a second advantageous state being achieved that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state is higher when the display acts in the second manner than when the display acts in the first manner.

(h-2) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, are close to each other even when they are close to each other. It is configured to maintain a separated state.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, may be able to come into contact with each other in a close state.

For example, when the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are stopped, the peripheral edge of the action part (magnifying lens part 828) of the upper rotary body 820 is It is also possible to have a configuration in which the parts are in contact with each other. This makes it difficult for a gap to occur between the peripheral edge of the information writing portions 856Aa, etc. of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the peripheral edge of the action portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotary body 820. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as light leaking from the gap and the leaked light making it difficult to visually recognize the information writing section 856Aa or the like or reducing the brightness of the information writing section 856Aa or the like.

(i) In the above embodiment, a performance button 125 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operating means for the performance. The configuration of the operating means and the performance using this are not limited to the above embodiment.

(i-1) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the performance button 125, the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotation means, start operating, and the development performance (the upper rotary body 825 and rotating body effects using lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B). The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the advanced performance is started in accordance with a predetermined performance program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(i-2) The operating mode of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

For example, a slide lever may be provided as a first operating unit capable of adjusting the amount of left-right movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, and a performance button 125 may be provided as a second operating unit capable of determining the start and stop timing of the upward movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, so that the coordinate position at which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B perform their rotational movement may be adjusted two-dimensionally, up, down, left, and right.

In addition, at the stage of performing the above-mentioned development effect, in conjunction with the movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B rising, while displaying the character on the display section 42a, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are pressed down to execute the development effect. A display effect is performed to prevent the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B from being pushed downward, and the player repeatedly presses the effect button 125 to stop the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B from being pushed downward. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following.

(i-3) A configuration may be provided with a return regulating means (for example, a ratchet mechanism) capable of regulating the return of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B guided to the production area to outside the predetermined area (standby position). This allows the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B to operate more stably in the production area.

(j) In the above embodiment, various performances related to the rotating body performance are performed by controlling the operation (motor control, etc.) of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in accordance with a predetermined performance program. It is configured to be carried out.

In addition to this, a detection means may be provided that can detect the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B passing through a specified position in the performance area (specified area), and various performances related to the rotating body performance may be executed based on the detection of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B by the detection means.

For example, when the player is configured to be able to determine the coordinate position at which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B rotate in two dimensions, vertically, horizontally, and horizontally as described above, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B determined by the player The coordinate position may be specified by a plurality of detection means, and the rotation mode of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the magnifying lens section 828 may be changed in accordance with the specified coordinate position.

Note that any type of detection means may be used as long as it is capable of detecting the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, but considering that the production area is an area that is visible to the player. Therefore, it is preferable to use a type that can detect the presence or absence of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in a non-contact manner, such as a distance measuring sensor.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, there is a risk that static electricity may be charged in rotors such as the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B due to friction during rotation. In view of this, the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B may be configured with an earth structure that allows static electricity to escape.

For example, the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be provided with conductive parts having electrical conductivity, and a specified conductive member having electrical conductivity may be provided outside the performance area (specified area) such as the center frame 47, and when the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in a standby state, the conductive parts of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may come into contact with the conductive member such as the center frame 47. By electrically connecting the conductive member such as the center frame 47 to a specified earth terminal (not shown), static electricity charged to the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B can be removed.

Here, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are relatively simply configured, may have a configuration in which at least a portion or the entirety thereof is formed of a conductive metal material. Instead of or in addition to this, the surfaces of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be plated or the like.

In addition, a long conductive member made of a conductive material may be arranged along part of the path along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move from a predetermined waiting position to the performance area (predetermined area).

Further, among the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B, at least the conductive portion that contacts the conductive member may be configured to be curved into a spherical shape so as to be convex to the outside. In other words, a configuration including a conductive portion having a hemispherical convex shape may be used.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional Issue VA. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, making the performance of the rotating means monotonous. There was a desire for further improvement in interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VA1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is configured to be rotatable around an axial direction in the front-rear direction (the line of sight of the player) in a predetermined area and to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a light transmitting portion that can transmit light;
A light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
A second rotating means is configured to be movable in the predetermined area and to rotate in a predetermined manner relative to the first rotating means,
A relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
In the first positional relationship,
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

In addition, examples of the above-mentioned "predetermined trigger" include "the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means provided within the gaming area" (the same applies to the various means described below). .

In addition, granting "game value" includes, for example, paying out game media such as prize balls, and granting a special game state (such as a winning state or game mode) that is advantageous to the player (the same applies to the various means described below).

In addition, the configuration in which the second rotation means is "rotatable in a predetermined manner" includes, for example, a configuration in which the second rotation means is rotatable around the front-to-rear direction as an axial direction, similar to the first rotation means (this also applies to the various means described below). Of course, the second rotation means may be configured to be rotatable in a different manner (this also applies to the various means described below). For example, the second rotation means may be configured to be rotatable around the left-to-right direction as an axial direction.

In addition, a configuration in which "the second rotating means is movable relative to the first rotating means" means a configuration in which, for example, when viewed from the front of a specified area in the front-to-back direction (when viewed from the front of the game board), the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the second rotating means is movable in the up-down direction, left-to-right direction, etc., with the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the first rotating means as a reference (the same applies to the various means described below). Therefore, it does not include a configuration in which the positional relationship between the center positions of the first rotating means and the second rotating means does not change when viewed from the front of a specified area, in other words, a configuration in which the centers of the two rotating means are arranged so that they are aligned on the same axis in the front-to-back direction, the positional relationship in the front view is fixed, and the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means changes only in the circumferential direction.

According to the means VA1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

In particular, with this means, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

One type of presentation device that uses a rotating means to create a game presentation is a versawriter, which is equipped with multiple light-emitting means and displays letters, figures, and the like as afterimages by flashing the light-emitting means in a predetermined pattern while rotating the rotating means.

However, in a configuration such as a versatile lighter in which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means, the rotating means becomes large and heavy, and the operability of the rotating means may deteriorate.

Furthermore, when multiple light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means that is driven to rotate, the signal lines and power lines connecting the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means to a control device installed outside the rotating means must usually be electrically connected via slip rings or the like, which can complicate the wiring and control.

As a result, in such devices, the operability of the rotation means is low, and the performance of the rotation means' movements tends to be monotonous.

In contrast, with this method, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed by changing the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means, so that it is possible to prevent the rotating means from becoming larger and heavier without mounting a light emitting means on the rotating means, and to improve the operability of each rotating means.

In addition, if one rotating means is used and the diameter of the rotating means is increased in order to increase the switching speed of the visual recognition mode of light (the speed of the outer circumference of the rotating means), the rotation There is a risk that the load on the means, motor, etc. will increase.

In contrast, according to the present invention, by overlapping two rotating means, it is possible to increase the speed at which the light visibility state can be switched without increasing the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the rotating means, motor, etc.

Means VA2. than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a second positional relationship (close state),
The gaming machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs at a higher rate.

By using the above-mentioned means VA2, it is possible to produce a game presentation in which the probability of achieving a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the difference in the positional relationship (proximity state) between the two rotation means.

As a result, the player will watch the operation of the second rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VA3. A first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state advantageous to a player more advantageous than the first advantageous state are configured to be generated;
than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close proximity state),
A gaming machine described in means VA1, characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of the second advantageous state being reached is higher than the probability of the first advantageous state being reached.

According to the means VA3, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Means VA4. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, compared with when the condition is not satisfied,
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA3, characterized in that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured to increase the proportion (frequency) of being in the second positional relationship (close proximity state).

According to the above-mentioned means VA4, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process), the first rotation means and the second rotation means are more likely to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a winning result is not obtained by the predetermined lottery process).

In other words, the ratio at which the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship changes depending on the game situation. As a result, the game becomes more interesting and the player's interest is enhanced.

Means VA5. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other;
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA4, characterized in that the multiple second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be individually close to each other).

According to the means VA5, a plurality of second rotation means that are movable relative to each other are provided, and these are configured to be able to act on the first rotation means individually, thereby further diversifying game performances. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Here, for example, a specific second rotation means among the multiple second rotation means may be configured to be able to act on the other second rotation means. This allows for further diversification of game presentations.

Means VA6. The first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light transmitting portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means at equal intervals (for example, at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis),
A light emission control means capable of controlling the light emission means,
A gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA5, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emission means.

According to the above-mentioned means VA6, by adjusting (changing) the rotation period of the first rotating means and the blinking period of the light emitting means, it is possible to perform a rotating means presentation that utilizes a stroboscopic phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) or the like, and it is possible to change the apparent operating mode of the rotating means (translucent portion). As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and increase the interest of the player.

Here, "blinking control" refers to control in which the light emitting means periodically repeats a lighting state and a non-lighting state.

For example, if blinking control is executed such that the blinking period of the light-emitting means is shorter than the light-transmitting section movement period (the period during which the light-transmitting sections move one formation pitch interval) during which the N light-transmitting sections move the distance of the specified interval, the light-transmitting section that is viewed by the player when the light-emitting means lights up at a specified timing will be viewed at a position closer to the player that has not yet reached the distance of one formation pitch interval when the light-emitting means next lights up.

With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating means (light-transmitting portion) appears to be rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating means, which is rotating in the forward direction, suddenly reverses itself.

Note that there is a mechanical limit to controlling the rotational drive of the rotating means using a motor or the like. Therefore, depending on the mode of operation, the operation may appear slow, which may reduce the player's interest.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control to suddenly reverse the rotation direction of a rotating means (motor) that is rotating in the forward direction to the opposite direction without providing a deceleration period due to the influence of inertia and the like. In addition, if the direction of rotation of the rotating means (motor) is suddenly reversed, there is a risk that the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. will become significantly large. As a result, there is a risk that durability may be reduced due to looseness in the assembled state of the rotating means and the motor.

In contrast, with the above configuration, it is possible to produce an effect in which, for example, a rotating means rotating in the forward direction suddenly reverses direction without increasing the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and increase the interest of the player.

Means VA7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA6, characterized in that a diameter of the second rotating means when viewed from the front of the predetermined area is smaller than at least a diameter of the first rotating means.

If the diameter of the second rotating means that moves in a predetermined area is relatively large, the load on the drive mechanism etc. will increase due to the influence of inertia, etc., and there is a risk that it will be difficult to control the movement of the second rotating means. be.

In this regard, the above-mentioned means VA7 can improve braking performance and suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means VA8. The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ) The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VA8, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VA9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

According to the means VA9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC2, it may be configured such that "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similarly to means VC4, it may be possible to include "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more." Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA9, similar to the means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VA10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VA1 to VA9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

According to the means VA10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA10, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VA11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

Measure VA11 provides the same effect as measure VE1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)". ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VA12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA11, characterized in that:

Measure VA12 provides the same effect as measure VF1.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA12, as with means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA12, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA12, as in the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VA13. The game board is made of a translucent material, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

According to the means VA13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional assignment VB. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A). For example, some create dramatic effects by turning on or blinking the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means while the rotating means is rotating.

Alternatively, for example, the rotating means and the light emitting means may be provided separately, and the rotating means may be rotated in front of the light emitting means to produce various game effects.

However, under this configuration, if at least a part of the rotating means is made of a light-blocking material that does not transmit light, the design surface on the front side of that part may appear dark to the player's eyes, making it difficult to see the design surface.

As a result, there is a risk that the design of the rotating means may be degraded, and the player's interest may be diminished.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VB1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
A second player that is configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and to be able to change its state between at least a predetermined rotational state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a transparent portion that can transmit light. Equipped with one rotation means,
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate the game machine.

According to the above-mentioned means VB1, the two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes can overlap and separate, making it possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation.

Furthermore, according to the present means, in the second positional relationship (close state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means overlap, the second rotation means overlaps with the transparent portion of the first rotation means. Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) is irradiated from the front through the transparent portion of the first rotation means onto at least a portion of the reflection portion of the second rotation means.

As a result, even if at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a light-blocking material that does not transmit light, the front design surface of that portion will appear dark to the player's eyes, making it difficult to see the design surface, and other problems will be less likely to occur.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in design and ultimately increase the interest of players.

Means VB2. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
The gaming machine described in means VB1 is characterized in that it is configured so that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means.

According to the means VB2, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as ``what is being done''. Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB2, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, as in the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB2, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined region viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VB3. The gaming machine according to means VB1 or VB2, wherein the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member through which light can pass.

When a light-transmitting member is disposed between the light-emitting means and the first rotating means, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting means decreases as the light passes through the light-transmitting member.

For example, in a configuration in which a translucent member such as a cover member is arranged on the front side of an LED or other light-emitting means, such as an illumination device, the brightness of the light emitted from the LED or other light source decreases as the light passes through the cover member or other member.

Similarly, in a structure such as a liquid crystal display device, in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members is disposed on the front side of a backlight as a light emitting means, the light emitted from the backlight is The brightness decreases as the light passes through various translucent members.

Therefore, under the configuration related to this means VB3, the effects of the above means VB1 etc. will be more effective.

Means VB4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB3, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is made of a metal material.

The above-mentioned means VB4 can increase the rigidity of the second rotating means, and can improve its durability and wear resistance. Furthermore, the reflecting portion can be formed simply by polishing a specific portion of the second rotating means, simplifying the manufacturing process. In addition, the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be configured to have been subjected to rust prevention treatment, etc.

Means VB5. A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB4, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is polished.

According to the above-mentioned means VB5, by performing polishing (mirror finish), a more glossy reflective portion can be formed. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB5, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.).

The above-mentioned means VB6 can increase the reflectance of light at the reflective portion, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means VB1, etc.

Means VB7. A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB6, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in an outwardly convex spherical shape).

The above-mentioned means VB7 can reflect not only light irradiated from the front side of the gaming machine (outside the gaming machine), but also light irradiated from multiple directions, such as the sides of the gaming board, to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the effect of the above-mentioned means VB1 etc. can be further improved.

Means VB8. A gaming machine as described in any one of means VB1 to VB7, characterized in that at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) is provided with an information display section on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is displayed.

According to the means VB8, the predetermined information written in the information writing section of the reflective section can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent section of the first rotating means.

This allows for further diversification of game presentations using two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means), further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means VB1.

Means VB9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB8, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

Measure VB9 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, it may be provided that, similarly to the means VC4, "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more" is provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB9, similar to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning outside the predetermined area (standby position). It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VB10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VB10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB10, similar to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VB11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (close state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VB1 to VB10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VB12. One of the first and second rotating means has at least one acted portion that is acted on by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VB1 to VB11, characterized in that when the other rotating means acts on the acted upon portion of one of the rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Means VB12 provides the same effect as means VF1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB12, similar to means VF3, "the one rotation means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotation means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similarly to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similar to means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VF6.

Means VB13. The game board is made of a light-transmitting member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VB1 to VB12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

According to the means VB13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB13, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional issue VC. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the rotating means performs a rotating operation in a preset operation when, for example, a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and the player's interest in the operation of the rotating means tends to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VC1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by a player.

According to the above-mentioned means VC1, it is possible to perform a more dynamic game presentation by performing the operation of overlapping and separating two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes.

Further, according to the present means, the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to change depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player. Furthermore, the relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means can be changed. As a result, the player becomes more aware that he or she is actively participating in the game, and can improve his or her interest in the game.

Here, the "operation mode of the operation means" includes, for example, the number of operations and the amount of operation displacement. For example, it includes the number of times a button-type operation means is pressed, and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operation means such as a jog dial or slide lever.

Means VC2. The gaming machine described in means VC1, characterized in that the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation means being operated by a player.

The above-mentioned means VC2 allows the player to decide the timing for starting the operation of the second rotation means, which had been in a standby state until then. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, further increasing the player's interest.

Means VC3. means VC1 or A gaming machine described in VC2.

According to the means VC3, the player can change the amount of movement of the second rotating means based on the amount of operational displacement of the operating means. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby further increasing interest in the game.

Means VC4. A gaming machine described in any one of means VC1 to VC3, characterized in that it is provided with a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more.

Under the configuration related to the above means VC1, etc., if the player were able to change the amount of movement of the second rotation means as desired, there is a risk that some players will attempt to move the second rotation means more than the amount of movement intended by the developer. If an attempt is made to move the second rotation means more than the predetermined amount, there is a risk that the second rotation means will collide with a specified part, causing damage to the second rotation means or the specified part.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means VC4 is provided with the movement restriction means, which can reduce the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means VC5. A gaming machine described in any one of means VC1 to VC4, characterized in that it is provided with a guide means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area.

Under the configuration related to the above-mentioned means VC1 etc., if a configuration is adopted in which the movement amount of the second rotation means can be changed as desired by the player, the movement distance of the second rotation means can be changed to a predetermined area that becomes the production area of the first rotation means. There is a risk that the second rotating means will not be guided appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the means VC5, the occurrence of the above-described problems can be reduced by providing the guide means.

Means VC6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VC3 to VC5, characterized in that it is provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the specified area from returning outside the specified area (to a standby position).

Under the configuration of the above means VC1 etc., if the second rotation means is configured to be able to operate as the player desires, the second rotation means once guided to the predetermined area will be rotated again. There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the rotating means returns to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) and the rotating means performance is not performed appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the means VC6, by providing the return regulating means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be reduced.

Means VC7. The operation means includes at least a first operation part that can change the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation part that can select whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation. A gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

By using the above-mentioned means VC7, the player is able to make many of the decisions on his/her own, which further strengthens the player's sense of being an active participant in the game and further increases the player's interest.

Means VC8. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
the first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC7, characterized in that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means is blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means.

According to the means VC8, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first positional relationship (close state), The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as ``what is being done''. Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, as in the means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC8, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC8, similarly to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration of means VC8, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting portions arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC8, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VC9. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC8, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VC9, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process" similarly to the means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, similar to means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may have an information-inscribed portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VC10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VC1 to VC9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

Measure VC10 provides the same effect as measure VD1.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VC11. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

According to the means VC11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, as in the means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC11, similarly to means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VC12. One of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that is acted on by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC11, characterized in that when the other rotating means acts on the acted upon part of one of the rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

According to the means VC12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC12, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similar to the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode." It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC12, similarly to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" is also provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VC13. The game board is made of a translucent material, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

According to the means VC13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional Issue VD. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means performs a predetermined rotating operation, and the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up or flashes. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

In view of this, it is conceivable to create an effect in which multiple movable bodies including rotating means are linked together, but in such a configuration, the multiple movable bodies may , there is a possibility that a situation may arise in which it is not possible to link or stop the production mode that the player wants to see. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VD1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable in a predetermined area with a front-rear direction (a line of sight of a player) as an axial direction and is configured to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means is configured to be movable in the predetermined area and to rotate in a predetermined manner relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (front view of a game board) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
In the predetermined region,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means VD1, the two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes can overlap and separate, making it possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation.

However, in a configuration in which the second rotating means moves within a specified area, there is a risk that the second rotating means may become misaligned due to assembly errors, deterioration over time, etc. If such a misalignment occurs, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means will not be appropriate, and there is a risk that the performance effect described above will not be properly achieved.

Note that conventionally, in order to grasp the position of the movable body, a detection means for detecting the movable body at a standby position (reference position) is often provided. However, with this configuration alone, it is not possible to grasp the position of the movable body in the performance area (predetermined area) where the performance is actually performed, so there is a risk that the problems described in the above problem may occur.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means VD1 is configured to include a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means that has passed a predetermined position in a predetermined area that is the performance area, and is capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

This makes it difficult for a time lag to occur between the operating mode of the rotating means and the start timing of the predetermined effect when performing the effect in the predetermined area, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing interest.

Means VD2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The gaming machine according to means VC1, characterized in that the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VD2, it is possible to perform an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means at an appropriate timing.

Means VD3. A predetermined display means is provided as the light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to means VD2, characterized in that the display mode of the display means can be changed as the light emission mode of the light emission means.

By using the above-mentioned means VD3, it is possible to execute a performance that produces a visual effect, such as changing the display mode of the display means, at an appropriate timing.

Means VD4. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VD2 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. or the gaming machine described in any one of VD3.

According to the above-mentioned means VD4, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as ``what is being done''. Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, as in means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD4, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, similarly to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting sections arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VD5. The detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area,
The game machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform different effects depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotating means.

According to the above-mentioned means VD5, it is possible to diversify the game performance and further improve the interest.

Means VD6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VD1 to VD5, characterized in that the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable and individually pass through the predetermined position in the predetermined area.

According to the means VD6, it is possible to diversify the game performance and further improve the interest.

Means VD7. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VD1 to VD6, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

According to the means VD7, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VD8. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VD1 to VD7, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VD8 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD8, like the means VC6, "a return regulating means capable of regulating the return of the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area to outside the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD8, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VD9. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD8, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VD9, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD9, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD9, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)". ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VD10. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD9, characterized in that:

According to the means VD10, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration of means VD10, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD10, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD10, similar to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD10, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the structure related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VD11. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD10, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

Measure VD11 provides the same effect as measure VG1.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD11, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG4, it may be provided that "a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotation means is provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, "the direction of the axis of rotation of the second rotating means may be configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional Issue VE. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, there is a risk that the rotating means may become charged with static electricity due to friction during rotation. If the rotating means is configured to be movable, and the rotating means comes into contact with or close to other electrical equipment (including other rotating means), static electricity may flow to the electrical equipment, which may have a significant impact on the gaming machine as well as the electrical equipment itself.

For example, there are concerns about disturbances in the screen of the display device, noise mixing into control signals, etc., and in severe cases, various problems such as damage to electrical equipment or malfunction of electrical equipment may occur. There is.

As a result, the game presentation may not be performed properly, which may reduce the player's interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VE1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable in a predetermined area with a front-rear direction (a line of sight of a player) as an axial direction and is configured to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means is configured to be movable in the predetermined area and to rotate in a predetermined manner relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (front view of a game board) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity.

According to the means VE1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means, the second rotating means has a conductive portion in at least a portion thereof, and is configured to include a conductive member (earth member) that can come into contact with the conductive portion of the second rotating means.

Thereby, the static electricity charged in the second rotating means can be released through the conductive member, and the occurrence of the various problems described above due to static electricity can be suppressed.

Furthermore, malfunctions of various performance devices such as movable accessories and display devices can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest for players can be suppressed.

Means VE2. The gaming machine according to means VE1, characterized in that the conductive member is provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region).

If the conductive material were placed within a specific area that would be the performance area, it would be visible to the player, which could reduce the design quality.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means VE2 can prevent such problems from occurring.

Means VE3. The gaming machine described in means VE1 or VE2, characterized in that the conductive member is disposed along a portion of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area.

The above-mentioned means VE3 allows static electricity charged to the second rotating means to escape during the movement in the previous stage where it may come into contact with the first rotating means, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means VE1, etc.

Means VE4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE3, wherein the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of a path along which the second rotating means moves.

According to the above means VE4, the second rotating means can easily come into contact with the conductive member, and static electricity can be more reliably released.

Means VE5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE4, wherein at least the conductive part (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside).

By using the above-mentioned means VE5, the contact area between the conductive part of the second rotating means and a specific conductive member can be reduced, and frictional resistance during movement of the second rotating means can be reduced. As a result, the second rotating means can be moved smoothly, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented.

Means VE6. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
the first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in any of means VE1 to VE5, characterized in that at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means is configured to be able to block at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means.

According to the above-mentioned means VE6, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, it is possible to change the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control such as turning on or blinking the light emitting means.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, as in the means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VE7. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VE1 to VE6, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VE7 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VE8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE7, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VE8, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC2, it may be possible that "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning to outside the predetermined area (standby position)." It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE8, similarly to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VE9. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE8, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

Measure VE9 provides the same effect as measure VD1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE9, similar to means VD2, "a light-emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to means VD3, "the light-emitting means may be provided with a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changeable as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VD3.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE9, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE9, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VE10. One of the first and second rotating means has at least one acted upon portion that is acted upon by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VE1 to VE9, characterized in that when the other rotation means acts on the acted upon portion of one of the rotation means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Means VE10 provides the same effects as means VF1.

Here, under the configuration of means VE10, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE10, similarly to means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE10, similar to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE10, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the structure related to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and can cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means" can also be used. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VE11. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VE1 to VE10, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VE11, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE11, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG4, it may be provided that "a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotation means is provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE11, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE11, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional assignment VF. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and blinks in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, so the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

In response to this, it is conceivable to provide multiple rotation means, but if these simply rotate independently without affecting each other, the presentation of the rotation means can easily become monotonous, and there is a need to further increase interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VF1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine characterized by the following configuration.

According to the means VF1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby creating a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means VF1, when the other rotating means (for example, the first rotating means) acts in a predetermined manner on the acted part of one rotating means (for example, the second rotating means), the The one rotating means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to a predetermined mode.

In other words, one rotating means operates in a different manner due to a difference in the manner in which the other rotating means acts on the acted part of one rotating means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the operating modes of the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means VF2. The one rotating means is
When the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first manner, the other rotating means operates in a first operating manner corresponding to the first manner,
The gaming machine described in means VF1 is characterized in that when the other rotation means acts on the acted upon portion in a second manner, it is configured to operate in a second operating manner corresponding to the second manner.

According to the means VF2, the effect of the means VF1 can be further enhanced.

Means VF3. When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode, the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode,
A gaming machine described in means VF2, characterized in that it is configured to increase the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs.

By using the above-mentioned means VF3, it is possible to produce a game presentation in which the rate of a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the operating mode of the rotation means. As a result, the player will be able to pay close attention to the operation of the rotation means with a sense of expectation, which can increase the player's interest.

Means VF4. A first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state advantageous to a player more advantageous than the first advantageous state are configured to be generated;
When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode, the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode.
A gaming machine described in means VF2, characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of the second advantageous state being reached is higher than the probability of the first advantageous state being reached.

According to the means VF4, the same effects as those of the means VF3 are achieved.

Means VF5. The game machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF4, characterized in that the other rotating means is configured to be able to come into contact with an actuated portion of the one rotating means.

If the actuated part is configured as a translucent part that can transmit light, and a gap is created between the actuated part of the other rotating means and one rotating means, the light will pass through the gap. The leaked light may cause problems such as making it difficult to see the affected part or reducing the brightness of the affected part itself.

In response to this, the above-mentioned method VF5 can prevent such problems from occurring.

Means VF6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VF1 to VF5, characterized in that it is provided with a predetermined movable member that can contact the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means.

According to the means VF6, the operating mode of the second rotating means changes when the movable body comes into contact with the second rotating means. As a result, the operating modes of the rotating means etc. are diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest for the players.

For example, the second rotating means may be configured to start operating when a specific movable member (e.g., a hammer-type device) acts on the second rotating means, which is in a stopped state.

Means VF7. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
the first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in any of means VF1 to VF6, characterized in that at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means is configured to be able to block at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the means VF7, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player being achieved is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF7, as in means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similar to means VA5, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are able to approach each other individually)" may be configured. This provides the same effect as means VA5.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts," light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VF8. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VF1 to VF7, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VF8 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, similarly to the means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, similar to means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be provided with an information-inscribed portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VF9. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VF1 to VF8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VF9 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, it is also possible to "equip a movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more", similarly to the means VC4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning to outside the predetermined area (standby position)." It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VF10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

Means VF10 provides the same effects as means VD1.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VF11. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VF1 to VF10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

Means VF11 provides the same effect as means VE1.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF11, similarly to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF11, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VE5.

Means VF12. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF11, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VF12, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to ``equip a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position.'' . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable", similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional Issue VG. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means only performs a predetermined rotational operation, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up or flashes. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

In light of this, it is conceivable to create a performance using multiple rotation means that can be displaced relative to one another; however, in such a configuration, the positioning and operation of one rotation means may limit the operation of the other rotation means, making it difficult to create a dynamic performance.

As a result, the effects using rotational devices tended to become monotonous, and there was a need to further improve the entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VG1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable in a predetermined area with a front-rear direction (a line of sight of a player) as an axial direction and is configured to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means is configured to be movable in the predetermined area and to rotate in a predetermined manner relative to the first rotating means,
A relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
The game board is made of a light-transmitting member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
The second rotation means is configured to be movable from a front region to a rear region of the game board and to be movable within the rear region of the game board.

With the above-mentioned means VG1, it is possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation by having two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes, overlapping and separating.

Note that if the first and second rotation means were placed together in the front (or rear) area of the game board, there is a risk that the operation of both rotation means would be restricted, such as the two rotation means not being able to pass each other due to the space between the front and rear.

In this regard, according to the present method VG1, the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the game board, and also movable in the rear region of the game board, so that the second rotation means can be freely operated in the rear position of the game board without being restricted by the first rotation means arranged in the front region of the game board.

In addition, the player can visually observe the operation of this second rotation means through the game board, which is made of a translucent material.

As a result, it becomes possible to create more dynamic and diverse gameplay effects, further increasing the excitement for players.

Means VG2. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be relatively movable with each other;
The gaming machine described in means VG1, characterized in that the multiple second rotation means are individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the gaming board and are configured to be movable within the rear area of the gaming board.

According to the means VG2, a plurality of second rotation means that are movable relative to each other are provided, and these are configured to be movable individually to the rear area of the game board, thereby further diversifying game effects. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Means VG3. The game machine according to means VG1 or VG2, characterized in that a plurality of paths are provided through which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board.

According to the above means VG3, the operation mode of the second rotating means is diversified, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

Means VG4. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG3, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a path changing device capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating device in the front area of the game board.

By using the above-mentioned means VG4, the operating mode of the second rotation means can be further diversified, further increasing the interest.

Means VG5. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG4, further comprising a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotation means that has moved to a rear region of the game board to a predetermined position.

Since many devices, such as display devices and presentation devices, are arranged in the rear area of the game board, there is limited space for moving the movable body compared to the front area of the game board, and it is therefore necessary to move the second rotation means more accurately.

In contrast, the above-mentioned means VG5 is provided with the rear guide means, so that the second rotation means can be accurately guided to a predetermined position.

Means VG6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG5, characterized in that the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable.

If the direction of the rotation axis is fixed and the direction of rotation is simply changed, the game performance may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the means VG6, since the rotation axis direction is configured to be changeable, it is possible to perform more diverse performances, and further improve interest.

Means VG7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VG1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in any one of VG6 to VG6.

According to the above-mentioned means VG7, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, it is possible to change the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control such as turning on or blinking the light emitting means.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player being achieved is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, as in means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting portions arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VG8. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

Measure VG8 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process" similarly to means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, similar to means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may have an information inscription portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VG9. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VG9 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG9, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VG10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

According to the means VG10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG10, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VG11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VG1 to VG10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

Means VG11 provides the same effects as means VE1.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, similarly to the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VG12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG11, characterized in that:

Means VG12 provides the same effects as means VF1.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG12, as in means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of the means VB1 to VB13. The configuration of a part or all of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, the structure of a part or all of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, the above means VE1 to VE11 Any part or all of any of the above means VF1 to means VF12, and any part or all of any of the above means VG1 to means VG12. or at least one configuration may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VE1 to VE11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. A more detailed example of the form is "a pinball gaming machine that includes an operating means (launch handle, etc.) operated by a player, a launching means (launching device, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a gaming area (game board, etc.) to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and a predetermined ball entry means (general entry port, variable entry device, start-up entry port, etc.) into which any of a plurality of gaming balls guided to the gaming area can enter, and is configured so that the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can be visually observed."

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the pinball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to a third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those of the first and second embodiments described above (same components, same processing contents, etc.) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment) includes a first counting function section as the first counting means of the present invention, and a second counting function section as the second counting means of the present invention. , a subtraction function section as a subtraction means of the present invention, an information setting function section as an information setting means of the present invention, a performance execution function section as a performance execution means of the present invention, an update function section as an update means of the present invention, It has a continuation function section as a continuation means of the invention, and a specific correspondence display execution function section as a specific correspondence display execution means of the present invention.

The "predetermined gaming state" may be any gaming state in which the second gaming operation can be performed, and may be, for example, a normal state, a small win state advantageous to the player, or a predetermined state in between. A normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed after the end of the right to hold a predetermined lottery with an upper limit of the number, a jackpot state advantageous to the player, or a predetermined lottery with a predetermined upper limit of a predetermined number held during that period. A normal state for a predetermined period of time that can be executed after the end of the normal state based on the right, and a time shortened state with ball entry support in which the variable display time is shorter than the normal state and the game ball can enter or easily enters the predetermined ball entry means. Or, the normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined lottery based on the right to hold a predetermined lottery with a predetermined number as an upper limit, the variable display time is shorter than the normal state, and the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. A normal state for a predetermined period of time that can be carried out based on the right to hold a predetermined lottery with a predetermined upper limit during the shortened time without ball entry support where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball, and the lottery probability is Any state of high probability that is higher than the normal state, or a normal state of a predetermined period of time or a shortened time state that may be executed after its termination based on the right to hold a predetermined number of draws reserved up to a predetermined number during that period. Good too.

The "first counting means" may be any device that can count based on the numerical value set corresponding to the second game operation, and if it can realize the gist of the present invention, it may be, for example, an electrical storage device. It may be anything, such as a RAM as an area, a counter set in a buffer, an area consisting of a plurality of addresses, a pointer, a mechanical counting device, etc.

Of course, the "subtraction means" may be of any type as long as it can subtract the numerical information set therein, and as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention.

The "subtraction condition" may be any condition that causes the numerical value set in the first counting means to be subtracted based on the condition being satisfied, and may be any condition that allows the gist of the present invention to be realized, such as the second game operation stopping, the second game operation being confirmed as stopped, or a predetermined period of time having passed since the second game operation stopped, etc.

The "specific condition" may be anything that generates a corresponding specific game state based on the fulfillment of that condition, and may be anything that can realize the gist of the present invention. The condition may be anything, such as a game ball entering a specific winning area, a lottery being held based on that ball entering with a specific probability and resulting in a specific result, a right to hold that lottery being reserved up to a specific number and a specific result being obtained with the reserved right, a player performing a specific operation on a specific operating means, a lottery being held based on that operation with a specific probability and resulting in a specific result, multiple game balls entering a specific ball entry area, a specific game action being performed, a specific period of time passing, a specific presentation being performed a specific number of times, a specific count value reaching an upper limit, etc.

The "second counting means" may be any device that can count based on a set numerical value, and may be set in a RAM, a buffer, etc. as an electrical storage area, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. It may be any type of counter, an area consisting of multiple addresses, a pointer, a mechanical counting device, etc. In addition, the numerical information stored therein includes numerical information corresponding to the number of times of multiple games, numerical information corresponding to the number of executions of the winning variation, numerical information corresponding to the number of executions of the reach variation, and numerical information corresponding to the number of executions of the multiple play conditions. Numerical information corresponding to the establishment of , Numerical information corresponding to time information of a predetermined period, Numerical information corresponding to a predetermined number of game balls used in the game, Numerical information corresponding to the number of game balls that entered a predetermined ball entry means It may be any kind of information, such as numerical information, numerical information corresponding to the number of operations of a predetermined operating means, numerical information corresponding to the number of game balls paid out, etc.

Of course, the "information setting means" and the "updating means" may be any means as long as they can set or update these numerical information, and can realize the gist of the present invention. Further, the "specific correspondence display execution means" may be any device that can execute a specific correspondence display corresponding to these numerical information, such as animation display, character display, icon It may be of any type, such as a display or a still image display.

The "update condition" may be any condition that updates the numerical value set in the second counting means based on the fulfillment of that condition, and may be anything, such as the game operation stopping, the stop of the game operation being confirmed, a predetermined period of time having passed since the game operation stopped, the game operation ending, the game operation starting, the start condition of the game operation being fulfilled, a predetermined time having passed, a predetermined number of game balls being fired or paid out, a predetermined number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entry means, or a predetermined operation means being operated a predetermined number of times, so long as the gist of the present invention can be realized.

As shown in Figure 117, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of this outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed. However, for the sake of convenience, Figure 117 omits the game components (nails, gimmicks, etc.) that are arranged on the game board 30 surface, and the glass unit 137 that is attached to the front frame 14, etc.

As shown in FIG. 120 etc., the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 115). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

An extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 120) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 119). In addition, as shown in FIG. 117, a pair of upper and lower receivers 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

A resin valance panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. An upwardly protruding rib 88 is integrally formed on the innermost part of the top surface of the valance panel 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to form between the valance panel 87 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 117, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as its axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the front frame 14 may be directly supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable, not via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 when closed. A roughly elliptical window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. Details of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 115, etc., a lower tray 15 is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame 14 as a ball receiving tray, and game balls discharged from the lower payout outlet 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower tray 15 is provided at the front side of the lower tray 15.

To the right of the lower tray 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18 is provided as an operating means that protrudes forward. The handle 18 is provided with a rotation operation part 18a that can be rotated by the player, a touch sensor (not shown) that can detect when the handle 18 is touched by a human hand, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of operation of the rotation operation part 18a. With this configuration, when the rotation operation part 18a is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by the launching device 60, which will be described later, with a strength according to the amount of rotation operation.

Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed and operated with the thumb of the right hand that grips the rotation operation portion 18a. When the stop lever 18b is pressed, the firing device 60 is prohibited from firing game balls even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to perform a rotational operation of the rotary operation section 18a while prohibiting the shooting of game balls, or to temporarily stop shooting the game balls while holding the handle 18.

As shown in FIG. 116, an upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15 in which game balls can be stored. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores the game balls paid out from the upper payout port 17 and guides them toward the firing device 60 while arranging them in a line. The game balls that are paid out when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication path 71 and a lower payout outlet 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display section 124 are provided on the upper surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. Usually, in a game hall or the like, a CR unit (not shown) is placed on the left side of the pachinko machine 10. When the lending switch 121 is operated with a game card with a balance inserted into the CR unit, lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the CR unit. Further, the balance display section 124 displays the balance of the card inserted in the CR unit.

Furthermore, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the top surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be able to pop out and retract, and is always biased upward by a biasing means (not shown). With this configuration, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 opens, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. In other words, by operating the ball removal button 123, the player can transfer the game balls in the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time.

In addition, a performance button 125 and a cross button 126 are provided on the top surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. By operating the performance button 125 and the cross button 126, a specific performance is performed or the display content is changed on the performance display device 42 described below.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided on the front of the front frame 14. The light-emitting means change and control the light emission mode in response to changes in the game state, etc., and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play. For example, an illumination section 102 incorporating an illumination means such as an LED is provided on the periphery of the window section 101. In addition, error display lamps 104 that light up in the event of a specified error are provided on both sides of the illumination section 102. Furthermore, a number of fine through holes are formed in the upper part of the illumination section 102, which correspond to the speaker SP (see Figure 117) provided on the rear of the front frame 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39, are a launching device 60 as a launching means, and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched by the launching device 60. In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60. Furthermore, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided that guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launching device 60.

Next, the structure of the game board 30 (play area) will be described with reference to FIG. 118. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the play area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137. The rail 50 consists of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 118). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 118) of the outer rail component 52. As a result, the game ball fired with a force greater than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30, for example.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the game board 30. Therefore, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the play area.

In the game area, there are arranged a left general winning section 31A, a right general winning section 31B, a first variable winning device (big win variable winning device) 32A as a first special variable winning means, a second variable winning device (small win variable winning device) 32B as a second special variable winning means, a first start winning section 33WA as a first start winning means, a second start winning section 33WB as a second start winning means, a through gate 34 as a trigger winning means, a variable display unit 35, etc. These are explained in detail below.

A variable display device unit 35 is disposed approximately in the center of the gaming area, and a first starting winning section 33WA is disposed below the variable display unit 35.

The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a performance display device 42 as a performance display means for performing various display performances, and a center frame 47 is provided so as to surround the performance display device 42. The center frame 47 has a frame shape with an opening formed in the center, and the display section of the effect display device 42 is visible through the opening.

A stage section 770 on which the game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower edge of the center frame 47. A guide groove 774 that slopes gently downward toward the front is formed in the center of the stage section 770. As shown in FIG. 118, when the center frame 47 is placed on the game board 30, the guide groove 774 is located directly above the first start winning section 33WA.

A ball passage (warp flow path) 775 is formed inside the left side of the center frame 47, allowing game balls to pass through. The entrance of the ball passage 775 opens to the left side of the center of the left side of the center frame 47 (the side facing the game board 30). Meanwhile, the exit of the ball passage 775 opens to the right side of the lower end of the left side of the center frame 47 (the side facing the stage portion 770). This ball passage 775 allows game balls flowing down the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage portion 770 inside the center frame 47.

The game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 via the ball passage 775 etc. rolls on the stage portion 770 and then falls from the front edge of the stage portion 770 onto the surface of the game board 30, or is discharged onto the surface of the game board 30 via the guide groove 774. Of these, the game ball discharged via the guide groove 774 has a relatively high probability of entering the first start winning section 33WA.

The first start winning section 33WA is provided so as to protrude forward from the front part of the game board 30, and a winning hole (first start winning hole) through which game balls can always enter is opened on the upper side of the first start winning section 33WA. In addition, a first start winning switch 224a capable of detecting game balls that enter through the first start winning hole is provided at a position corresponding to the first start winning section 33WA.

With this configuration, when a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and is detected by the first start winning switch 224a, a first win/loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated, and a variable display is performed on the first special symbol display device 43A, which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the fact that a game ball enters the first starting winning part 33WA and the gaming ball is detected by the first starting winning switch 224a corresponds to "establishment of the first starting condition", and based on this, the first The variable display performed on the special symbol display device 43A corresponds to the "first game operation", and the functions of the main control device 261, which will be described later, which performs these controls constitute the "first execution means".

A first variable winning device 32A is disposed below the first start winning section 33WA. The first variable winning device 32A includes a large winning opening 32Aa through which game balls can enter, a large winning opening shutter 32Ab that opens and closes the large winning opening 32Aa, a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the large winning opening shutter 32Ab to open and close, and a large winning opening count switch 222 that can detect game balls that have entered the large winning opening 32Aa.

Under this configuration, the first variable winning device 32A is normally in a closed state in which the large winning opening shutter 32Ab closes the large winning opening 32Aa from above and below, and game balls flowing down the game area cannot enter the large winning opening 32Aa. Also, in this closed state, game balls can flow down in front of the large winning opening shutter 32Ab.

On the other hand, when a jackpot state occurs, the first variable winning device 32A tilts forward with the bottom edge of the large winning opening shutter 32Ab as a pivot axis, and the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the large winning opening 32Aa. In this embodiment, the "first opening/closing control means" is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that controls the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 32A when a jackpot state occurs.

In the left side area of the game area (lower left of the variable display unit 35), a plurality of left general winning parts 31A are arranged along the peripheral edge of the game area. The left general winning section 31A is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and has a winning opening (general winning opening) into which game balls can enter at any time open above it. Further, a left general winning switch 221a that can detect a game ball that enters from the general winning opening is provided at a position corresponding to the left general winning part 31A.

A through gate 34 is provided in the right side area of the game area (right side of the variable display unit 35) through which game balls flowing down the area can pass one ball at a time. The through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing therethrough. In this embodiment, the left side area of the game area constitutes the first area, and the right side area of the game area constitutes the second area.

Then, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225), the starting ball entry support lottery determines whether or not to open the second starting winning section 33WB. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the starting ball support lottery is performed on the normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. Here, if the player wins in the starting ball support lottery, the second starting winning part 33WB is kept open for a specified time after the variable display ends.

Further, in the right side area of the gaming area (to the right side of the variable display unit 35), a right general prize winning section 31B is provided in an area downstream of the through gate 34. The right general winning part 31B is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and has a winning opening (general winning opening) into which game balls can enter at any time opened above it. Further, a right general winning switch 221b that can detect a game ball that enters from the general winning opening is provided at a position corresponding to the right general winning part 31B.

Further, in the lower right area of the gaming area (lower right side of the variable display unit 35), a second start winning part 33WB is arranged downstream of the right general winning part 31B. The second starting winning part 33WB in this embodiment is a variable winning device that changes state between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.

In more detail, the second start winning section 33WB is equipped with a second start winning opening 33WBa through which a game ball can enter, a pair of left and right blade members 33WBb as opening and closing members provided on the left and right sides of the second start winning opening 33WBa, a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the pair of blade members 33WBb to open and close, and a second start winning switch 224b that can detect a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 33WBa.

The pair of blade members 33WBb are each rotatably supported, and are normally maintained in a closed position (closed state) close to each other. In addition, an entry prevention member 145 is provided at a position directly above the second starting winning part 33WB to prevent the game ball from entering between the pair of blade members 33WBb in the closed state. As a result, in normal times, the second starting winning part 33WB is in a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the second starting winning opening 33WBa.

On the other hand, as described below, when a predetermined opening condition is met, the pair of blade members 33WBb are rotated and displaced so that their tips move away from each other to an open position (open state). This creates a gap between the entry prevention member 145 and the tip of each blade member 33WBb through which the game ball can pass, and the second start winning section 33WB is in an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the second start winning port 33WBa.

Under such a configuration, when a game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB that is in the open state and the gaming ball is detected by the second starting winning switch 224b, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot state. A first win/fail lottery (big win lottery), a second win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small win state (small win lottery), etc. are performed, and a variable display is performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, which will be described later. be exposed. In other words, the second win/fail lottery (small win lottery) is performed only when a game ball enters the second starting winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, the fact that a game ball enters the second start winning part 33WB and the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 224b corresponds to "establishment of the second start condition", and based on this, the second The variable display performed on the special symbol display device 43B corresponds to the "second game round operation", and the "second execution means" is constituted by the functions of the main control device 261, which will be described later, which performs these controls.

The function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot state as the first special game state constitutes the "first special game state generating means," and the function of the main control device 261 that generates a small jackpot state as the second special game state constitutes the "second special game state generating means." Of these, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot in response to a game ball entering the specific ball entry section 320c described below constitutes the "specific ball entry section first special game state generating means."

For ease of explanation, hereafter, a jackpot triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB may be referred to as a "direct hit jackpot." The changing display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is also referred to as the "first changing display," and the changing display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is also referred to as the "second changing display." The changing time of the first changing display is also referred to as the "first changing time," and the changing time of the second changing display is also referred to as the "second changing time."

The second variable winning device 32B is located downstream of the second start winning section 33WB in the lower right area of the play area (lower right of the variable display unit 35).

The second variable winning device 32B is provided so that a part of it protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and on the upper surface of the projecting part, the ball enters the game ball into the internal area 320a. An opening 320b is formed. The front cover member (reference numeral omitted) of the second variable winning device 32B in this embodiment is made of a transparent member, and allows the player to visually recognize the internal area 320a.

The second variable winning device 32B also includes an opening/closing member 318 that opens and closes the ball entry opening 320b, and a solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 318. By controlling the drive of the solenoid to open and close the opening/closing member 318, the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inner area 320a, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area 320a.

In this embodiment, the second variable winning device 32B is normally maintained in a closed state, and is configured to be able to change to an open state when a small win state, which will be described later, occurs. In this embodiment, the "second opening/closing control means" is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that controls the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B when a small win state occurs.

The opening/closing member 318 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-back direction. The upper surface of the opening/closing member 318 is inclined downward from right to left, and when the opening/closing member 318 is in the closed position and the ball entry opening 320b is closed, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 318 is tilted downward from right to left. This is a guideway that guides the players to the left (toward the center of the game board 30).

Here, a deceleration means for decelerating the game balls rolling along the guideway (for example, a configuration in which multiple protrusions are formed alternately on the front and rear walls of the guideway) may be provided. This allows more game balls to enter the internal area 320a when a small win occurs.

When the opening/closing member 318 is in the closed position, the game ball rolls from right to left on the top surface (guideway) of the opening/closing member 318, falls from the left end onto the surface of the game board 32, and flows down toward the first variable winning device 32A.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 318 is retracted to the open position and the ball entry opening 320b is open, game balls flowing down the game area or rolling on the guideway can enter the internal area 320a.

The internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is equipped with a ball entry count switch 223a capable of detecting all game balls that enter the internal area 320a along a predetermined flow path, a specific ball entry section (V winning area) 320c into which game balls detected by the ball entry count switch 223a can enter, a specific ball entry detection switch (V winning switch) 223b that detects game balls that have entered the specific ball entry section 320c, an opening/closing valve 319 that can open and close the specific ball entry section 320c, a solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the opening/closing valve 319, a non-specific ball entry section 320d to which game balls that do not enter the specific ball entry section 320c are guided, and a non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c that detects game balls that have entered the non-specific ball entry section 320d.

The on-off valve 319 is rotatably supported on a shaft and is configured to be movable between a closed position that restricts the ball from entering the specific ball entry section 320c and an open position that allows the ball to enter the specific ball entry section 320c. ing.

With this configuration, when a game ball that has entered the internal area 320a flows down to the position of the specific ball entry section 320c, if the on-off valve 319 is in the open position and the specific ball entry section 320c is open, the game ball will fall into the specific ball entry section 320c.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the internal area 320a flows down to the position of the specific ball entry section 320c, if the on-off valve 319 is in the closed position and the specific ball entry section 320c is in the closed state, the game ball passes over the on-off valve 319 without falling into the specific ball entry section 320c, and is guided to the non-specific ball entry section 320d.

When a small win state occurs, if the game ball that entered the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B enters the specific ball entry section 320c, a big win state occurs in which the first variable winning device 32A is in an open state. Hereinafter, a big win that occurs as a result of a game ball entering the specific ball entry section (V winning area) 320c (V winning) may also be referred to as a "V winning big win."

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific ball entrance part 320c of the second variable winning device 32B is basically in an open state, and the small winning state where the ball entering opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened. , when one game ball enters the specific ball entry section 320c and the game ball is detected by the specific ball entry detection switch 223b, the on-off valve 319 is driven and controlled to the closed state, and from this point on The game ball guided onto the ball entry section 320c will be guided to the non-specific ball entry section 320d. The game ball that enters the non-specific ball entering section 320d is detected by the non-specific ball entering detection switch 223c provided in the non-specific ball entering section 320d.

The second variable winning device 32B, which is opened in the small hit state, closes the ball entry device using the opening/closing member 318 when the total number of balls detected by the specific ball entry detection switch 223b and the non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c reaches four. The opening 320b is closed, and the game ball is in a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball. The specific ball entry section 320c and the non-specific ball entry section 320d are configured to merge below, and the game balls that have flowed into the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B through the merged discharge passage. , and is discharged to the back side of the game board 30.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period when a small winning state occurs and the ball entry opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened, an average of about 4 game balls are inside the second variable winning device 32B. It is designed to be accessible. Then, when a game ball is allowed to enter the second variable winning device 32B, it is designed so that the game ball always (almost 100%) enters the specific ball entering section 320c. Therefore, unless the player does not shoot the game ball or the player does not hit the ball right-handed, if the player hits the right-hand ball, there is an almost 100% probability that the game ball will land in the specified ball entry section 320c and the player will hit the jackpot. This will occur.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) into various winning sections such as general winning sections 31A, 31B, variable winning devices 32A, 32B, starting winning sections 33WA, 33WB, etc., it is detected by various winning switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15).

In this embodiment, 10 balls enter the left general winning section 31A, 3 balls enter the right general winning section 31B, and 3 balls enter the first variable winning device 32A (big winning opening 32Aa). 15 pieces if the ball enters the second variable winning device 32B (specific ball entering section 320c or non-specific ball entering section 320d), 5 balls when the ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA It is configured so that three game balls (prize balls) are paid out when three balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33WB.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the gaming area, and game balls that do not win in various winning sections such as the general winning sections 31a and 31b are stored in this out port. 36 and is discharged to the outside of the game area (the back side of the game board 30). Further, the game board 30 is provided with various members such as a large number of nails and a windmill in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

Here, various game states in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set to "15 round jackpot", "8 round jackpot", and "4 round jackpot".

Hereinafter, the "15 round jackpot" will be referred to as the "15R jackpot", and will be simplified as "15RS" in the drawings. Similarly, the "8 round jackpot" is called the "8R jackpot" and is simply written as "8RS" in the drawings. Further, the "4 round jackpot" is referred to as the "4R jackpot", and is simply written as "4RS" in the drawings.

In the jackpot state of "15R jackpot", the jackpot release operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). In addition, the "jackpot opening operation" means, for example, after the big winning opening shutter 32Ab of the first variable winning device 32A is switched from the closed state to the open state, a prescribed time of 30 seconds has elapsed, or the first variable winning device It refers to one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in 32A (the same applies hereinafter).

In the "8R jackpot" state, the jackpot opening operation is repeated eight times (8 rounds), and in the "4R jackpot" state, the jackpot opening operation is repeated four times (4 rounds).

However, as will be described in detail later, regarding the "V winning jackpot" according to this embodiment, since the small winning state in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state corresponds to the first round, the above "jackpot opening operation" (Release of first variable winning device 32A)" will be reduced by one round each. In other words, when a "15R jackpot" occurs due to a "V winning jackpot", the above "jackpot release action" is set to "14 times", and when an "8R jackpot" occurs, the above "jacket release action" is set to "7". If a "4R jackpot" occurs, the "jackpot release operation" is set to "three times".

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot awarded in the winning lottery differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB. If the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot" or a "4R jackpot" (excluding during the time-saving B mode described below). If the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is won, the jackpot is assigned to either a "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", or "4R jackpot".

Next, the starting ball entry support state related to the second starting winning part 33WB will be explained. The starting ball entry support state in this embodiment is a "high ball entry state" in which the blade member 33WBb of the second starting winning part 33WB is opened relatively frequently and the game ball easily enters the second starting winning part 33WB. "High support state)" and "Low ball entry state (Low support state)" in which the proportion of the blade member 33WBb being released is lower than in the "High ball entry state" and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning part 33WB. status)”.

In addition, the "high ball entry state" includes (1) a state where the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than the "low ball entry state", (2) one opening of the second starting winning part 33WB. (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second starting winning section 33WB is "low ball entry state". (4) A state in which the number of times the second starting prize winning section 33WB is opened per winning start ball support lottery is greater than that in the "low ball entry state," (5) Starting ball support lottery. For example, the probability of winning is set to be higher than that in the "low ball entry state". The "high ball entry state" in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .

Specifically, in this embodiment, when winning the starting ball entry support lottery, the second starting winning part 33WB is opened for 0.2 seconds x 2 times in the "low entering ball state" and in the "high entering ball state". In "state", it is 1.8 seconds x 2 times. As a result, in the "high winning ball state", it becomes easy for game balls to win frequently in the second starting winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, the "high ball entry state" corresponds to "the first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition," and the "low ball entry state" corresponds to "the first auxiliary state that makes it easier to meet the second starting condition." The function of the blade member 33WBb of the second starting winning part 33WB and the main control device 261 that drives and controls these constitutes an "auxiliary means."

Next, we will explain the various game states (various game modes) when the special pattern display devices 43a and 43b perform variable display.

In this embodiment, the game mode, which is the predetermined game state, is configured to be switched between three game modes: "normal mode," "variable time-shortening mode with starting ball-scoring support (hereinafter referred to as "time-shortening mode A")," and "variable time-shortening mode without starting ball-scoring support (hereinafter referred to as "time-shortening mode B")."

In "normal mode," the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B display changes at normal times in a "normal change state," and the start goal support state becomes a "low goal state."

In "Time-saving A mode", the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display changes in a shorter time than normal, resulting in a "change time shortened state", and the start-goal support state becomes a "high-goal state". In addition, the "normal change state" and the "change time shortened state" can be switched by changing the change time determination table, as described below.

The "Time-saving A mode" is a game mode that is granted after the end of the jackpot state, and ends when the variable display on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the second variable display on the second special pattern display device 43B) has been performed a preset number of times, after which the game transitions to the "normal mode."

In this embodiment, regardless of whether a "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", or "4R jackpot" occurs, a predetermined number of "time-saving A mode" events are granted after the jackpot state ends. Specifically, after a "15R jackpot" or "8R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" event with a duration of 7 variable display events is granted, and after a "4R jackpot" ends, a "time-saving A mode" event with a duration of 1 variable display event is granted.

In "Time-saving B mode", the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B change display in a shorter time than normal, resulting in a "change time reduction state", and the start-going support state becomes a "low-going state". In this embodiment, the state set in "Time-saving B mode" corresponds to a specific game state.

"Time-saving B mode" is a game mode that is granted when the player wins the third win/lose lottery (time-saving win lottery) held during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, and ends when the variable display on the special pattern display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the first variable display on the first special pattern display device 43A) has been performed a preset number of times, after which the game transitions to "normal mode".

However, as mentioned above, in the "normal mode" and "time saving B mode", the starting ball support state related to the second starting winning part 33WB does not become the "high hitting ball state", and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning ball state. Since the ball is in a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult for the ball to enter part 33WB, a small winning state based on the result of the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) does not substantially occur. Even if a small winning state occurs, as will be described later, the small winning release operation of the second variable winning device 32B in the "normal mode" and "time saving B mode" is performed twice for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it becomes substantially difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32B.

Further, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, various display effects corresponding to the current gaming state (gaming mode) are performed on the effect display device 42. For example, in the "normal mode", the "normal stage production" is performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, and the "battle" is performed when the "time-saving A mode" with a duration of one variable display is given. ``Stage production'', ``Rush stage production'' that is performed when ``Time saving A mode'' with a duration of 7 variable displays is given, ``Time saving A mode (Battle stage production or Rush stage production)'' is completed. There is a "continuous chance stage performance" that can be played, a "lucky stage performance" that is performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA when the "time saving B mode" is provided.

As shown in FIG. 118, on the outer upper right corner of the game area, a normal pattern display device 41 as a normal display means for displaying the result of the start ball entry support lottery that is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34, a first special pattern display device 43A as a first special display means for displaying the result of the first hit/miss lottery (jackpot lottery) that is performed in response to the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, and a second special pattern display device 43B as a second special display means for displaying the results of the first hit/miss lottery (jackpot lottery), second hit/miss lottery (small hit lottery), and third hit/miss lottery (time-saving hit lottery) that are performed in response to the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The normal pattern display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal pattern lamps). In the normal pattern display device 41, for example, the right normal pattern lamp flashes (variable display) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Then, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal pattern display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the start-going ball support lottery. In other words, the lighting state (combination of lit normal pattern lamps) when the variable display stops corresponds to various results of the start-going ball support lottery, and the result of the start-going ball support lottery is definitively displayed depending on the lighting state when the variable display stops. For example, lighting both the left and right normal pattern lamps indicates a "win," and lighting only the left normal pattern lamp indicates a "lose."

The first special symbol display device 43A is composed of four LEDs (first special symbol lamps). In the first special symbol display device 43A, a switching display (first variable display) of the first special symbol lamp is performed in response to the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA.

After the specific game state occurs in which the first variable display, which is a specific game, is displayed for a predetermined time on the first special pattern display device 43A, the first variable display is stopped based on the result of the first win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the lighting state (combination of lit special pattern lamps) when the first variable display stops corresponds to various results of the first win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery), and the lighting state when the first variable display stops definitively displays the result of the first win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery), i.e., "jackpot" or "miss."

The second special symbol display device 43B is composed of four LEDs (second special symbol lamps). In the second special symbol display device 43B, a switching display (second variable display) of the second special symbol lamp is performed in response to the ball entering the second starting winning portion 33WB.

Then, after a specific game state occurs in which a second variable display, which is a specific game, is performed for a predetermined time on the second special symbol display device 43B, a first win/fail lottery (big win lottery) and a second win/fail lottery (small win lottery) occur. Alternatively, the second variable display will be stopped based on the result of the third win/fail lottery (time-saving winning lottery). In other words, the lighting mode when the second variable display stops (the combination of special symbol lamps that are lit) is associated with the various results of the first to third winning/failure drawings, and the second variable display is The results of the first to third winning/failure drawings, that is, "big win," "small win," "time-saving win," or "missing," are definitely displayed depending on the lighting mode when it stops. In the present embodiment, stopping the second variable display corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined update condition, and winning the "time saving win" corresponds to the establishment of the specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B, the jackpot type (“15R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “4R jackpot”) is determined depending on the lighting mode to be stopped (stop mode). (Which of these is the case?) will also be taught. In addition, in the second special symbol display device 43B, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the type of time-saving hit (one of "30 times saving time", "40 times saving time", and "50 times saving time") is displayed. (Which one?) will also be taught. It should be noted that there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B that respectively teach various jackpots, small wins, various time-saving wins, and misses, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. Ru.

Further, the stop display on the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B is maintained for a specified time, and after the period (variation interval) has elapsed, the next variable display can be started.

Furthermore, if the next variable display is not made even after a specified time has elapsed after the first special pattern display device 43A or the second special pattern display device 43B has stopped displaying, the first special pattern display device 43A or the second special pattern display device 43B is configured to switch from a lighting state indicating the result of the win/lose lottery to a lighting state indicating that the device is in a standby state in which no variable display is being made. Not limited to this, the lighting state indicating the result of the win/lose lottery may be configured to be maintained as it is.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting prize winning section 33WA, which is a specific condition or an update condition, while the first variable display is being executed, a game ball corresponding to the entering ball enters the One fluctuating display is stored on hold, and after the first fluctuating display being executed is stopped, the first fluctuating display that has been stored on hold is started. Similarly, during execution of the second variable display, if a game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB that is a specific condition or an update condition, the second variable display corresponding to the entered ball is displayed. After the second variable display that is being held and stored is stopped, the second variable display that has been held and stored is started.

In addition, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to the passing is stored and stored, and after the variable display in progress is stopped and displayed. , the fluctuating display that had been stored on hold is now started.

In this embodiment, adjacent to the normal pattern display device 41, the first special pattern display device 43A, and the second special pattern display device 43B, there are provided a normal hold display device 44 indicating that the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 is held and stored, a first hold display device 46A as a first hold display means capable of notifying or suggesting that the first variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the first variable display has been obtained), and a second hold display device 46B as a second hold display means capable of notifying or suggesting that the second variable display is held and stored (the right to execute the second variable display has been obtained). In this embodiment, the first special pattern display device 43A, the second special pattern display device 43B, the first hold display device 46A, the second hold display device 46B, the normal pattern display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are directly displayed and controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means described later.

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to hold and store up to four display variations based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34. For example, when one display variation of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, the left normal hold lamp is lit, when two displays are held, the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, when three displays are held, the left normal hold lamp flashes and the right normal hold lamp is lit, when four displays are held, the left and right normal hold lamps flash. In addition, when a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during a jackpot state, the display variation for that display can also be held.

The first hold display device 46A includes two LEDs (first hold lamps). In this embodiment, the first variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize winning section 33WA can be held and stored up to four times. For example, if the first variable display is on hold for one time, the first hold lamp on the left will light up, and if the first variable display is on hold for two times, the first hold lamps on the left and right will light up. However, if the first fluctuation display is on hold for three times, the first hold lamp on the left will flash, and the first hold lamp on the right will be lit, and if the first fluctuation display is on hold for four times. , the left and right first hold lamps flash. When a plurality of first variable displays are stored on hold, the first variable displays are sequentially digested in the order in which they were stored on hold (from the first one on hold).

The second reserved display device 46B is composed of two LEDs (second reserved lamps). In this embodiment, the second variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning section 33WB can be reserved and stored for up to four times. For example, when one second variable display is reserved, the second reserved lamp on the left side is lit, when two second variable displays are reserved, the second reserved lamps on the left and right are lit, when three second variable displays are reserved, the second reserved lamp on the left side flashes and the second reserved lamp on the right side is lit, when four second variable displays are reserved, the second reserved lamps on the left and right are flashing. When multiple second variable displays are reserved and stored, the second variable displays are consumed in the order in which they were reserved (starting from the first one).

In addition, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33Wa, 33Wb during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also reserved. However, in this embodiment, as described below, in the jackpot state, a "right hit" is performed, and since it is relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second start winning section 33WB located at the lower right side of the play area, the second variable display is basically reserved and stored after the jackpot state ends.

As described above, basically, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the first start winning section 33WA and is consumed in the order in which they entered, and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the second start winning section 33WB and is consumed in the order in which they entered. However, if both the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB are on hold (if one or more of the first hold lamps and one or more of the second hold lamps are on), the second variable display triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB is consumed preferentially. In other words, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will not be displayed unless all second variable displays triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB have been consumed. For example, if one first reserved lamp of the first reserved display device 46A is lit, a game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB, and one second reserved lamp of the second reserved display device 46B is lit, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA will be postponed, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB will be displayed first.

Further, the effect display device 42 of the variable display device unit 35 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display section, and the display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 displays auxiliary display contents based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, etc. It is determined and displayed by a display control device 45, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 and the sub-control device 262 and display control device 45 that control the effect display device 42 constitute a “specific correspondence display execution function unit”.

The performance display device 42 is configured to be capable of executing a performance change display (changing display of decorative patterns) as a change-responsive performance display in accordance with the changing display by the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the effect display device 42 is provided with three upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (an upper symbol display area, a middle symbol display area, and a lower symbol display area). , multiple types of decorative symbols (designs with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area, and then sequentially in each symbol display area (for example, upper symbol display area→lower symbol display area). Decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of symbol display area→middle symbol display area).

When the main controller 261 determines that a jackpot has occurred, a display corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first or second special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, and a decorative symbol is displayed on the performance display device 42 as a jackpot. (For example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area so that they are lined up on a predetermined effective line), and a jackpot state occurs. is started.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be done. In this way, a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and a variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-reach state. Of course, even if a reach state occurs, it does not necessarily mean a jackpot state, and there may be cases where the player misses the jackpot.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, if the same decorative pattern as the reach pattern displayed in the upper and lower pattern display areas is displayed stopped on the same active line in the middle pattern display area (if a decorative pattern with the same number as the repeating number is displayed stopped), a jackpot state is awarded. However, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of decorative pattern displayed.

In addition, in the case of a "small win" or "time-saving win", the combination of symbols displayed on the performance display device 42 is different from the one that corresponds to a big win (a repeat of the same numbers). For example, the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in each symbol display area are "3, 4, 1", which is a combination that looks like a losing symbol. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state cannot be distinguished as a "small win" or a "time-saving win". Of course, this is not limited to this, and in the case of a "small win" or a "time-saving win", the combination of symbols displayed on the performance display device 42 may be a repeat of the same numbers.

As shown in FIG. 117, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 is provided with a lower tray connecting passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 described later to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray connecting passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper tray 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides the game ball that has fallen through the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launch device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 through the foul ball passage 72.

Furthermore, a firing ball passage 74 is provided that communicates between the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower plate communication path 71 is formed in the firing ball passage 74, and a first shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the communication hole is provided. The first shutter is normally biased toward a closed position that closes the communication hole by a biasing means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is configured to work in conjunction with the ball removal button 123, and to be displaced to an open position where the communication hole is opened when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 116, the lower tray 15 is formed with an outlet 15a through which game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and is provided with a second shutter 15b for opening and closing the outlet 15a. The second shutter 15b is always biased toward a closed position that closes the outlet 15a by a biasing means (not shown). Furthermore, the second shutter 15b is configured to work in conjunction with the ball removal lever 25, and is configured to be displaced to an open position that opens the outlet 15a when the ball removal lever 25 is slid to the left, for example.

The symbol 67 in Figures 117 and 118 indicates a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 (described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray connecting passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray connecting passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, so as to almost completely close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the entrance side of the lower tray communication passage 71. Also, the entrance portion (ball inlet portion) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the entrance portion (ball inlet portion) of the upper tray communication passage 73 are provided adjacent to each other. Furthermore, when the front frame 14 is closed, both entrance portions and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow toward the lower tray communication passage 71 (overflowing into the entrance side of the lower tray communication passage 71) and are paid out through the lower tray communication passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of the full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71). In this embodiment, based on the full detection switch continuously detecting game balls for a predetermined period of time, an error notification is controlled to inform the player that the lower tray 15 is full using a display or sound on the performance display device 42. When the retention of game balls in the lower tray connecting passage 71 is resolved and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are not detected continuously for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is released.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 119, 120, etc. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided protruding rearward on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 118) that is arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are removably attached in a stacked state from front to back.

The production display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a that has an opening for exposing the liquid crystal display section of the production display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. There is. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213. Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a, 262a are made of transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning parts 31A, 31B, variable winning devices 32A, 32B, starting winning parts 33WA, 33WB, etc. from behind. There is. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting winning game balls in various winning sections. The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a specified trace is left behind. This makes it easy to discover whether the board box 263 has been tampered with.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes general winning switches 221a, 221b, big winning opening count switch 222, ball entering count switch 223a, specific ball entering detection switch 223b, non-specific ball entering detection switch 223c, A first panel relay board is provided which is electrically connected to the start prize switches 224a, 224b and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. This first board relay board relays the general winning switches 221a, 221b, etc. and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224a and 224b that detect winnings in the starting winning parts 33WA and WB are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are input into the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, a second board relay board that relays various motors and solenoids to the main control device 261 is also provided on the back side of the game board 30.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 119, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in FIG. 119) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis that extends vertically. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 119).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying the transmission of various information to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but terminals are used to output various information regarding the current gaming state, such as the occurrence of a jackpot, and the opening of the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 detected by opening detection switches 91 and 92, which will be described later. Terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no tank ball error, and payout error; terminal regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals and the like for outputting information are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and is provided with a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right portions (the left portion in FIG. 119) of the board box 263. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 is provided with an opening on the top side, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, which is supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 119) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened to the rear. As shown in FIG. 120, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed at the most downstream part of the discharge passage section 217. In other words, the game balls that have won in each winning section, such as the general winning section 31a, are collected through the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. The out port 36 also leads to the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any winning section are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed integrally.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, a power supply/launch control device 310, a payout control device 311, and a CR unit connection board 314 are removably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a stacked state. It is being The power supply/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/firing control device 310). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. There is.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Furthermore, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

As shown in FIG. 120, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 115, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed thereon that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 119). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or the like from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defensive performance. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 119) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the rear side, and when the inner frame 12 is in a closed state, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 119). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. In other words, when the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame open detection switch 91 has a detection part pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14 and is turned off, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and is turned on. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 121 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 502 are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a chip.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data that is stored is backed up.

The backup area 503a is provided when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. This is an area for storing the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the working area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later, are connected to the input/output port 505. With this configuration, the above-described special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221a, 221b, the large winning port count switch 222, the ball count switch 223a, the specific winning detection switch 223b, the non-specific winning detection switch 223c, the start winning switch 224a, 224b, the through gate switch 225, various boards such as the power supply/launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, the sub-control device 262, information display devices such as the hold display device 46A, 46B, the normal hold display device 44, various solenoids provided in the variable winning devices 32A, 32B, and the solenoid that operates the second start winning section 33WB. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminals (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminals and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means comprises a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, a RAM 553 which is a memory which temporarily stores various data etc. when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed, an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and also various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory which temporarily stores work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 551.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555, and is also connected to the display control device 45. In addition, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the performance button 125, the cross button 126, the illumination unit 102, and the error display lamp 104, etc.

The CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 causes the display controller 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (e.g., a variable pattern command) sent from the main controller 261, and causes the display controller 45 to display on the performance display device 42. As described above, in this embodiment, the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B controlled by the main controller 261 inform the player that a jackpot has been won, and the performance display device 42 controlled by the sub-controller 262 displays a variable decorative pattern as a performance display in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512 that stores the control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a may be backed up, and data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off, so that when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, like the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SK1 is input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a process to be performed during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state is restored to before the power was cut off, and is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a power supply/launch control device 310 (launch control circuit 312), a payout device 358, a CR unit connection board 314, etc.

The CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit (lending switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the CR unit (card reader unit, ball lending unit) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and the payout control device 311. When information about the player's ball lending operation to the ball lending operation unit or the CR unit is input to the CR unit and the game value balance is stored on a card, which is a recording medium inserted in the CR unit, the balance on the card is subtracted and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to a card type, and may be a coin type or stick type.

Further, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the firing control circuit 312 of the power source/firing control device 310. (For example, every 2 msec).

The firing control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls. The handle 18 , the dispensing control device 311 , and the main control device 261 are electrically connected to the ejection control circuit 312 . The firing control circuit 312 also receives a dial position signal from a variable resistor from the handle 18 that indicates the amount of rotation operation (rotation angle) of the rotation operation section 18a, and a dial position signal that indicates that the player is touching the handle 18. It is configured to be able to input a touch signal from a touch sensor and a firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. Furthermore, the firing control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311 indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

Then, the firing control circuit 312 outputs a firing state signal to the main controller 261 on the condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input. On condition that the status signal is input, a firing permission signal and a ball sending signal are output to the firing control circuit 312. The main controller 261 is configured to output a launch permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the launch status signal is being input.

Further, the firing control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feeding device 63 and send the game ball to the firing position when a ball sending signal is input. In addition, in a state in which it is detected that a game ball is already present at the firing position by the preparation ball detection sensor provided in the ball feeding device 63 and capable of detecting whether or not a game ball exists at the firing position, the ball feeding device 63 (Even if a ball sending signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the firing position).

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, a dial position signal, and a launch permission signal are input. This causes the game ball set in the launch position to be shot out by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

Further, the power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via a control device to which these are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM clear switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clear switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clear switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clear signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

The display control device 45 executes the display of the decorative patterns on the performance display device 42 according to instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input port 527 is connected to an input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. The input port 527 is also connected to the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 via the bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via the bus line 531, and the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives display commands sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and performs control of the VDP 526 (generating internal commands for the VDP 526) by analyzing the received commands or performing a predetermined calculation process based on the received commands. This performs display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and the display content of the performance display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524. Character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as designs to be displayed on the performance display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, a win/fail random number counter CC1 is used as a win/fail random number generation means used for a win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, etc., and a win/fail random number counter CC1 is used to determine the jackpot type (type lottery). A type determination counter CC2, a fluctuation selection counter CC3 used for determining whether or not to generate a ready-to-reach state in the production display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, and a special Whether to open the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the symbol display devices 43A, 43B (effect display device 42), and the second start winning part 33WB. The normal symbol random number counter CC4 used for the starting ball support lottery is used. Incidentally, the variation selection counter CC3 is also used for lottery of a reach pattern when the decorative symbols of the performance display device 42 are removed and varied. Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for effect pattern selection (for example, variation pattern selection of decorative symbols) in the effect display device 42.

Counters CC1, CC2, CC3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CC4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation reservation area as a reservation storage means in which the values of the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, and fluctuation selection counter CC3 are stored, and a normal symbol random number counter CC4 in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is stored. A variable holding area is provided.

The special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation reservation area each having four reservation areas (first to fourth reservation areas), and one execution area.

In each reserve area of the first special variable reserve area, the values of the win/lose random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, and the variable selection counter CC3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the first start winning section 33WA. In this embodiment, the first special variable reserve area provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 constitutes a "first storage means (first reserve means) capable of storing the fulfillment of the first start condition up to a predetermined upper limit value (four)."

In each reserve area of the second special variable reserve area, the values of the win/lose random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, and the variable selection counter CC3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB. In this embodiment, the second special variable reserve area provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 constitutes a "second storage means (second reserve means) capable of storing the fulfillment of the second start condition up to a predetermined upper limit value (four)."

In this embodiment, the special variable pending area has one execution area, and the data stored in the first special variable pending area and the second special variable pending area is shifted to a common execution area when displaying a change based on that data.

The normal fluctuation holding area includes four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, the first variable display on the first special symbol display device 43A, the second variable display on the second special symbol display device 43B, and the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times each. It is possible.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/no-win random number counter CC1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (i.e., 599), it returns to the lower limit value of 0 as the opening value. Normally, when the win/no-win random number counter CC1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/no-win random number counter CC1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/no-win random number counter CC1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/no-win random number counter CC1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the win/no-win random number counter CC1 is stored in the win/no-win random number counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, the value of the win/loss random number counter CC1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area).

In this embodiment, the winning probability of the first win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) does not change depending on the game mode (either the "normal mode", "time-saving A mode" or "time-saving B mode"), and the number of values of the win/lose random number counter CC1 that will result in a jackpot state is three, and the value is "7,207,407". In other words, there is a first winning probability of 1/200 for winning the first win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery), and a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, the "first lottery means" is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that performs the first win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery).

Similarly, the winning probability of the second lottery (small winning lottery) changes depending on the game mode (any of the game modes "normal mode", "time-saving A mode", and "time-saving B mode"). There are no small wins, and the number of values of the win/fail random number counter CC1 that results in a small win is 84, and the values are "9-50, 409-450". That is, the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) is won with a probability of 84/600 (≈approximately 1/7), which is the second winning probability, and a small winning state occurs. In this embodiment, the "second lottery means" is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that performs the second lottery (small winning lottery).

The third win/loss lottery (time-saving win lottery) is only conducted during the "normal mode" based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning section 33WB. In other words, the third win/loss lottery (time-saving win lottery) is only conducted while the remaining second variable display stored in reserve at the end of the "time-saving A mode" is being executed (while the remaining reserved data is being consumed). Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the "remaining reserved data of the second variable display is being consumed (continuation chance stage presentation)" after the end of the "time-saving A mode (battle stage presentation or rush stage presentation)" corresponds to the "predetermined game state".

The number of values of the win/lose random number counter CC1 that will result in a time-saving win is 60, and the values are "211-230, 311-330, 511-530." In other words, there is a 1/10 probability of winning the third win/lose lottery (time-saving win lottery), and gaining the right to trigger "Time-saving B mode."

More specifically, if the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is "211 to 230", "30 time saving wins" will occur, and if the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is "311 to 330", "40 If a "time saving win" occurs and the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is "511 to 530", a "50 time saving win" occurs.

As will be described later, the third lottery (time-saving lottery) is the first lottery (big prize lottery) and the second lottery (small prize lottery) conducted based on the balls entered into the second starting winning section 33WB. ) will be executed if the winner is not selected.

The ROM 502 is provided with a win/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 corresponds to any of the wins. In this embodiment, a first validity determination table (a first validity determination table common to the "normal mode", "time saving A mode" and "time saving B mode") corresponding to the ball entering the first starting winning part 33WA, A second correctness judgment table corresponding to the ball entering the second starting winning part 33WB (a second judgment table including a small hit judgment common to “time saving A mode” and “time saving B mode”, and a second judgment table for “normal mode”) There is a second win/fail determination table including a small hit determination and a time-saving hit determination.

The type determination counter CC2 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19), it returns to the lower limit, 0.

ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of type determination counter CC2 corresponds to. In this embodiment, a first type determination table corresponding to a ball entering first start winning section 33WA and a second type determination table corresponding to a ball entering second start winning section 33WB are provided.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the lottery, the type of jackpot state to be awarded is determined based on the value of the type determination counter CC2 (a type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is awarded. The Rukoto.

In this embodiment, in "normal mode (same for time-saving A mode)," if a direct hit jackpot is won in the first hit/miss lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, there is a 5% chance of a "15R jackpot" and a 95% chance of a "4R jackpot."

On the other hand, in the "time saving B mode", if you win a direct jackpot in the first lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, you will receive a "15R jackpot" at a rate of 100%. (The percentage of "4R jackpot" is 0%).

In contrast, regardless of the game mode, if a direct jackpot is won in the first win/lose lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by a ball entering the second start-up winning section 33WB, and if a V-winning jackpot occurs based on a ball entering the specific winning section (V-winning area) 320c of the second variable winning device 32B via a small win, there is a 40% chance of a "15R jackpot", a 10% chance of an "8R jackpot", and a 50% chance of a "4R jackpot".

Note that the type determination counter CC2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter CC2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start-up winning section 33WA or the second start-up winning section 33WB, the value of the type determination counter CC2 stored in the type determination counter buffer changes to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

The variable selection counter CC3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit. In the present embodiment, after the fluctuation selection counter CC3 generates a reach state with respect to a decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before or after the reach symbol and stops, which is a "reach behind or behind", and a reach state is also generated. After that, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before or after the reach symbol, ``reach other than before or after,'' and ``reach,'' in which no reach state occurs, is selected by lottery.

The ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter CC3 and various reach patterns.

The variation selection counter CC3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter CC3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting prize winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, the value of the fluctuation selection counter CC3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 255, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 255), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 31, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 31). It becomes.

In addition, the change time of the change display on the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B and the general change pattern of the change display on the performance display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) are associated with each other by a change pattern table, so that once the change time of the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B is determined, the change pattern of the performance display device 42 is also determined.

For example, the variation time may be determined based on the first variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B may be determined based on the second variation type counter CS2. For example, when corresponding to "15R jackpot", one of the stop display modes corresponding to "15R jackpot" is determined. Note that the counters and the like used to determine the fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern are not limited to the above configuration, and can be changed as appropriate for each model.

The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. In this embodiment, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the variation type counter buffer of RAM 503 are stored in the special variation holding area of RAM 503 when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB.

In this way, by acquiring the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 at the timing of the start winning, the first variation time of the first variation display and the second variation of the second variation display that have been stored on hold can be stored. The time can be grasped (pre-read) before the fluctuation starts, and using this information, it is possible to perform various effects. In addition, if a configuration in which the variation time is predicted and the effect is performed is not required, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the effect display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the time when the variation of the decorative pattern starts. It may also be a thing.

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to use different prime numbers for the sizes of the win/lose random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, variation selection counter CC3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and to use numbers that are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter CC4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 29). The normal symbol random number counter CC4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is obtained when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 34.

When a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter CC4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable value for a predetermined period of time (after the normal symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 flash alternately), and then the display stops in a mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to the winning, and the second start-up winning section 33WB opens in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

In this embodiment, in a "low ball entry state", the winning random number values are two, "0" and "1". On the other hand, in a "high ball entry state", the winning random number values are 28, "0 to 27". In other words, in a "low ball entry state", there is a 1/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open, and in a "high ball entry state", there is a 14/15 probability that the second start entry section 33WB will be open.

The ROM 502 is provided with a support determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 corresponds to winning. In this embodiment, a first support determination table corresponding to a "low ball entry state" and a second support determination table corresponding to a "high ball entry state" are set.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, followed by the main processing.

Figure 125 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step SC301, a process for reading the various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of the various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control unit 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

When there is detection information from various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is incremented. In addition, in the external output process of the normal processing described below, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are awarded (game balls are paid out) based on the prize ball command. Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step SC302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step SC303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, the variable selection counter CC3, and the normal pattern random number counter CC4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter CC1, CC2, CC3, and CC4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM503.

After that, in step SC304, a start winning process is executed in response to the entry (winning) of the game ball into the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, and in step SC305, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34. In the following step SC306, a launch permission command setting process is executed to perform processes such as sending a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310. Furthermore, in step SC307, a remaining ball monitoring process is executed to check whether or not there are any game balls remaining in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B. Then, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the starting winning process in step SC304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 127. In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holds in the first variable display triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting winning part 33WA, and a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings in the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning part 33WB. A second suspension counter Nb is provided to count the number of suspensions in the second variable display.

In addition, the execution area of the special variable pending area and each pending area are provided with various memory areas, such as a win/lose random number memory area that stores the value of the win/lose random number counter CC1, a win type random number memory area that stores the value of the type determination counter CC2, a reach random number memory area that stores the value of the variable selection counter CC3, a first variable type random number memory area that stores the value of the first variable type counter CS1, a second variable type random number memory area that stores the value of the second variable type counter CS2, and a mode memory area that stores game mode information for identifying the game mode at the start of the variable display.

First, in step SC501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the second starting winning section 33WB based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, it is determined in step SC502 whether or not the value of the second holding counter Nb, which is the first counting function section, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step SC501 or SC502, the process moves to step SC510. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC502, the process proceeds to step SC503, where the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the next step SC504, an additional display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the second variable display by one. In other words, if the second hold lamp is off, a process is performed to turn it on.

After step SC504, in the processing of step SC505 which is the information setting function section, the values of the win/lose random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, the variation selection counter CC3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, the variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) are stored in the first of the empty holding areas in the second special variation holding area (win/lose random number memory area, winning type random number memory area, reach random number memory area, and first and second variation type random number memory area). At the same time, the game mode when this second variation display starts is identified, and the game mode information is stored in the mode memory area. After step SC505, proceed to step SC506.

In step SC506, a second win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special variable pending area corresponds to a type of win (big win, small win, time-saving win).

Here, the details of the second pass/fail determination process in step SC506 are explained with reference to FIG. 128(b).

First, in step SC5111, with reference to the second win/fail judgment table corresponding to the gaming mode, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is set to "7", which corresponds to a jackpot. It is determined whether it matches either "207" or "407". When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5111, in step SC5112, the jackpot schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC5111 is negative, then in step SC5113, the second win/loss determination table corresponding to the game mode is consulted to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches any of the values "9-50, 409-450" corresponding to a small win. If the result of step SC5113 is positive, then in step SC5114, the small win scheduled flag of the corresponding reserve area in the second special variable reserve area is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5113, a time saving appropriateness determination process is executed in step SC5115, and then this process is ended.

Here, the details of the time saving propriety determination process in step SC5115 will be explained with reference to FIG. 128(c).

First, in step SC5121, it is determined whether the variation information newly stored in the second special variation holding area is a variation display performed in the "normal mode". If a negative determination is made in step SC5121, the process is immediately terminated.

If the result of step SC5121 is positive, i.e., if the second variable display is performed in "normal mode," proceed to step SC5122.

In step SC5122, the second win/loss determination table corresponding to the "normal mode" is consulted to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special variable pending area matches any of the values "211 to 230" corresponding to a "30-time time-saving win."

If the result of step SC5122 is positive, the 30-time time-saving hit scheduled flag for the corresponding reserved area among the second special variable reserved areas is turned on in step SC5123, and then this process is terminated.

If the result of step SC5122 is negative, step SC5124 refers to the second win/loss determination table corresponding to the "normal mode" to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special variable pending area matches any of the values "311 to 330" corresponding to a "40-time time-saving win."

If the result of step SC5124 is positive, the process ends after turning on the 40-time time-saving hit scheduled flag for the corresponding reserved area in the second special variable reserved area in step SC5125.

If the result of step SC5124 is negative, then in step SC5126, the second win/loss determination table corresponding to the "normal mode" is referred to to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special variable pending area matches any of the values "511 to 530" corresponding to a "50-time time-saving win."

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5126, in step SC5127, the 50 time saving per schedule flag of the corresponding holding area among the second special fluctuation holding areas is turned on, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5126, the process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC507 following step SC506, if it is determined in step SC506 that the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area. A second type determination process is performed to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the type determination counter CC2.

The second type determination process in step SC507 will now be described with reference to FIG. 129(b). In the second type determination process, first in step SC5300, it is determined whether or not the jackpot expected flag was set to on in the immediately preceding second win/loss determination process. If a negative determination is made in step SC5300, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC5300, in step SC5301, the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "15R jackpot" with reference to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value "0 to 7" corresponding to "." When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5301, in step SC5302, the 15R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC5301, in step SC5303, the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "8R jackpot" with reference to the second type determination table. It is determined whether the number is "8 to 17" corresponding to "." When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5303, in step SC5304, the 8R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC5303 is negative, i.e., if the value of the type determination counter CC2 is "18, 19", then in step SC5305, the second type determination table is taken into consideration and the 4R jackpot flag of the corresponding reserved area among the second special variable reserved areas newly stored in the second special variable reserved area is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC508 following step SC507, a second fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display. Here, if the gaming mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is the "normal mode", the second normal fluctuation time determination table for the "normal mode" is referred to, and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is The second fluctuation time is grasped based on. If the gaming mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time saving A mode", refer to the second shortening fluctuation time determination table for "time saving A mode" and set the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Based on this, the second fluctuation time is grasped. In addition, if the gaming mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is the "time saving B mode", the second fluctuation fluctuation time determination table for the "time saving B mode" is referred to, and the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. The second fluctuation time is grasped based on the value. The fluctuation time grasped here is stored in the corresponding holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area. However, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 of the reservation area is not deleted here.

In this embodiment, the second normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode", the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving A mode", and the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving B mode" are provided as tables for "big win", "small win", "time-saving win", and "miss", respectively.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 is provided with a mode memory area that is referenced when determining the game mode. The mode memory area stores one of the following values: "11" corresponding to "normal mode," "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode," or "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode."

Correspondingly, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 also has a mode storage area that the sub-controller 262 refers to when determining the game mode. The game mode information set in the main controller 261 is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201) each time the game mode is switched and set.

In step SC509 following step SC508, a process for setting the first command is performed. Note that this preceding command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the second validity judgment process, the second type judgment process, and the second variation time judgment process. , information indicating whether the fluctuation information is triggered by the entry of the ball into either the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, and gaming mode information for specifying the gaming mode at the start of the second variable display. etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201).

After processing in step SC509, or if a negative judgment is made in step SC501 or step SC502, in step SC510, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start winning section 33WA based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If a negative judgment is made in step SC510, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is positive in step SC510, then in step SC511, it is determined whether the value of the first pending counter Na, which is the second counting function unit that counts the number of pending first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If the answer is negative in step SC511, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is positive in step SC511, then the process proceeds to step SC512, where the first pending counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the next step SC513, an additive display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number of the first variable display, which is numerical information (specific numerical information), by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are off, the left first hold lamp is turned on, if the left first hold lamp is on and the right first hold lamp is off, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, if both the left and right first hold lamps are on, the left first hold lamp is made to blink while the right first hold lamp is kept on, and if the left first hold lamp is blinking and the right first hold lamp is on, a process is performed to make both the left and right first hold lamps blink.

After step SC513, in the process of step SC514, which is an information setting function section, each value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, fluctuation selection counter CC3, and fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set to the first special fluctuation hold. It is stored in vacant holding areas (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area, and first and second fluctuation type random number storage areas). At the same time, based on the current values of the number of fluctuation counters A, B, etc., the game mode when this first fluctuation display is started is specified, and the game mode information is stored in the mode storage area. After step SC514, the process moves to step SC515.

In step SC515, a first win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot.

Here, details of the first validity determination process in step SC515 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(a).

First, in step SC5101, with reference to the first win/fail determination table, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is changed to the values "7", "207", " 407''. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5101, in step SC5102, the jackpot schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the first special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5101, the process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC516 following step SC515, if it is determined in step SC515 that the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value is newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area. A first type determination process is performed to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the type determination counter CC2.

Here, the first type determination process in step SC516 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). First, in step SC5201, it is determined whether or not the jackpot schedule flag was set on in the first success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step SC5201, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC5201 is affirmative, in step SC5202, the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is determined as "15R jackpot" with reference to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches the value "0" corresponding to . If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5202, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on in step SC5203, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5202, the 4R jackpot flag is turned on in step SC5204, and then the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC517 following step SC516, if it is determined in step SC515 that the value of the hit/miss random number counter CC1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot (it is a miss), a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the variable selection counter CC3 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

Now, the reach determination process of step SC517 will be explained with reference to FIG. 130. First, in step SC5401, it is determined whether or not a jackpot expected flag was set in the first hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If a positive determination is made in step SC5401, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC5401 is negative, i.e., if it is a miss, then in step SC5402, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter CC3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach". If the result of step SC5402 is positive, then in step SC5403, the front or rear flag indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC5402 is negative, then in step SC5404, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter CC3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to a "reach other than a miss before or after". If the result of step SC5404 is positive, then in step SC5405, the non-front or back flag is turned on and the process is terminated.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC5404, that is, if the variable display ends without passing through the ready-to-reach state, which is a "completely missed" state, the process is immediately ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC518 following step SC517, a first variation time determination process is performed to determine the first variation time of the first variation display. In other words, if the gaming mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is the "normal mode", the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined by referring to the first normal fluctuation time determination table for the "normal mode". The first fluctuation time is grasped based on. If the gaming mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time saving A mode", refer to the first shortening fluctuation time determination table for "time saving A mode" and set the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Based on this, the first fluctuation time is grasped. If the gaming mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is the "time saving B mode", the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is set with reference to the first shortening fluctuation time determination table for the "time saving B mode". Based on this, the first fluctuation time is grasped. The fluctuation time grasped here is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the first special fluctuation reservation area. However, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 of the reservation area is not deleted here.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode", the first reduced variable time determination table for the "time saving A mode", and the first reduced variable time determination table for the "time saving B mode" are used. As shortening variation time determination tables, there are provided tables for "jackpot hit", "front/back off reach", "other than front/back off reach", and "complete miss" tables. For example, regarding the variable time determination table for "completely removed", "for 1 and 2 pending items (normal variable time)", "for 3 pending items (reduced variable time)", and "for 4 pending items". (Reduced Fluctuation Time)" is provided, and the Fluctuation Time Determination Table (Fluctuation Time) to be referred to is changed according to the number of pending fluctuation displays stored in the first special fluctuation retention area. Good too. As a result, in a state where the first variable display that has been stored on hold is being executed sequentially, the first variable display for when it is off is displayed according to the number of first variable displays that are scheduled to be executed and stored on hold at that time. You can set a shortened time. Here, for example, in a situation where the variable time determination table for "4 pending items" is referred to when executing a predetermined variable display, if the variable display is a variable display corresponding to various wins such as a jackpot, , a configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to the "jackpot" variable time determination table.

After step SC518, in step SC519, a first command setting process is performed, and this process ends. Note that this first command includes fluctuation information (used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the first validity judgment process, the first type judgment process, the reach judgment process, and the first variation time judgment process. information), information indicating whether the fluctuating information is triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, and identifying the gaming mode at the start of the first variable display. This includes game mode information, etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start-up winning section 33WA or the second start-up winning section 33WB, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, etc. is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the win/fail judgment is performed. Although the configuration is such that processing and the like are executed, the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, when obtaining the values of the random number counter CC1, etc., a temporary storage area is provided to temporarily store these counter values, and after performing a validity judgment process etc. on the information stored in the temporary storage area, You may adopt the structure which memorize|stores in the holding area of the corresponding special fluctuation holding area.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SC305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 131.

In step SC601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step SC601, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step SC601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step SC602, it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the answer is NO, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step SC602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is < 4, then the process proceeds to step SC603, where the normal hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step SC604, an addition display process is performed on the normal holding display device 44 (normal holding lamp) corresponding to the increase in the holding number of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 by one. In other words, if a pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both off, the left normal hold lamp will be turned on, and if the left normal hold lamp is on and the right side normal hold lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, if both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp blinks while the right side normal hold lamp remains lit, and the left normal hold lamp is turned on. If the lamps are blinking and the right normal hold lamp is lit, processing is performed to make both the left and right normal hold lamps blink.

After step SC604, in step SC605, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 updated in the random number update process in step SC303 above is stored in the first free memory area of the normal variable reserve area of RAM503. After that, the through gate passing process is terminated.

Next, the launch permission command setting process in step SC306 will be explained with reference to FIG. 132.

First, in step SC701, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag, which indicates that a firing status signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312, is set to on. The firing status signal is sent from the firing control circuit 312 to the main control unit 261 when the firing control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the handle 18, a firing switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC701, it is determined in step SC702 whether or not a firing state signal is being received. If a negative determination is made in step SC702, the launch permission flag is turned off in step SC703, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC702 is affirmative, then in step SC704, it is determined whether the value of the launch timer used to measure the interval between launches of the game balls is "0". If the result of step SC704 is negative, then in step SC707, the value of the launch timer is decremented by 1, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step SC704, then in step SC705, the main control unit 261 sends a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312. In the following step SC706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step SC706, this process ends.

If the result of step SC701 is negative, then in step SC708 it is determined whether or not a launch state signal has been received. If the result of step SC708 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SC708 is positive, then in step SC709 the launch permission flag is set to ON.

In the following step SC710, a ball sending signal is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312. Furthermore, in step SC711, the firing timer is set to "300", which corresponds to 0.6 seconds. As a result, the game ball is reliably set at the firing position by the ball feeding device 63, and then the game ball is launched by the firing device 60, and the main controller 261 is controlled from the firing control circuit 312 to the firing state. While the signal continues to be received, a firing permission signal is transmitted from the main control device 261 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and game balls are fired by the firing device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. After step SC711, this process ends.

Note that when the firing control circuit 312 receives the firing permission signal from the main control device 261, it receives all of the touch signal, firing switch signal, and CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and the dispensing control device 311. If the determination is affirmative, a firing process is performed to drive the firing device 60 (firing solenoid) and fire the game ball. Note that the firing control circuit 312 performs adjustment control of the firing device 60 regarding the firing strength (launching speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. Thereby, the game ball is ejected by the ejecting device 60 with adjusted strength.

When the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main control device 261, it checks the preparation ball detection sensor that detects whether a game ball is set at the launch position on the launch rail 61 where the game ball will be launched by the launch device 60, and if it is confirmed that a game ball is not set at the launch position, it drives the ball feed device 63 and performs a ball feed process to set the game ball at the launch position.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the Pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. The CPU 501 then suspends the ongoing control and starts NMI interrupt processing, and in step SC401, stores the power outage occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 123. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SC101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Execute wait processing for about seconds. In the following step SC102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step SC103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON) or not, and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). In order to do so, the process moves to step SC112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step SC104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step SC112 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SC105, and in the subsequent step SC106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case as well, the process moves to step SC112.

In the process of step SC112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SC113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SC113, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SC113, etc.). That is, in step SC113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step SC114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SC111, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SC103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step SC107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step SC108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step SC109, a command is sent to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at power-off. In step SC110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step SC111, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As a general outline, the process of steps SC201 to SC211 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps SC212 and SC213 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SC201, control signals based on the settings of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and the second starting winning section 33WB, etc. updated in the previous normal processing are sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each device. Executes external output processing such as sending data to each sub-side control device.

For example, when starting the variable display on the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to start the effect by the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42. The sub-control device 262 that has input the variable pattern command determines the display mode (variation time, effect pattern, etc.) of the effect display device 42 based on the various commands, and causes the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45.

The variation pattern command includes information for specifying variation patterns of decorative patterns such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, etc. based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, audio, etc.

Here, the decorative symbol variation patterns will be explained. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the decorative symbol variation display. "Super reach" is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the performance display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols while the decorative symbols are varying (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of expectation in the player. "Premium reach" is a presentation mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and is performed in a mode in which characters and the like of a different pattern from the super reach are displayed in addition to the decorative symbols while the decorative symbols are varying (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of expectation in the player. In addition, "complete miss" is a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variation display stops without entering any of the reach states.

The sub-control device 262 also determines the stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) of the decorative pattern changing display on the performance display device 42 based on the change pattern and change time information included in the change pattern command, and stops and displays it after the change time has elapsed. In other words, if a jackpot is won ("15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "4R jackpot"), the changing display stops and displays a combination of decorative patterns (combination of jackpot patterns) consisting of the same numbers 1 to 9.

A combination of symbols that miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that misses before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols that are not miss before and after corresponds to a "reach that is not miss before and after", where after a reach occurs, the final stopping symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol. A combination of symbols that are complete misses corresponds to a "complete miss", where no reach even occurs.

The main control device 261 may be configured to set a pattern command specifying one of a jackpot pattern combination, a front-to-back miss pattern combination, a pattern combination other than a front-to-back miss pattern combination, and a complete miss pattern combination, and output the pattern command together with the variation pattern command to the sub-control device 262.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 124, in step SC202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the following step SC203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SC204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step SC205, a second special display control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, and various wins (big win, small win, time-saving win) are determined, and variable display settings are made on the second special symbol display device 43B and the performance display device 42. Details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step SC206, a first special display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first special symbol display device 43A is performed, as well as jackpot determination and variable display on the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 (variation pattern of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42). Settings etc. are performed. Details of this first special display control process will be described later.

In step SC207, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, control regarding the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B is performed. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step SC208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step SC209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second start winning section 33WB, which has a blade member 33WBb that opens and closes. The start winning section control process will be described in detail later.

Thereafter, in step SC210, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SC211, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SC201, and the processes from step SC201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step SC212, step SC213).

That is, in step SC212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SC213, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step SC202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, the execution time of each process of steps SC201 to SC210 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter CC1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

If power outage information is set in backup area 503a of RAM 503 (step SC210: YES), the power has been cut off, and the processing from step SC214 onwards is carried out as power outage processing when the power is out. The power outage processing first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SC214, then saves the contents of each register used by CPU 501 to the stack area in step SC215, and stores the value of the stack pointer in backup area 503a in step SC216.

Thereafter, in step SC217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step SC218, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step SC219, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step SC210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps SC201 to SC209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps SC212 and SC213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SC214), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the first special display control process in step SC206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133.

First, in step SC800, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval set after the first variable display of the first special pattern display device 43A is "0" or not.

If a negative determination is made in step SC800, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, the value of the fluctuation interval timer is subtracted in step SC819, and then the process ends. In other words, for example, if the fluctuation interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the fluctuation interval timer is set to "249 ("250" if the configuration is such that step SC819 is performed before step SC800)", In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC800, that is, if it is not a variable interval, then in step SC801, the winning situation storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to, and the current state is other than the jackpot state or small win state. Determine whether it exists or not.

In addition, during the jackpot state, the period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped on the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B until the first variable winning device 32A is released is an opening period in between, a round period in which the first variable winning device 32A is in an open state, an interval period in which the first variable winning device 32A is in a closed state between round periods, and after the final round. , and an ending period until variable display can be started on the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B.

The small win state also includes round periods during which the second variable winning device 32B is in an open state, and interval periods between round periods during which the second variable winning device 32B is in a closed state.

In this embodiment, the hit status memory area stores "0" when in a state other than the big hit state or small hit state, and in the big hit state, stores "1" during the opening period and interval period, "2" during the round period, and "3" during the ending period. In addition, in the small hit state, stores "4" during the first round, "5" during the interval period after the first round, and "6" during the second round. In other words, in step SC801, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the hit status memory area to determine whether the state is in the big hit state or small hit state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC801, that is, if the game is in a jackpot state or a small win state, the process is directly ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC801, it is determined in step SC802 whether or not the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is being displayed on the second special symbol display device 43B is set on. Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC802, the process is immediately terminated.

If the result of step SC802 is negative, the process proceeds to step SC803, where it is determined whether the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, is greater than 0.

If the result of step SC803 is negative, step SC804 determines whether the special pattern 1 display flag, which indicates that the first variable display is being performed on the first special pattern display device 43A, is set to on.

If the result of step SC804 is negative, i.e., the state is not a big win or small win state, and the first or second change display is not in progress, and no second change display is pending storage, the process proceeds to step SC805, where it is determined whether the first pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending first change displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, is greater than 0.

In other words, if the second special pattern display device 43B is displaying a second variable, or if at least one second variable display is stored in reserve, the first special pattern display device 43A is configured not to be able to start a new first variable display.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC805, 1 is subtracted from the first pending counter Na in the process of step SC806, which serves as an update function section or a subtraction function section. In the following step SC807, processing for shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area.

After step SC807, in step SC808, a subtraction display process is performed on the first hold display device 46A (first hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the hold number in the first variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are in a blinking state, the right first hold lamp is turned on while the left first hold lamp is blinking, if the left first hold lamp is in a blinking state and the right first hold lamp is turned on, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, if both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, the right first hold lamp is turned off while the left first hold lamp is turned on, and if the left first hold lamp is turned on and the right first hold lamp is turned off, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned off. After step SC808, in step SC809, a first variable display setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SC805, in step SC811, standby display settings (such as setting a standby display command to be output to the sub-control device 262) are made to derive a display mode corresponding to a standby state in which no change display is being performed in both the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B (for example, a mode in which only the first and second first special pattern lamps from the right in the lower row or the second special pattern lamp are lit), and then this process is terminated.

In other words, after the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B of this embodiment stop changing, the stopped state is maintained (in a state in which the result of the winning/losing lottery is shown) for the duration of the change interval, but when the change interval ends, the display state is switched to one that indicates that the change is waiting.

In addition, the display modes indicating that the production display device 42 is in a variable standby state include a first standby display mode and a second standby display mode, and the sub-control device 262 that receives the standby display command firstly While the brightness of the effect display device 42 is maintained, the stop display mode of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is maintained almost as it is. The standby time measurement timer may be configured to set a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds). Furthermore, when the value of the standby time measurement timer is subtracted every predetermined time and becomes "0", the brightness of the effect display device 42 is dimmed, and the display mode is also simplified (for example, a decorative pattern is displayed. The second standby display mode may be used.

Here, the details of the first variable display setting process in step SC809 are explained with reference to FIG. 134.

First, in step SC900, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special variable pending area is "7", which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SC900, it may be determined whether the first variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether the jackpot scheduled flag of the execution area of the special variable pending area is set to on.

If the answer is yes in step SC900, then in step SC901, it is determined whether "31," which corresponds to "time-saving B mode," is stored in the mode storage area.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC901, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on in the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area in step SC902, and then the process proceeds to step SC903.

When a negative determination is made in step SC901, the process moves to step SC904, and it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag has already been set on in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If the determination in step SC904 is affirmative, the process moves to step SC903.

In step SC903, a 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed. The 15R jackpot pattern setting process is a process for executing a variable display and a performance display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area in the first special symbol display device 43A and the performance display device 42 (the same applies to various pattern setting processes described below). Here, the variable pattern table corresponding to the 15R jackpot is taken into consideration to determine the variable pattern (variable display time, stop mode, performance pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and the performance display device 42, and the variable pattern command is set, etc.

Specifically, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process in step SC903 (the same applies to the various pattern setting processes in steps SC905, SC907, SC909, and SC910 described later), the mode memory area is first checked to determine the game mode. If "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode memory area, the first normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected as the first variable time determination table to be referenced when setting the first variable time. Also, if "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode" is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected first variable time determination table is referenced, and the first variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable pending area. The determined first variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable pending area.

Furthermore, a reach pattern is determined based on the first variation time and the variation pattern. For example, the first normal variable time determination table for jackpot is referred to, and if the first variable time is determined to be 22 seconds, normal reach is set, and if it is determined to be 30 seconds or 35 seconds, super reach is set. If set and determined to be 40 seconds, premium reach is set.

Then, various information including the first variable display, the 15R jackpot, the determined reach pattern, game mode information, and the variable time are set in the variable pattern command. In addition, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process, the special chart 1 jackpot variable flag, which indicates that the first variable display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed, is set to ON.

Further, in this embodiment, the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 is determined on the main control device 261 side, but in order to reduce the burden on the main control device 261, the main control device 261 does not determine the reach pattern. In the fluctuation pattern command, information on whether it is the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, information indicating the fluctuation pattern (15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, small hit, front and back off reach, front and back off reach, The sub-control device 262 may determine the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 by including information that allows it to be determined whether the hit is a complete miss or not, information indicating a fluctuation time, and the like.

After step SC903, in step SC911, the special figure 1 displaying flag indicating that the first variable display is being displayed on the first special symbol display device 43A is set on, and in step SC912, the remaining time of the first variable display is measured. After setting a value corresponding to the first variable time to the special figure 1 display timer, this process is ended.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC904, a 4R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC905. Here, with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to the 4R jackpot, the variation pattern (variation display time, stop mode, production pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and production display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command Configure settings, etc. In addition, in the 4R jackpot pattern setting process, the special figure 1 jackpot variation flag indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON.

After step SC905, in step SC911, the special chart 1 display flag is set to on, and in step SC912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special chart 1 display timer, and then this process is terminated.

If the result of step SC900 is negative, step SC906 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the front/rear flag (see reach determination process in FIG. 130) is on. If the result of step SC906 is positive, i.e., if it is a "front/rear miss reach," then step SC907 performs front/rear reach pattern setting process (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then step SC911 and step SC912 are performed, after which this process ends.

If the result of step SC906 is negative, step SC908 takes into consideration the execution area of the special variable pending area and determines whether the non-front/back flag is on. If the result of step SC908 is positive, that is, if it is a "non-front/back miss reach," step SC909 performs non-front/back reach pattern setting processing (setting of variable pattern command, etc.), and then step SC911 and step SC912 are performed, after which this processing ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SC908, that is, if it is "completely off", then step SC910 performs off fluctuation pattern setting processing (setting of a fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then steps SC911 and SC912 are performed. After that, this process ends.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a first winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a big win will occur is conducted based on the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, but a second winning/losing lottery to determine whether or not a small win will occur (small win lottery) and a third winning/losing lottery to determine whether or not a time-saving win will occur (time-saving win lottery) are not conducted.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 133, if a positive judgment is made in step SC804, i.e., if the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SC812, where a subtraction process is performed on the special chart 1 display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special chart 1 display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 6 seconds (6000 msec), the special chart 1 display timer is set to "1500", and is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure 1 display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure 1 display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SC813.

If a negative determination is made in step SC813, a switching display setting is performed in step SC818 to continue the switching display (fluctuating display) of the first special symbol display device 43A. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal process, a control signal to perform switching display is outputted to the first special symbol display device 43A. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the first special symbol display device 43A is realized at the timing of the first special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC818, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC813, the special figure 1 displaying flag is turned off in step SC814, and special figure 1 stop display setting is made to perform a stop display on the first special symbol display device 43A in step SC815. I do. Based on the setting contents of this special figure 1 stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the first special symbol display device 43A. That is, in the first special symbol display device 43A, modes corresponding to each jackpot type, loss, etc. set in the first variable display setting process are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, after step SC815, in step SC816, a special pattern 1 stop command is set for the sub-control device 262 to cause the performance display device 42 to perform a stopped display. This ensures that the stop timing of the first special pattern display device 43A and the performance display device 42 is synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the performance display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information regarding the stop mode of the performance display device 42 again. Also, to reiterate, the stop display by the special pattern display devices 43A and 43B is the main display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the performance display device 42 is merely auxiliary (for performance purposes).

Subsequently, in step SC817, a special figure 1 discrimination information setting process for initializing the winning state and switching the game mode is performed, and then this process ends.

Here, the special chart 1 discrimination information setting process in step SC817 will be explained with reference to FIG. 135.

First, in step SC1001, the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1001, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1002, and in step SC1003, the jackpot flag (stored in the first special fluctuation reservation area) indicating that the jackpot is in the state is turned off. Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag (indicating that you hit the jackpot in the first variable display).

Furthermore, in step SC1004, a value corresponding to the various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reserve area ("15" corresponding to a 15R jackpot, or "4" corresponding to a 4R jackpot) is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the first variable winning device 32A is opened).

In the next step SC1005, a "1" is set in the winning status memory area. Furthermore, in step SC1006, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds) is set in the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening and closing control of the first variable winning device 32A). Next, in step SC1007, "8" is set in the first winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32A, indicating 8, which is the maximum number of balls that can enter per round.

The value of the first winning counter is determined by the detection information of the big winning opening count switch 222 to determine whether or not a ball has entered the first variable winning device 32A during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125). However, when it is determined that a ball has entered the first variable winning device 32A, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step SC1008, an opening command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of the start of the winning state, and then this process ends. Note that the opening command includes information such as the type of winning, and the sub-controller 262 is also able to grasp the total number of rounds in the winning state, etc.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1001, a value corresponding to a variable interval (for example, 1 second) is set in the variable interval timer in step SC1013. In addition, in the effect display device 42, basically, the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is stopped, and until the variation interval ends (the next special symbol display device Until the variable display of 43A and 43B is started, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed continue to be displayed. Then, when the fluctuation interval ends and the fluctuation display is stored on hold, the fluctuation display on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and the fluctuation display on the performance display device 42 are started simultaneously. On the other hand, even if the variable interval ends, if the variable display is not stored on hold, the stop symbols on the performance display device 42 continue to be derived for a while, and then the display switches to a display for waiting for a game (demonstration screen display).

After step SC1013, in step SC1014, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether the device is in "time-saving A mode."

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1014, the value of the first variation counter A is subtracted by 1 in step SC1015. The first fluctuation number counter A is for measuring the duration of the "time saving A mode" (the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit).

In this embodiment, as described below, after the end of all types of jackpots, the "Time-saving A mode" is granted for a period of one or seven variable display cycles, so that the first variable count counter A is set to "1" or "7" when the jackpot ends.

In the next step SC1016, it is determined whether the value of the first change count counter A is "0". If the result of step SC1016 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SC1016 is positive, then in step SC1017, "11" is set in the mode memory area, indicating "normal mode". In other words, when the total number of times the first and second change displays have been performed on the first special pattern display device 43A and the second special pattern display device 43B has reached "1 time" or "7 times", the "time-saving A mode" ends and the mode transitions to "normal mode".

After step SC1017, in step SC1018, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). The configuration may be such that the rush stage performance and battle stage performance are continuously executed during the period in which the "time saving A mode" is provided by the function of the sub-control device 262, which is the continuation function unit. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1014, it is determined in step SC1019 whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the "time saving B mode" is in progress.

If the answer is YES in step SC1019, the value of the second fluctuation count counter B is decremented by 1 in step SC1020. The second fluctuation count counter B is used to measure the duration of the "time-saving B mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until the upper limit is reached).

In this embodiment, when a time-saving hit occurs, the "Time-saving B mode" is granted for a period of "30 times," "40 times," or "50 times" of the variable display, so that "30," "40," or "50" is set as specific numerical information for the second variable count counter B when a time-saving hit occurs. This function constitutes the information setting function section in this embodiment.

In the following step SC1021, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1021, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1021, "11" indicating the "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1022. That is, the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display performed in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B is "30 times", "40 times", or "50 times". At this point, the "time-saving B mode" ends and the mode shifts to the "normal mode."

After step SC1022, in step SC1023, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this process ends. do.

Next, the second special display control process (step SC205) of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 136. In this embodiment, the second special symbol display device 43B is configured so that the variation interval of the second variable display is not set. Of course, the configuration may also be such that the variation interval of the second variable display is set.

First, in step SC1601, it is determined whether the value in the winning status storage area is "0", i.e., whether the state is other than a big win or a small win. If the determination in step SC1601 is negative, i.e., if the state is a big win or a small win, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC1601 is affirmative, step SC1603 determines whether the special pattern 2 display flag, which indicates that the second variable display is being performed on the second special pattern display device 43B, is set to on.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1603, that is, if the jackpot or small win is not in progress, and if the second variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SC1604, where the entry of the ball into the second starting winning section 33WB is the trigger. It is determined whether a second suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions in the second variable display is greater than zero. In other words, during the predetermined state until the value of the second hold counter Nb is subtracted and becomes "0", the display performance related to the second variable display will continue to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step SC1604, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC1604 is positive, then in the process of step SC1605, which serves as the update function unit or the subtraction function unit, 1 is subtracted from the second reserved counter Nb. In the following step SC1606, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second special variable reserved area. This data shift process is a process in which the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second special variable reserved area is shifted sequentially to the execution area side, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3.

After step SC1606, in step SC1607, a subtraction display process is performed on the second hold display device 46B (second hold lamp) corresponding to the hold number in the second variable display being reduced by one. In other words, a process is performed to turn off the second hold lamp. After step SC1607, in step SC1608, a second variable display setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, details of the second variable display setting process in step SC1608 will be explained with reference to FIG. 137.

First, in step SC1701, it is determined whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is "7", which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SC1701, by determining whether or not the jackpot schedule flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on, it is also possible to determine whether or not the second fluctuation display corresponds to a jackpot. good.

If the result of step SC1701 is positive, the special chart 2 jackpot variation flag, which indicates that the second variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed, is set to ON in step SC1702. In the following step SC1703, it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON in the execution area of the special variation pending area. If the result of step SC1703 is positive, the 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC1704.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1703, it is determined in step SC1705 whether or not the 8R jackpot flag is set on. If a positive determination is made in step SC1705, an 8R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC1706, and if a negative determination is made in step SC1705, a 4R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC1707.

As with the first variable display setting process described above, the various pattern setting process is a process for executing a variable display and a performance display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area in the second special symbol display device 43B and the performance display device 42, and here, taking into consideration the variable pattern table corresponding to each type of win, the variable pattern (variable display time, stop mode, performance pattern, etc.) of the second special symbol display device 43B and the performance display device 42 is determined, and the variable pattern command is set, etc.

In other words, in each pattern setting process related to step SC1704, step SC1706, and step SC1707, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table referenced when setting the second variable time, the second normal variable time determination table for the "normal mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. Also, if "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving A mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time-saving B mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected.

Then, the selected second variable time determination table is referenced, and the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable pending area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable pending area.

Then, various information including the fact that it is the second variation display, jackpot type information, game mode information, and variation time are set in the variation pattern command.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 42 is not configured to perform reach performance or the like corresponding to the second variable display. However, as described above, the value of the variable selection counter CC3 is stored in each reserve area of the second special variable reserve area in accordance with the winning history in the second start winning section 33WB, so the performance display device 42 may be configured to execute reach performance or the like corresponding to the second variable display, similar to the case corresponding to the first variable display. For example, the player may use the operating means to select whether or not to execute reach performance or the like.

After step SC1704, step SC1706, or step SC1707, in step SC1710, the special symbol 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is in progress on the second special symbol display device 43B is set to ON, and in step SC1711, the special symbol 2 displaying flag is set on. After setting a value corresponding to the second variable time to the special figure 2 display timer that measures the remaining time of the 2-variable display, this process is ended.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step SC1701, it is determined in step SC1712 whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a small win. . In addition, in step SC1712, by determining whether or not the small hit schedule flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation display corresponds to a small win. You can also use it as

If the result of the positive determination in step SC1712 is positive, in step SC1713, a small win fluctuation flag indicating that the second fluctuation display corresponding to the small win is being performed is set to ON. Then, in the following step SC1709, a small win pattern setting process (setting of a fluctuation pattern command, etc.) is performed, and then this process is terminated through steps SC1710 and SC1711. In the small win pattern setting process, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode memory area as the second fluctuation time determination table referred to when setting the second fluctuation time, the second normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to the small win pattern setting process is selected. Also, if "21" corresponding to "time-saving A mode" is stored in the mode memory area, the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving A mode" corresponding to the small win pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored in the mode memory area, the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to the small win pattern setting process is selected.

Then, with reference to the selected second variable time determination table, the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area. The determined second fluctuation time is stored in association with the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area. Furthermore, information including the second variable display, the variable pattern (small win), game mode information, and variable time is set in the variable pattern command.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step SC1712, it is determined in step SC1717 whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the time saving win. . In addition, in step SC1717, it is determined whether or not the time-saving winning schedule flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on, thereby determining whether or not the second variation display corresponds to the time-saving winning. You can also use it as

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1717, in step SC1718, a time-saving win fluctuation flag indicating that a second fluctuation display corresponding to a time-saving win is being performed is set to ON. Then, in the subsequent step SC1719, a time saving per pattern setting process (setting of variable pattern commands, etc.) is performed, and then this process is completed through steps SC1710 and step SC1711.

In the time saving per pattern setting process, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table that is referred to when setting the second variable time, the time saving pattern is set. A second normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to the winning pattern setting process is selected. In addition, when "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second reduction variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the time saving per pattern setting process is stored. selected. If "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second reduction variable time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the time saving per pattern setting process is selected. Ru.

Then, the selected second variation time determination table is referenced, and the second variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variation pending area. The determined second variation time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variation pending area. Furthermore, information indicating that it is the second variation display, the variation pattern (a time-saving hit), game mode information, and information including the variation time are set in the variation pattern command.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 136, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1603, that is, if the second variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SC1609, where the special figure 2 display timer is subtracted.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC1610, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the special figure 2 display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure 2 display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SC1610.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1610, a switching display setting is performed in step SC1615 to continue the switching display (second variable display) of the second special symbol display device 43B. In addition, based on the settings of the switching display settings, in the external output processing in the next normal process, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the second special symbol display device 43B. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the second special symbol display device 43B is realized at the timing of the second special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC1615, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC1610 is affirmative, the special symbol 2 display flag is turned off in step SC1611, and the special symbol 2 stop display setting is performed in step SC1612 to display a stop on the second special symbol display device 43B. Based on the setting contents of this special symbol 2 stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop is output to the second special symbol display device 43B in the external output process in the next normal process. In other words, the second special symbol display device 43B displays a stop corresponding to the various big wins, small wins, various time-saving wins, misses, etc., set in the second variable display setting process.

Further, after step SC1612, in step SC1613, a special figure 2 stop command is set for the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to stop display. Thereby, synchronization of the stop timings of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 is ensured.

Next, in step SC1614, a special chart 2 discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning status and the game mode switching setting, and then this process ends.

The special chart 2 discrimination information setting process in step SC1614 will now be described with reference to FIG. 138. First, in step SC1801, the execution area of the special variation pending area is referenced to determine whether or not the small win variation flag is set to on. If a positive determination is made in step SC1801, the small win variation flag is turned off in step SC1802, and a small win in progress flag indicating that a small win state is in progress is turned on in step SC1803. Furthermore, in step SC1804, "2" is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed in the small win state (the number of times the second variable winning device 32B is opened).

In the following step SC1805, "4" is set in the winning situation storage area, indicating that the first round of a small winning state is in progress. Further, in step SC1806, it is determined whether the value stored in the mode storage area is "21". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1806, that is, in the case of the "time saving A mode" (in the case of high ball entry state), in step SC1807, control during the winning state (opening/closing control of variable winning devices 32A, 32B) ) is set to a value "400" corresponding to an open period of 1.6 seconds. On the other hand, if the determination at step SC1806 is negative (if the ball is in a low ball entry state), then at step SC1808, a value "25" corresponding to an open time of 0.1 seconds is set for the special variable timer.

After step SC1807 or step SC1808, in step SC1809, the second winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 32B is set to "4", which indicates the maximum number of balls that can enter per round, which is four.

The value of the second winning counter is determined by determining whether or not a ball has entered the second variable winning device 32B based on the detection information of the ball entering count switch 223a during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125). , 1 is subtracted when it is determined that a ball has entered the second variable winning device 32B.

Then, in step SC1810, a second opening process is performed to open the second variable winning device 32B.

Furthermore, in step SC1811, a process of subtracting the variation counter is performed. In this embodiment, since there is no change in the game mode just by winning a small win, if the "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" is set, the change in the small win will be changed by this subtraction process. Even when the display ends, processing is performed to reduce the remaining number of continuations of "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" by one.

The decrement process of the fluctuation counter is skipped if the current game mode is "normal mode" (if "11" is stored in the mode memory area).

In other words, in this process of subtracting the number of fluctuations counter, first check whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the current gaming mode is "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode". Only when the determination is affirmative, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the variation counter (first variation counter A or second variation counter B) is executed.

In the next step SC1812, a small win start command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of the start of the small win state. After that, this process ends. This small win start command includes various information related to the small win (for example, the type of jackpot when a V jackpot state occurs), etc., so that the sub-controller 262 can also grasp the progress of the small win state.

When a negative determination is made in step SC1801, the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area is referred to in step SC1813, and it is determined whether the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1813, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1814, and in step SC1815, the jackpot flag (stored in the second special fluctuation holding area) indicating that the jackpot is in the state is turned off. Turn on the special figure 2 jackpot flag (indicating that you hit the jackpot in the second variable display).

In the subsequent step SC1816, a process for determining the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the first variable winning device 32A is opened) is performed by referring to various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. Set values corresponding to various jackpots in the round number counter.

For example, when the 15R jackpot flag is set on, the round number counter is set to "15". If the 8R jackpot flag is set on, the round number counter is set to "8". When the 4R jackpot flag is set on, "4" is set in the round number counter.

Thereafter, in step SC1817, "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1818, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set in the special variable timer. Subsequently, in step SC1819, "8" is set for the first winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32A. Then, in step SC1820, an opening command is set, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC1813, in step SC1821, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the time saving per fluctuation flag is set on.

If the result of step SC1821 is affirmative, the time-saving per-play fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1822, and the value "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is set in the mode memory area in step SC1823. This causes the game mode to be internally switched from "normal mode" to "time-saving B mode."

In the following step SC1824, a value corresponding to the won time-saving winning type is set for the second fluctuation number counter B used to measure the duration of the "time-saving B mode" (remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit). .

In detail, if you take into account the various time-saving winning schedule flags set in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and win the "30 time-saving winnings", the value of the second fluctuation number counter B will be set to "30". If you win the "40 time saving win", set the value of the second variation counter B to "40", and if you win the "50 time saving win", set the value of the second variation counter B to "40". Set the value of B to "50".

After that, this process ends. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that, at this stage, no command or the like to generate the "time-saving B mode" is sent to the sub-control device 262. In other words, at this stage, the effect display device 42 or the like is configured to have a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the "time saving B mode" has been provided without performing any effect related to the "time saving B mode".

If the result of step SC1821 is negative, step SC1827 determines whether "21" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current game mode is "time-saving A mode."

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1827, in step SC1828, the value of the first fluctuation number counter A used to measure the duration of the "time saving A mode" (remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit) is subtracted by 1. do.

Note that the first variation counter A in this embodiment also measures the remaining execution period of the second variation display (remaining pending consumption period, maximum 4 times) that is stored on hold at the end of the "time saving A mode". used.

In the next step SC1829, it is determined whether the value of the first change count counter A is "0". If the result of step SC1829 is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1829, "11" indicating the "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1830. That is, when the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display performed on the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B becomes "1 time" or "7 times" The "time saving mode A" ends and the mode shifts to the "normal mode".

After step SC1830, in step SC1831, it is determined whether the value of the second pending counter Nb is greater than "0". In other words, it is determined whether the second variable display is reserved and stored in the second special variable pending area.

If a negative judgment is made in step SC1831, i.e., if the second change display is not reserved in the second special change reservation area, in step SC1832, a "time-saving A mode" end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of a transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1831, that is, if the second variation display is pending in the second special variation pending area, the process moves to step SC1833, and the current 2. Set the value of the hold counter Nb (the number of holds of the second variable display stored in the current second special change hold area, 4 at the maximum). As a result, a period (number of variable display times) during which the "continuation chance stage performance" is continuously performed is set.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the "continuation chance stage performance" corresponds to the "specific performance", and the function of the sub-control device 262 that executes the "continuation chance stage performance" constitutes a "performance execution function section". In addition, in this embodiment, the remaining pending consumption period until the value of the first fluctuation number counter A is subtracted and becomes the specific value "0" corresponds to "in a predetermined state", and during this period, the "continuation chance" The function of the sub-control device 262 that continuously executes the "stage performance" constitutes a "continuation function section."

In the following step SC1834, the production start setting process related to the "continuation chance stage production" is performed (for example, setting a production start command for causing the sub-control device 262 to execute the "continuation chance stage production"), and then the main processing is performed. Finish the process.

If the result of step SC1827 is negative, step SC1835 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current game mode is "time-saving B mode."

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1835, the value of the second variation counter B is subtracted by 1 in step SC1836 (after the duration of the time-saving B mode is internally updated), and then the process moves to step SC1837. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1835, the process directly proceeds to step SC1837. In this embodiment, the processing function for subtracting the second variation counter B constitutes an "update function section".

In step SC1837, it is determined whether the value of the first fluctuation count counter A is greater than 0, i.e., whether the "continuation chance stage presentation" is in progress, regardless of whether the current game mode is "normal mode" or "time-saving B mode." If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step SC1837, the value of the first fluctuation count counter A is decremented by 1 in step SC1838, and the process proceeds to step SC1839.

In step SC1839, it is determined whether the value of the first change count counter A is "0". If the result of step SC1839 is negative, this process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SC1839, i.e., if it is time to end the "continuation chance stage presentation", a presentation end setting process related to the "continuation chance stage presentation" (such as setting a presentation end command to the sub-control device 262 to end the "continuation chance stage presentation") is performed, and then this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the first counting function unit is constituted by the first fluctuation count counter A and various functions related thereto, and the second counting function unit is constituted by the second fluctuation count counter B and various functions related thereto.

In addition, in this embodiment, the end of the second variable display of the second special pattern display device 43B corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition, and the subtraction function section is constituted by a processing function that subtracts the first variable count counter A.

Next, the variable winning device control process of step SC207 for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 139.

First, in step SC1201, it is determined whether the value set in the winning status storage area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the game is in a state other than the winning state. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1201, that is, if there is no winning state, the process is immediately terminated. By the way, at the start of the jackpot state or the small win state, "1" or "4" is set in the winning situation storage area in the above-mentioned special figure 1 discrimination information setting process and special figure 2 discrimination information setting process. There is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1201, that is, if the winning state is in progress (if any of "1" to "6" is set in the winning status storage area), the process moves to step SC1202, Subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. In the following step SC1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1203, it is determined in step SC1204 whether or not "1" is set in the winning situation storage area.

If the result of step SC1204 is positive, then in step SC1205, the winning status memory area is set to "2". In the following step SC1206, the special variable timer is set to a value of "7500", which corresponds to the time (30 seconds) that the first variable winning device 32A is to remain open.

After step SC1206, in step SC1207, a first opening process is performed to open the first variable winning device 32A, and in step SC1208, a round command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that a round is about to begin. Then, this process ends.

If the result of step SC1204 is negative, step SC1209 determines whether or not "5" is set in the win status memory area. In this embodiment, "5" is set in the win status memory area during the interval period between the first round and the second round in the small win state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1209, it is determined in step SC1210 whether or not "3" is set in the winning situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period begins, "3" will be set in the winning situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step SC1210, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, it is determined in step SC1211 whether or not "6" is set in the winning situation storage area. In this embodiment, "6" is set in the winning situation storage area in the second round of the small winning state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1211, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step SC1212. In the following step SC1213, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, it is determined in step SC1214 whether "4" is set in the winning situation storage area. In this embodiment, "4" is set in the winning situation storage area in the first round of the small winning state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1214, that is, if "2" is set in the winning situation storage area, the process moves to step SC1215, and "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Thereafter, in step SC1216, a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer.

In the following step SC1217, "8" is set for the first winning counter. Further, in step SC1218, a first closing process is performed to close the first variable winning device 32A, and in step SC1219, an interval command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start an interval. After that, this process ends.

If the result of step SC1214 is affirmative, i.e., the first round of the small win state has ended, then in step SC1220, the win status memory area is set to "5". Then, in step SC1221, the special variable timer is set to a value of "25", which corresponds to the interval time (0.1 seconds).

In the following step SC1222, "4" is set for the second winning counter. Furthermore, in step SC1223, a second closing process is performed to close the second variable winning device 32B, and then this process ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SC1203, that is, if there is still time (open time or closed time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B, , the process moves to step SC1224, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c provided in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B. Although details will be described later, in this process, a specific winning flag that is set to ON when detection is performed by the specific ball entering detection switch 223b that detects a game ball entering the specific ball entering section 320c is set to ON. By determining whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1224, in step SC1225, the winning counters corresponding to the variable winning devices 32A and 32B in the current winning state (the first winning counter if in the jackpot state, or the first winning counter if in the small winning state) In this case, it is determined whether the value of the second prize winning counter) is "0" or not. As mentioned above, each winning counter has an upper limit for the number of winnings per round (the specified number of ``8'' or ``4'') at the start of the winning state or the start of the interval. Set. Then, each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32A, 32B, 1 is subtracted.

If the result of step SC1225 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SC1225 is positive, i.e., if the trigger for ending the round occurs without waiting for the set period of the round to elapse, the process proceeds to step SC1211. As a result, if the game balls enter the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B up to the upper limit (8 or 4 balls) during one round, the round will end promptly at that point even if the upper limit of the opening period (30 seconds, 1.6 seconds, or 0.1 seconds) has not yet elapsed.

If the result of step SC1224 is affirmative, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs when the game ball enters the specific winning section 320c during a small winning state, then in step SC1226, specific winning processing is performed to continue the jackpot state, and then this processing ends. Details of the specific winning processing will be described later.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1213, that is, if all rounds in the jackpot state have been played, the process moves to step SC1227, and "3" is set in the winning situation storage area. Thereafter, in step SC1228, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer.

After step SC1228, in step SC1229, "7" is set for the first winning counter. In addition, when the process of setting the ending after step SC1227 is performed after the affirmative determination is made in step SC1225, the value of the first prize winning counter is "0". If the value of the first winning counter is set to "0" at the start of the ending period, in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, an affirmative determination will suddenly be made in step SC1225, making it impossible to complete the ending period. Can not. Therefore, by entering a temporary value other than "0" ("7" in this example) into the first prize winning counter in step SC1229, the ending period is made to complete. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step SC1229, in step SC1230, a first closing process is performed to close the first variable winning device 32A, and in the following step SC1231, an ending command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an ending has started. Then, this process is terminated.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC1210, that is, when the ending period has ended and the time has come to end the jackpot state, the process moves to step SC1232 and an end setting process is performed.

The end setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. 141. First, in step SC1401, it is determined whether or not a jackpot flag (either the special chart 1 jackpot flag, the special chart 2 jackpot flag, or the V prize jackpot flag described below) is set to on. If a positive determination is made in step SC1401, in step SC1403, the value "21" corresponding to the "time-saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area. This means that the "time-saving A mode" is granted after the jackpot state ends.

In the next step SC1404, a time-saving A mode start command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 to start the "time-saving A mode" (transition to the "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect"). The sub-control device 262 as an effect execution function unit may be configured to execute a rush stage effect or a battle stage effect as a specific effect. After step SC1404, in step SC1407, a jackpot mid-flag that is set to on (either the special chart 1 jackpot mid-flag, the special chart 2 jackpot mid-flag, or the V prize jackpot mid-flag) is turned off.

In the next step SC1408, the value "0" is set in the winning status storage area, indicating that the state is not a winning state. Furthermore, in step SC1409, a jackpot end command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is ending. After that, in step SC1410, the first fluctuation count counter A is set to the fluctuation count value "1" or "7" which is the upper limit of the "time-saving A mode" corresponding to the jackpot type, and then this process is terminated.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1401, that is, if it is a small winning state, in step SC1411, a ball entry counter that counts the number of game balls existing in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is set. , and determines whether or not the number of game balls present in the internal area 320a is "0".

If the result of step SC1411 is positive, the small win in progress flag is turned off in step SC1412, the win status memory area is set to "0" in step SC1413, and a small win end command is set in step SC1414 to inform the sub-control device 262 that the small win state is ending.

Thereafter, in step SC1415, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". In addition, the duration of the "time saving A mode" is until the first variable display and the second variable display are performed "1 time" or "7 times" in total, or until a jackpot condition occurs. , when the second fluctuation display corresponding to the small win ends and the small win starts, the value of the first fluctuation number counter A is decremented by 1 (see step SC1811). In step SC1415, it is determined whether the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the "time saving A mode" has been reached ("1 time" or "7 times" has ended).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1415, a value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1416, and a time saving A mode end command is set in step SC1417. This process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1415, it is determined in step SC1420 whether or not the value of the second variation counter B is "0". In addition, the duration of "Time Saving B Mode" is until the first variable display and the second variable display are performed "30", "40" or "50 times" in total, or until a jackpot condition occurs. Therefore, when the second fluctuation display corresponding to the small win ends and the small win starts, the value of the second fluctuation number counter B is decremented by 1 (see step SC1811). In step SC1420, it is determined whether the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the "time saving B mode" has been reached ("30", "40" or "50" has ended).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1420, a value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1421, and a time-saving B mode end command is set in step SC1422. This process ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SC1411, in step SC1418, the remaining ball monitoring flag is set to ON to continue monitoring the game balls in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B, and then the main processing end. In other words, if there are game balls remaining in the internal area 320a, the small winning state is configured not to end even when the small winning state (second round) ends.

Here, the remaining ball monitoring process (step SC307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125) will be explained with reference to FIG. 142.

First, in step SC1301, whether or not a game ball has entered the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is determined based on the detection information of the ball entry count switch 223a installed near the ball entry opening 320b of the internal area 320a. If a positive determination is made in step SC1301, in step SC1302, the value of the ball entry counter that counts the game balls present in the internal area 320a is incremented by 1.

In the following step SC1303, the monitoring timer used for the remaining ball monitoring process is set to a predetermined time period that is enough to make it obvious that the game ball detected by the entering ball count switch 223a has been ejected from the internal area 320a. Set the value corresponding to . In this embodiment, the game ball that enters the internal area 320a is configured so that it does not take more than 2 seconds to be ejected from the internal area 320a unless there is a problem, and in step SC1303, the monitoring timer is "750" corresponding to seconds is set.

After step SC1303, or if a negative judgment is made in step SC1301, in step SC1304, it is judged whether or not a game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c based on the detection information of the specific ball entry detection switch 223b. If a positive judgment is made in step SC1304, in step SC1305, the specific winning flag is set to ON. In the following step SC1306, the value of the ball entry counter is decremented by 1.

After step SC1306, or if a negative determination is made in step SC1304, in step SC1307, whether or not a game ball has entered the non-specific ball entry section 320d is determined based on the detection information of the non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c. Determine based on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1307, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step SC1308.

After step SC1308, or if a negative judgment is made in step SC1307, in step SC1309, it is judged whether the value of the ball entry counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step SC1309, in step SC1310, it is judged whether the value of the monitoring timer is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step SC1310, in step SC1311, the value of the monitoring timer is decremented by 1, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1310, that is, even if all the game balls are supposed to have been ejected from the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B, there are still game balls remaining. If it is determined, error processing is performed in step SC1312 (for example, turning on the error display lamp 104, displaying an error on the data lamp, notifying the hall computer, etc.), and then the process ends.

If the determination in step SC1309 is affirmative, it is determined in step SC1313 whether or not a remaining ball monitoring flag, which may be set when ending the small winning state, is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step SC1313, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1313 is affirmative, the remaining ball monitoring flag is turned off in step SC1314. In the following step SC1315, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag (V winning jackpot flag) is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1315, that is, if a game ball enters the specific ball entering section 320c in a small winning state and a V winning jackpot has occurred, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1315, since the process to end the small winning state has not been performed yet, the small winning flag is turned off in step SC1316, and the winning situation storage area is stored in step SC1317. "0" is stored, and a small winning end command is set in step SC1318.

Thereafter, in step SC1319, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1319, a value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1320, and a time-saving A mode end command is set in step SC1321. This process ends.

On the other hand, if the answer is negative in step SC1319, then in step SC1325 it is determined whether the value of the second fluctuation count counter B is "0". If the answer is positive in step SC1325, then in step SC1326 the value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode memory area, and in step SC1327 a time-saving B mode end command is set, and then this process ends. Also, if the answer is negative in step SC1325, then this process ends as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the variable winning device control process in FIG. 139, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1209, that is, if the interval period after the end of the first round in the small winning state has ended, in step SC1233, the winning situation is stored. A value "6" corresponding to the second round of the small winning state is set for the area, and in step SC1234, a value corresponding to the open time of the second variable winning device 32B is set for the special variable timer. Here, if the game mode is "time saving A mode", set the value "400" corresponding to the opening time "1.6 seconds", and if the game mode is "normal mode" or "time saving B mode" In this case, the value "25" corresponding to the open time "0.1 seconds" is set. Furthermore, in step SC1235, a second opening process is performed to open the second variable prize winning device 32B, and then this process ends.

Also, if the result of step SC1211 is positive, i.e., if the second round (final round) of the small win state has ended, then in step SC1236, a second closing process is performed to close the second variable winning device 32B. After that, in step SC1232, a closing setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, in step SC1224 of the variable winning device control process (FIG. 139), a specific winning flag is determined to be set on, which indicates that a ball has entered the specific ball entering section 320c. The winning process (step SC1226) will be explained with reference to FIG. 140.

First, in step SC1901, the specific winning flag is turned off. In the following step SC1902, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set to on (in this example, if two game balls enter the specific ball entry section 320c in succession during a small winning state, the V-winning jackpot flag may be set to on). If the determination in step SC1902 is affirmative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC1902 is negative, then in step SC1903, a second closing process is performed to close the second variable winning device 32B. Furthermore, in step SC1904, the small win flag is turned off, and in step SC1905, the big win flag (V winning big win flag) is turned on. In other words, if a game ball enters the specific ball entry section 320c during a small win state, the small win state is immediately ended and the big win state is started.

Thereafter, in step SC1906, a round number counter setting process is performed in which a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the round number counter. In this process, first, a jackpot type determination process is performed. In the jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type determination process takes into consideration the second type determination table used in the second type determination process in step SC507, and is acquired based on the ball entering the specific ball entering section 320c of the second variable winning device 32B. The value of the type determination counter CC2 is any of the values "0 to 7" corresponding to "15R jackpot", "8 to 17" corresponding to "8R jackpot", and "18, 19" corresponding to "4R jackpot". , and determine the type of jackpot.

Then, the number of rounds corresponding to the determined big win type is set in the round number counter. However, in this embodiment, since the small win state corresponds to the first round, the remaining number of rounds is set in the round number counter.

For example, if the determined jackpot type is "15R jackpot", the round number counter is set to "14", and if it is "8R jackpot", the round number counter is set to "7", and "4R jackpot" is set to "7". If it is a jackpot, the round number counter is set to 3.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second variable winning device 32B, which is in an open state after winning a small prize, and enters the specific ball entry section 320c, the first variable winning device 32A continues to be in an open state from the second round onwards, resulting in a big win state. Therefore, if the small win state ends without a game ball entering the specific ball entry section 320c, the big win state is not granted, and the game mode is not changed after the big win state.

After step SC1906, in step SC1909, "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1910, "500" is set to the special variable timer, which corresponds to an opening period for teaching the occurrence of a jackpot state. Thereafter, in step SC1911, "8" is set in the first winning counter, and in step SC1912, a V winning jackpot state occurs for the sub-control device 262 when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section 320c. After setting a specific winning command that tells the player to do so, this process ends.

Next, the normal display control process in step SC208 of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 143.

First, in step SC2101, it is determined whether the value of the regular pattern interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 is "0". do. If a negative determination is made in step SC2101, that is, if it is a general pattern interval, the value of the general pattern interval timer is subtracted in step SC2116, and then this process is ended. In other words, for example, if the general pattern interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the general pattern interval timer is set to "249 ("250" if the configuration is such that step SC2116 is performed before step SC2101)" In this process, the value of the regular pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC2101 is positive, i.e., if it is not the normal interval period, then in step SC2102, it is determined whether or not the support period flag, which indicates that the second start winning section 33WB (blade member 33WBb) is in the middle of opening and closing control, is set to on. If the result of step SC2102 is positive, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC2102 is negative, then in step SC2103, it is determined whether a normal pattern display flag, which indicates whether a changing display is in progress on the normal pattern display device 41, is on. If the normal pattern display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is in progress on the normal pattern display device 41.

If a negative determination is made in step SC2103, the process proceeds to step SC2104, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step SC2104, that is, if no variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 is pending, the process is immediately terminated. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step SC2104, a standby display setting is performed in the normal symbol display device 41 to derive a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which a variable display is not performed. You can also use it as In other words, after the normal pattern display device 41 stops changing, its stop mode is maintained during the normal pattern interval period (in a mode that shows the result of the starting ball support lottery), but the normal pattern display device 41 is maintained during the normal pattern interval period. When the process is finished, the display mode may be changed to indicate the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in the process of step SC2105, which serves as an update function section or a subtraction function section. In the following step SC2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step SC2107, a normal pattern fluctuation setting process is executed to set and start the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41.

Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 144. First, in step SC2301, a normal symbol displaying flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 41 is set on. In the following step SC2302, the winning status storage area is referred to and it is determined whether "0" is stored, that is, whether the current state is other than the winning state. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2302, that is, if there is no winning state, then in step SC2303, it is determined whether or not a value of "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)". ”.

If the result of step SC2303 is positive, then in step SC2304, the normal pattern display timer, which measures the time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the normal pattern display device 41, is set to "100" to set the normal pattern variable display time to 0.4 seconds.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2302 or step SC2303, that is, if it is in a winning state or if it is not in a high ball hit state, in step SC2307, the normal symbol display timer is set to display the variable display time of the normal symbol. Set "1500" to make it 6 seconds.

After that, in step SC2305, it is determined whether the normal pattern random number counter CC4 in the execution area of the normal variable pending area is the winning value ("0, 1" in the "low ball entry state" and "0 to 27" in the "high ball entry state"). If the determination in step SC2305 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC2305 is positive, i.e., if the start-going ball support lottery for deciding whether or not to open the second start-going ball section 33WB is won, then in step SC2306, a ball-going ball support flag is set to ON, indicating that the start-going ball support lottery has been won. After step SC2306, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 143, after step SC2107, in step SC2108, a subtraction display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the hold number of the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are flashing, the right normal hold lamp is turned on while the left normal hold lamp is flashing, if the left normal hold lamp is flashing and the right normal hold lamp is turned on, both left and right normal hold lamps are turned on, if both left and right normal hold lamps are turned on, the right normal hold lamp is turned off while the left normal hold lamp is turned on, and if the left normal hold lamp is turned on and the right normal hold lamp is turned off, processing is performed to turn off both left and right normal hold lamps. After step SC2108, this process is terminated.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC2103, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display, the process proceeds to step SC2109, and a process of subtracting the normal symbol display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the regular figure display timer is decremented by 1.

The process then proceeds to step SC2110, where it is determined whether the count value of the regular figure display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC2110, the normal symbol displaying flag is turned off in step SC2111, and in step SC2112, a normal symbol stop display setting is performed for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41. In other words, if you win the starting ball entry support lottery (if the entry support flag is set to on), both the left and right normal symbol lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are lit, and if you win, lights up only the left general lamp.

Subsequently, the process advances to step SC2113, where ordinary figure discrimination information setting processing is performed. Here, the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 145.

First, in step SC2401, it is determined whether or not the winning support flag is set to ON. If the result of step SC2401 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SC2401 is YES, in step SC2402, the normal variable flag is set to ON to determine whether or not the second start winning section 33WB is in the open state.

In the following step SC2403, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is the "time saving A mode (high ball entry state)". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2403, in step SC2404, the open time of the second start winning part 33WB is set to 1 for the normal variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start winning part 33WB. .Set "450" to make it 8 seconds.

Furthermore, in step SC2405, the opening count counter, which counts the number of times (remaining number of times) the second start winning section 33WB is opened, is set to "2" so that the second start winning section 33WB is opened twice.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2403, that is, if it is not the "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)", in step SC2406, the open time of the second start winning part 33WB is set to 0. Set "50" to make it 2 seconds. Subsequently, in step SC2407, the opening number counter is set to "2" in order to open the second starting winning part 33WB twice.

After step SC2405 or after step SC2407, the entry support flag is turned off in step SC2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step SC2409. Furthermore, in step SC2410, the second starting winning part 33WB is set to be in an open state, and then this process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 143, after step SC2113, in step SC2114, the GPIO interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the GPIO interval period (e.g., 1 second), and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC2110, in step SC2115, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display (switching display in which a pair of left and right normal symbol lamps are alternately lit) of the normal symbol display device 41. I do. In addition, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC2115, this process ends.

Next, the start prize section control process of step SC209 of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 146.

First, in step SC2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step SC2201, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2201, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step SC2202.

In the next step SC2203, it is determined whether the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If the determination is negative in step SC2203, that is, if it is the period during which the second start winning section 33WB is to be kept open or closed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2203, it is determined in step SC2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2204, that is, if the second starting winning part 33WB is currently in the open state and the timing to close it has arrived, the normal variable flag is turned off in step SC2205. In the following step SC2206, the value of the opening number counter is subtracted by 1, and in step SC2207, the second starting winning part 33WB is set to be in the closed state.

Thereafter, in step SC2208, it is determined whether the value of the open count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2208, the support period flag is turned off in step SC2209, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC2208 is negative, i.e., if there are remaining times among the multiple times the second start winning section 33WB has been opened, then in step SC2210 a value equivalent to the interval time (e.g., "250") is set for the normal variable timer, and then this process is terminated.

Also, if the result of step SC2204 is negative, that is, if the second start winning section 33WB is in an interval period during which it is opened multiple times (the second start winning section 33WB is in a closed state) and the timing for ending the interval period has arrived, the normal variable flag is set to ON in step SC2211. Furthermore, in step SC2212, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode memory area. If the result of step SC2212 is positive, in step SC2213, the normal variable timer is set to a value of "450" corresponding to an opening time of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, if the result of step SC2212 is negative, in step SC2214, the normal variable timer is set to a value of "50" corresponding to an opening time of 0.2 seconds.

After step SC2213 or step SC2214, in step SC2215, the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state. Then, this process ends. Note that if the second start winning section 33WB is set to the open state and a specified number of game balls (e.g., four balls) enter the second start winning section 33WB, the second start winning section 33WB may be configured to immediately close.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to FIG. 147, and then explain the main processing with reference to FIG. 148.

Figure 147 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt processing is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311 is temporarily put on hold, and the reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the reception interrupt process is executed, first in step SC3001, the command sent from the main control unit 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step SC3002, the command reception flag is turned on to record that a command has been sent from the main control unit 261, and this reception interrupt process is terminated. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated to store the next received command in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process of the command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 149, before the command determination process (step SC3201) is performed, it may be confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command may be stored in the command buffer of RAM 513 and the command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started when the power is turned on and reset.

First, in step SC3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SC3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SC3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step SC3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SC3107, and in the following step SC3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, it is determined whether the backup is valid or not. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power outage information is not set in step SC3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (e.g., checksum value) in step SC3108, the process proceeds to initialization of RAM 513 in step SC3115 and subsequent steps.

In step SC3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SC3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step SC3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SC3114, where interrupts are permitted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information has been set in step SC3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SC3108, processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored in step SC3109, the power failure occurrence information is cleared in step SC3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step SC3111. Furthermore, in step SC3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SC3113, the registers in use are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SC3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SC3114, in the process of step SC3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step SC3123 onwards is performed as power outage processing at the time of power-off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SC3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step SC3124. Thereafter, in step SC3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SC3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SC3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and RAM access is prohibited in step SC3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step SC3122, information on the occurrence of power-off is confirmed after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, the timer interrupt process of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 149. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and a determination process for the command is performed (step SC3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 150.

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing the command determination process performed by the dispensing control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SC3124, SC3201), it is first determined in step SC3301 whether or not the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 147).

If it is determined in step SC3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SC3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step SC3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SC3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SC3303, the processing of steps SC3302 to SC3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing from step SC3304 to step SC3306. In step SC3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SC3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SC3306, it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SC3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step SC3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step SC3309. Thereafter, in step SC3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 performs initialization processing of RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command, so the timing at which RAM 503 and the timing at which RAM 513 are initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as the RAM 513 being initialized and being unable to perform control corresponding to the received command. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step SC3307, the command judgment process is terminated without clearing the working area of RAM513 and initializing RAM513. That is, the process of step SC3307 prohibits the initialization of RAM513 with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received with the payout permission flag on. In such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the payout permission flag is on and the working area of RAM513 is cleared (step SC3308) and the initial value setting of RAM513 (step SC3309) is executed, a disadvantage such as not being paid out when there are remaining winning balls occurs, causing a loss to the player, but since the initialization of RAM513 is prevented with the payout permission flag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SC3304: NO, step SC3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step SC3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SC3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step SC3305: NO, step SC3306: YES), in step SC3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step SC3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to allow the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a specified buffer area, and stores it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command sent from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. In addition, when a prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the payout of prize balls can be performed early for a winning prize. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SC3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SC3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SC3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SC3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Now, let us return to the flowchart in FIG. 149 for further explanation. Once the command determination process is complete, in step SC3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected has been received from the CR unit connection board 314. If a positive determination is made in step SC3202, in step SC3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is sent to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310.

After step SC3203, or if a negative determination is made in step SC3202, it is determined in step SC3204 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step SC3205, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step SC3206, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray 15 is set. Execute the setting for the plate full release state. Further, in step SC3207, a tank ball no state (ball out state) or a tank ball no state released state (ball present state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state and the no-tank-bulb release state are performed. Run the settings.

Thereafter, in step SC3208, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step SC3209, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step SC3210, and a motor drive process is performed in step SC3211.

In step SC3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step SC3213, the vibrator is controlled (vibration motor control) on the condition that the ball is jammed. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. First, in step SC3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the command sent from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step SC3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

Note that the ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area is It is configured to return to the starting point and update the command. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the next step SC3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the information of the advance command output from the main control unit 261 in a pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control unit 262. As described above, the advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB, information indicating whether the variable information corresponds to a big win or a small win, information indicating the type of big win, information indicating the type of reach, game mode information for identifying the game mode at the start of the variable display, and information indicating the variable time.

The pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262 includes a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area each having four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4), similar to the special variable pending areas (first special variable pending area and second special variable pending area) of the main controller 261, and one execution area.

In the first pending information storage area, information (variation information) on the variable display such as information on whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot type, the reach pattern, the game mode information, and the variable time is stored in chronological order in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area). In addition, in the second pending information storage area, information (variation information) on the variable display such as information on whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot type, the information on whether or not it is a small win, the information on whether or not it is a time-saving win, the game mode information, and the variable time is stored in chronological order in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reserve and store the variable information on the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning section 33WA and the variable information on the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, respectively. As a result, the sub-controller 262 is able to grasp not only the execution area of the special variable pending area of the main controller 261, but also the variable information stored in each pending area of the first and second special variable pending areas.

Here, the pending information storage process will be explained with reference to FIG. 154. First, in step SC4101, it is determined whether the preceding command of the first variable display has been received (whether or not the preceding command of the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4101, in step SC4102, a first variable pending counter Nd that counts the number of pending changes in the variable information stored in the first pending information storage area is incremented by one.

In the next step SC4103, the information included in the starting command as to whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the reach pattern, the game mode information, the first variable time information, etc. are stored in the first of the available reserved areas in the first reserved information storage area.

Then, in the next step SC4104, a preview information storage process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, there are cases where a performance display related to each other is intentionally derived in multiple consecutive variable displays (so-called "consecutive previews" are performed). Here, the value of a consecutive preview counter for determining whether or not to perform a consecutive preview, and the value of a preview type counter for determining the type of consecutive preview are obtained, and the counter values are stored in the reserved area of the first reserved information storage area where the variable information was newly stored in step SC4103 above.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 49, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 49). The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer).

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

In the notice information storage process, when the fluctuation information is stored in the pending information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, each suspension area and execution area of the suspension information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice will be derived.

Further, in this embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into account when deciding whether or not to give continuous notices, and a notice table that is taken into account when determining the form of continuous notices. A plurality of advance notice adequacy determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice appropriateness determination table and advance notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step SC4104, in step SC4105, a continuous notice lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute continuous notices. In the continuous notice lottery process in step SC4105, it is checked whether there is a reservation area in which the continuous notice flag has already been set to ON. Therefore, in the case where the existence of the holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and furthermore, in the case where only the fluctuation information corresponding to a complete failure (missing without a reach state) is stored in the first holding area, , a continuous preview lottery will be held. On the other hand, if the existence of a reservation area with a continuous notice flag set is confirmed, the continuous notice lottery will not be held.

In the continuous notice lottery process in step SC4105, if the value of the first variable pending counter Nd is "2" or more, the system refers to the notice win/loss judgment table (those corresponding to a big win are more likely to win than those corresponding to a miss) corresponding to each big win type, reach pattern, and game mode based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area, and decides whether to execute a continuous notice. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a continuous notice, the system refers to the notice table corresponding to the big win type, reach pattern, and game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area, and decides whether to execute a continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all pending areas in which variable information is stored among the pending areas in the first pending information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag for the execution area is not turned on.

After step SC4105, in step SC4106, a hold icon setting process is performed to additionally display one hold icon, which is a specific corresponding display indicating that the first variable display is held and stored on the effect display device 42. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a hold icon H461 (see FIG. 159, etc.) resembling a "floating ring" is displayed on the effect display device 42. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the second variable display is not displayed.

The reserved icon H461 may be derived in a manner that suggests the jackpot probability of the corresponding first variable display. Hereinafter, the reserved icon H461 in such a manner is also referred to as a "pre-reading reserved icon H463". The pre-reading reserved icon H463 of this embodiment (see FIG. 159, etc.) is derived in a manner in which the character is using a "lifebuoy". Furthermore, multiple types of characters are prepared for the pre-reading reserved icon H463, and the pattern of the pre-reading reserved icon H463 is associated with the probability of winning (jackpot probability) for the occurrence of a jackpot state. As a result, the pre-reading reserved icon H463 is ranked in terms of jackpot probability depending on its manner, and is configured to suggest the jackpot probability by deriving the pre-reading reserved icon H463 (performing a pre-reading reserved notice performance).

In addition, when the pre-reading hold icon H463 is derived, the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463 may change (a hold change effect may be derived) until the first variable display corresponding to the pre-reading hold icon H463 is consumed. That is, in the hold icon setting process of step SC4106, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to derive the pre-reading hold icon H463, and in the case of a non-winning result, the pattern of the hold icon H461 is determined to be the default (only a lifebuoy). On the other hand, in the case of a winning result, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a hold change effect, and in the case of a winning result, the hold change flag of the corresponding hold area is set to ON, and as the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463, an upper limit pattern that may be displayed eventually and a provisional pattern that has a lower expectation of a jackpot (low rank) than the upper limit pattern and is displayed initially are determined. Note that the provisional pattern may be configured to have an option of initially only displaying the default hold icon H461. On the other hand, in the case of a non-winning result, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the pre-reading hold icon H463.

Basically, the hold icons H461 of the determined pattern are displayed so as to be lined up to the right of the rightmost one of the hold icons H461 displayed in the hold display area HW3 of the effect display device 42. Such processing is performed. Further, in this embodiment, in step SC4106, when the prefetch pending icon H463 is derived in the pending display area HW3, the prefetch pending performance flag is set to on.

After step SC4106, or if a negative judgment is made in step SC4101, in step SC4107, it is judged whether or not a first command for the second variable display has been received (whether or not the first command for the second variable display has been stored in the command buffer of RAM553). If a negative judgment is made in step SC4107, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step SC4107, in step SC4108, the second variable pending counter Ne, which counts the number of pending second variable information stored in the second pending information storage area, is incremented by 1.

After that, in step SC4109, the information included in the starting command, such as whether it is a jackpot or not, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether it is a small jackpot or not, information on whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not, game mode information, and information on the second variable time, are stored in the first available reserved area in the second reserved information storage area. After step SC4109, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, after step SC3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SC3901, the process moves to step SC3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SC3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step SC3913.

In step SC3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the upper, middle, and lower symbols used to set each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is used to determine the pattern (jackpot pattern) that is stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42 when a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO. In other words, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 8, and to return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e. 8).

When a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a jackpot is received from the main control device 261, based on the table that associates the counter value with the decorative pattern, for example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" (lower number), 1 If so, a combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as "2" (double number).

This jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SC3905, and is read from the counter buffer of RAM553 when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command, as described below. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer of RAM553, but it is also possible to refer to the counter value when the variation pattern command is received, without storing it in the buffer.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used to determine the combination of each stopped symbol in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery results in a loss. Since any of nine decorative patterns are displayed in each column, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each column. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbols in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbols in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbols in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated using the value of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. Each pattern counter CL, CM, and CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in either the front or rear miss reach pattern buffer, the front or rear non-miss reach pattern buffer, or the complete miss pattern buffer of RAM 553.

Here, the update process of each pattern counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 153, in step SC4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the upper pattern counter CL, and in step SC4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the middle pattern counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower pattern counters CL, CM, CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower pattern counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step SC4001. Also, if the upper pattern counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step SC4002. Then, if it is time to update the upper pattern counter CL (step SC4001 is YES), proceed to step SC4003 and update the upper pattern counter CL. Also, if it is time to update the middle pattern counter CM (step SC4002 is YES), proceed to step SC4004 and update the middle pattern counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower pattern counter CR (steps SC4001 and SC4002 are both NO), proceed to step SC4005 and update the lower pattern counter CR. When updating the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SC4003 to SC4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. There isn't. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

Thereafter, in step SC4006, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is changed to the combination of winning symbols (the combination of jackpot symbols in which the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). A combination of a predetermined small winning symbol, a predetermined time saving winning symbol combination) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4006, the process is ended without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC4006, in step SC4007, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (a symbol in the upper symbol display area and a symbol in the lower symbol display area). are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are different from the symbols in the middle symbol display area), and if it is a combination of reach symbols (step SC4007 is YES), In step SC4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of front and back off symbols (front and back off reach). If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of front and back off reach symbols (step SC4008 is YES), the process advances to step SC4009, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the front and back off reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. This process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front and back off (reach other than front and back off) (step SC4008 is NO), the process advances to step SC4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is The matching is stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer of RAM 553 except for the front and back, and this process is ended.

Also, if the combination is other than a reach pattern (step SC4007 is NO), the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of a losing pattern (a completely losing pattern), so in step SC4011, the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the completely losing pattern buffer of RAM553, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step SC3906, the hold process is performed. The hold process is explained below with reference to FIG. 155.

First, in step SC4201, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4201, in the process of step SC4202, which serves as an update function unit or a subtraction function unit, the value of the first fluctuation pending counter Nd, which is a second counting function unit, is subtracted by 1.

In the following step SC4203, processing for shifting the data stored in the first pending information storage area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first pending information storage area (including the continuous notice flag) to the execution area side, and Data in each area is shifted in the following order: → execution area, second pending area → first pending area, third pending area → second pending area, fourth pending area → third pending area.

After step SC4203, in step SC4204, a preview setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect used for continuous previews. In the notice setting process of step SC4204, it is determined whether the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process of step SC4105) is on, and if the determination is negative, the continuous notice flag is turned on. Since this is not performed, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, whether it is a jackpot or not, if it is a jackpot, what type is it, and if it is not a jackpot, what is the reach pattern, and the game mode. The type of continuous notice is determined by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is displayed.

After step SC4204, in step SC4205, a pending icon shift process is performed to shift the pending icon H461 displayed on the effect display device 42. Note that each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a hold icon storage area that stores the type of hold icon H461, and information regarding the hold icon H461 is also stored in the hold information storage area described above. It is shifted by area data shift processing.

The pending icon shift process is a process for redrawing the pending icon H461 in accordance with the data shift, and in the effect display device 42, each time one of the first variable displays is consumed (executed), The hold icon H461 located on the leftmost side is deleted, and the hold icon H461 placed on the right side is shifted one place to the left (the display location is moved).

In this embodiment, in step SC4205, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon H461, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set to ON, the hold change effect of the pre-read hold icon H463 is executed. A lottery is held to decide whether or not to proceed, and if the winner is selected, the pattern of the prefetch pending icon H463 is changed to a higher rank one (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that there is no holding area in which the holding change flag is set to ON, the pre-reading holding effect flag is turned OFF. Furthermore, by changing the pattern of the prefetch hold icon H463, when the prefetch hold icon H463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the prefetch hold effect flag is turned off, and the hold change flag is turned off. ing.

After step SC4205, or if a negative determination is made in step SC4201, step SC4206 determines whether the fluctuation pattern command of the second fluctuation display has been received (the fluctuation pattern command of the second fluctuation display is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). (whether or not it has been stored). If a negative determination is made in step SC4206, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC4206 is affirmative, the process of step SC4207, which is the update function unit or the subtraction function unit, subtracts 1 from the value of the second variable pending counter Ne, which is the first counting function unit. In the following step SC4208, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second pending information storage area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first pending area of the second pending information storage area to the execution area. After step SC4208, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step SC3907, display setting processing is performed. Here, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. In other words, the display mode to be displayed on the performance display device 42 is determined here. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, and stopping pattern, and determines the display pattern of the decorative pattern variation display, etc. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and starts the varying display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 42. Once a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 continue to work together to display the varying decorative patterns (performance variation display) until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed.

In addition, when starting the performance change display corresponding to the first change display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, the type of continuous notice to be derived to the performance change display corresponding to the first change display is determined based on the change information of the change pattern command, by referring to a table corresponding to each situation, and the derivation of a notice effect other than the continuous notice is determined, or a display corresponding to the operation of the performance button 125, etc. is performed. Furthermore, the display setting process of step SC3907 also performs a process for controlling the performance during a jackpot (win display process).

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step SC3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 157. In the effect display device 42 of this embodiment, basically, the first effect variation display (first variation compatible effect display) corresponding to the first variation display of the first special symbol display device 43A, or the second special symbol display A second performance variation display (second variation compatible performance display) corresponding to the second variation display of the device 43B is performed.

First, in step SC4501, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command corresponding to the second variation display (hereinafter referred to as the second variation pattern command) has been received. The various variation information included in the first variation pattern command and the second variation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the corresponding pending information storage area, or may be configured to be stored in a separate storage area. Furthermore, for example, when a process corresponding to the reception of the second variation pattern command is performed in the pending process (see FIG. 155), the second variation reception flag may be turned on, and when a positive determination is made in step SC4501, the second variation reception flag may be turned off, and in step SC4501, it may be determined whether or not the second variation pattern command has been received by checking the second variation reception flag.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4501, it is determined in step SC4502 whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the current gaming mode (at the start of variation) is "time saving A mode". Determine whether

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4502, in step SC4503, various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small win, jackpot type, game mode information, , second variation time, etc.), a special second performance variation display setting process is performed to determine a production pattern (pattern of second performance variation display), and the process moves to step SC4506. In the special second performance variation display setting process, display setting processes corresponding to the "rush stage performance" and "battle stage performance" shown in FIGS. 161 and 162 are performed.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC4502, it is determined in step SC4504 whether or not the continuation effect flag is set on. The continuation production flag is set to ON when the sub-control device 262 receives a production start command related to the "continuation chance stage production" from the main control device 261, and is set to ON when the sub-control device 262 receives a production end command related to the "continuation chance stage production". It is set to off when

If a negative determination is made in step SC4504, the process directly proceeds to step SC4506.

On the other hand, if the result of step SC4504 is positive, i.e., if the "continuation chance stage presentation" is being performed (including the start), then in step SC4505, a normal second presentation variation display setting process is performed to determine the presentation pattern (pattern of the second presentation variation display) based on various information included in the second variation pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not it is a big win, the big win type, information on whether or not it is a small win, information on whether or not it is a time-saving win, the time-saving win type, game mode information, and the second variation time, etc.), and the process proceeds to step SC4506. In the normal second presentation variation display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "continuation chance stage presentation" shown in FIG. 163 is performed. In this embodiment, when the second variation display is performed in the "normal mode", the "normal stage presentation" is performed on the presentation display device 42.

Thereafter, in step SC4506, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the first fluctuation pattern command) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4506, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if step SC4506 returns a positive answer, step SC4507 determines whether "31" is stored in the mode memory area, i.e., whether the current (at the start of the change) game mode is "Time-saving B mode."

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4507, in step SC4508, various information included in the first variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not it is a jackpot, jackpot type, gaming mode information, first variation time, etc.) Based on this, a special first performance variation display setting process is performed to determine the pattern of the first performance variation display, and the present process ends. In the special first effect variation display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "lucky stage effect" shown in FIG. 164 is performed. In this embodiment, the "lucky stage performance" corresponds to the "specific correspondence display", and the game played in the "time saving B mode" in the "lucky stage performance" constitutes the "specific game".

If a negative judgment is made in step SC4507, in step SC4510, a normal first performance change display setting process is performed to determine the pattern of the first performance change display based on various information included in the first change pattern command (e.g., information on whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, game mode information, and the first change time, etc.), and this process is then terminated. In the normal first performance change display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "normal stage performance" shown in FIG. 159 is performed.

In this embodiment, when the first change display is performed in the "time-saving A mode", internal processing such as the decrement process of the first change count counter A is performed, but the performance display device 42 does not perform a "rush stage performance" or a "battle stage performance", but instead performs a "normal stage performance".

Next, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step SC3907 will be explained with reference to FIG. 156.

First, in step SC4701, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot state has been received from the main controller 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4701, in step SC4702, a round grasp counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds is inputted based on the jackpot type information included in the opening command.If it is a "15R jackpot", " 15" is set, "8" is set if it is an "8R jackpot", and "4" is set if it is a "4R jackpot".

After that, in step SC4703, the opening effect is set (setting the image of the effect display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting state of the various lamps), and then this process ends. In this embodiment, if the value of the round grasp counter is "15", "8", or "4", an opening effect of 8 seconds will be performed. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding effect is selected by referring to the table and executed.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC4701, it is determined in step SC4704 whether or not a specific winning command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4704, that is, if a jackpot state occurs based on the ball entering the specific ball entering section 320c of the second variable winning device 32B, in step SC4702, the specific winning prize is set for the round grasping counter. Based on the jackpot type information included in the command, set "14" for "15R jackpot", "7" for "8R jackpot", and "3" for "4R jackpot". Set.

Then, in step SC4703, the opening performance is set and the process ends. In this embodiment, if the round grasp counter value is "14", "7", or "3", a 2-second opening performance will be performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step SC4704, then in step SC4705, it is judged whether or not a round command has been received. If a positive judgment is made in step SC4705, then in step SC4706, the performance during the round, which may last up to 30 seconds, is set, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4705, then in step SC4707 it is determined whether or not an interval command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step SC4707, then in step SC4708 the round grasp counter is decremented by 1, and in step SC4709 the performance during the 4 second interval is set, after which this process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step SC4707, then in step SC4710 it is judged whether or not an ending command has been received. If a positive judgment is made in step SC4710, then in step SC4711 the round grasp counter is decremented by 1, and in step SC4712 a 10-second ending performance is set, after which this process ends.

If the result of step SC4710 is negative, then in step SC4713 it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received. If the result of step SC4713 is positive, then in step SC4714 jackpot display end processing is performed, and this processing ends.

During the jackpot display end process, the ending display is immediately ended, and since the time-saving A mode start command is received at this timing, the start setting process for the "rush stage presentation" or "battle stage presentation" corresponding to the "time-saving A mode" is performed based on this command.

If the result of step SC4713 is negative, step SC4715 determines whether or not a small win start command has been received. If the result of step SC4715 is positive, step SC4716 performs small win presentation settings to derive presentation displays during the small win state, and then ends this process.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4715, it is determined in step SC4717 whether or not a small winning end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4717, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4717, a small win display ending process is performed in step SC4718 to immediately end the small win effect display. After step SC4718, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step SC3908, a fluctuation stop process regarding stopping the fluctuation display of the effect display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 158.

First, in step SC4401, it is determined whether a special map 2 stop command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4401, it is determined in step SC4402 whether or not the second effect variation display is being derived. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4402, processing is performed to stop displaying the second effect variation display in step SC4403. After step SC4403, the process moves to step SC4407, which will be described later. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC4402, the process directly proceeds to step SC4407.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC4401, it is determined in step SC4404 whether or not a special figure 1 stop command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4404, it is determined in step SC4405 whether or not the first effect variation display is being derived. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4405, processing is performed to stop the first effect variation display in step SC4406. After step SC4406, the process moves to step SC4407. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC4405, the process directly proceeds to step SC4407.

After step SC4403 or step SC4406, or if a negative determination is made in step SC4404, it is determined in step SC4407 whether or not a time saving A mode end command or a time saving B mode end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4407, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4407, that is, if the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display in "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" reaches a predetermined number, step SC4408 In this step, a process is performed to change the display performance being performed on the performance display device 42 to "normal stage performance" corresponding to the normal mode. After that, this process ends.

Next, changes in the effect display mode on the effect display device 42 as the game progresses will be explained together with the flow of the game played by the player. On the display screen of the performance display device 42, various display performances corresponding to the current gaming state (gaming mode, etc.) are performed.

In the normal state (the gaming state in which the first variable display can be performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA in the "normal mode"), the "normal stage performance" is performed in the performance display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 159, in the "normal stage performance," a variable display area HW1 in which decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner is set up over most of the display screen of the performance display device 42.

As described above, in this embodiment, in this variable display area HW1, upper, middle, and lower three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area) are set, and each symbol A plurality of types of decorative patterns (designs numbered 1 to 9) are scrollably displayed in the display area.

An instruction display area HW2 is set above the variable display area HW1 for instructing (recommending) the firing mode of the game ball to the player, and a pending number of variable displays is set below the variable display area HW1. A hold display area HW3 to be specified is set.

In the normal state, the instruction display area HW2 displays "← "Left-handed" is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left."

The hold display area HW3 also displays a hold icon H461 resembling a lifebuoy. The hold display area HW3 of this embodiment includes an execution corresponding area H462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold corresponding area H462b corresponding to each hold area of the first hold information storage area, and is capable of displaying up to five hold icons H461.

When a player "hits left," most of the game balls are guided by the nails and the like toward the first start winning section 33WA, which is located below the variable display unit 35. Some of the game balls will then win in the first start winning section 33WA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the second starting winning part 33WB and its pair of blade members 33WBb is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35. In other words, since the second starting winning part 33WB and the through gate 34 are arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach, if the player continues to "hit left", The pair of blade members 33WBb is never released, and the game ball is never won into the second starting winning section 33WB.

Further, even if the player performs an act of firing a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 in the normal state (such act is hereinafter referred to as "right-handed hitting"), the present embodiment described above does not apply. Under such a configuration, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will win in the second starting winning section 33WB. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that in the normal state, the player can play the game more advantageously by "hitting to the left".

When a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, multiple types of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable display area HW1 of the performance display device 42 in each of the above-mentioned pattern display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns are scrolled from right to left periodically in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In the upper pattern display area, the various decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). After a predetermined time has passed, the varying display stops in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area, and the decorative patterns are displayed stationary in each pattern display area.

When a jackpot lottery is won based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, the decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on a predetermined jackpot line after reaching a reach state. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, when three decorative symbols of a jackpot combination are lined up and displayed on any one of the five lines, the occurrence of a jackpot condition is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the jackpot shutter 32Ab of the first variable winning device 32A is opened, and a game ball can enter the jackpot 32Aa, and a predetermined jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 42. The performance begins (see FIG. 160).

However, if the player continues to "hit left", it is possible for the game ball to flow down toward the first variable winning device 32A and win, but when the "time-saving A mode" that is granted after the end of the jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot begins, there is no reserved memory of the second variable display based on the ball winning the second start winning section 33WB, and the first variable display will start after the end of the jackpot.

As described above, in this embodiment, winning a direct jackpot in the second variable display is more likely to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player than winning a direct jackpot in the first variable display, and Since the small winning state lottery, which is easy to win and triggers the occurrence of the V-winning jackpot, is configured to be performed only on the second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB, after the jackpot ends, " If the first variable display is performed in "Time Saving Mode A", it will be disadvantageous for the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, when the jackpot effect is started, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right hit →" to recommend "Right hit" to the player. be done. Accordingly, the player switches the firing mode of the game ball from "left-handed" to "right-handed" so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right area of the variable display unit 35. Play a jackpot game.

Here, if the player hits the right ball, many of the game balls will flow down toward the first variable winning device 32A while being guided by the nails, etc., and will win a prize in the first variable winning device 32A. Become. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, a through gate 34, a second start winning part 33WB, etc. are provided on the downstream path to the first variable winning device 32A. The game ball passes through the through gate 34, or wins a prize in the second starting winning section 33WB that is opened upon passing through the gate.

In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the starting ball support lottery, the pair of blade members 33WBb becomes open, and the game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB. Balls can be entered.

As a result, the second variable display is stored on hold during the jackpot state, and at the start of the "time saving A mode" after the jackpot ends, the second variable display can be started immediately with priority over the first variable display. state.

In this embodiment, if a "15R jackpot" is won by a winning/losing lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, a "time-saving A mode for 7 variable displays" is granted after the end of the "15R jackpot". And, if the "time-saving A mode for 7 variable displays" is granted, a "rush stage performance" is performed on the performance display device 42, as shown in FIG. 161.

On the other hand, if a "4R jackpot" is won by a winning/losing lottery during "normal mode" based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33WA, a "time-saving A mode for one variable display" is granted after the end of the "4R jackpot". And if the "time-saving A mode for one variable display" is granted, a "battle stage performance" is performed on the performance display device 42, as shown in FIG. 162.

In the "rush stage performance" and the "battle stage performance", the variable display area HW1 is displayed in a reduced size downward. In the reduced variable display area HW1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line. Then, on the background screen, various display effects related to the "rush stage effect" and the "battle stage effect" are performed, such as various characters and the like being displayed.

For example, in the "rush stage production", as shown in Fig. 161, during its duration (during the period in which seven variable displays are executed), an animation (continuous production) of moving underwater continuously is derived, and A ``small win'' is taught by a display mode such as a school of fish passing by or fluttering, and a ``big win'' is taught by a display mode such as the appearance of a large creature such as a whale or the discovery of a treasure chest.

In addition, in the "Battle Stage Presentation," as shown in FIG. 162, a humanoid character appears and an animation of him fighting an enemy is generated, and the player is informed of whether he has won a "small prize" or a "big prize" by winning or losing the battle.

In addition, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation", since the various presentations described above inform the player that they have won a "small win" or a "big win", the reduced variable display area HW1 may also be omitted, and the decorative patterns may not be displayed in a variable manner. Also, in the "Rush Stage Presentation" and "Battle Stage Presentation", the player may be able to select between a pattern presentation mode in which decorative patterns are displayed, and an animation presentation mode in which decorative patterns are not displayed.

In addition, in the "rush stage performance" and "battle stage performance", in order to make more game balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33WB and to suspend and store more second variable displays, the instruction display area HW2 is As in the case of a jackpot, "Right hit →" is displayed to encourage the player to "Right hit".

In addition, in the "rush stage performance" and "battle stage performance", the hold display area HW3 is not set on the performance display device 42, and the hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the second hold display device 46B (second variable display) is not set. (derivation) is not performed.

Here, even if the reserved first variable display exists, the reserved icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed. As described above, when a game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA, which satisfies a specific condition, during the execution of the second variable display, the first variable display corresponding to the ball is reserved and stored, and a start command related to the first variable display is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and information related to the first variable display is stored in the first reserved information storage area of the sub-control device 262. However, during the period of the "rush stage performance", etc., the reserved icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed. However, even if the reserved icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed here, if a game ball enters the next first start winning section 33WA, which satisfies the update condition, the data update process of the first reserved information storage area is executed. Then, when the "rush stage performance" etc. ends and the mode returns to the "normal mode", the reserved icon related to the first variable display stored in the first reserved information storage area at that time will be displayed.

In addition, during the execution of the "rush stage performance" and the "battle stage performance", they are performed during the "time-saving A mode" in which a small win state can occur, and during that time, the game is played by aiming to generate a big win state by having a game ball enter the specific ball entry section 320c of the second variable winning device 32B, so basically, a decorative pattern that indicates whether or not a big win has been won in the first win/lose lottery (big win lottery) is not displayed. Instead, a simple display may be used to inform the player that a small win has been won, or the instruction may be given by the light emission mode of a lamp or a sound mode, and the performance display device 42 may simply update the count display of the remaining number of times in the time-saving A mode according to the consumption of the second variable display. In addition, if a direct hit big win is won in the second variable display, a decorative pattern may be displayed as the second performance variable display, and the combination of big win patterns may be stopped and displayed.

During the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)", if the game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB, the first winning/failure drawing (big winning drawing) and the second winning/failure drawing (small winning drawing) A lottery is held, and the results are displayed in the reduced variable display area HW1.

In addition, during the "Time-saving A mode (rush stage presentation or battle stage presentation)", while the player is "hitting to the right", the game ball rarely enters the first start winning section 33WA, while many game balls tend to enter the second start winning section 33WB in a short period of time, which is in a high ball entry state, and the number of reserved memories in the second variable display tends to reach the upper limit quickly. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories in the second variable display reaches the upper limit and a second variable display with a relatively long presentation time, such as a reach presentation, is started, some players switch the launch mode of the game ball from "hitting to the right" to "hitting to the left", and during that time, the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA. Therefore, during the "Time-saving A mode" in which the player's interest is high and the play value is high, a state in which the player's interest is low and the play value is not very high, such as the reserved memory in the first variable display, may occur repeatedly. Of course, the first variable display will not start while the second variable display is being executed, but by storing the first variable display on hold during this time, the first variable display that has been stored on hold will start immediately after the "continuation chance stage performance" ends, so the performance can be continued without interruption.

If a small win state, which is relatively easy to win, is won, the ball entry opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened, and the game ball enters the internal area 320a in an open state. Furthermore, if the game ball that entered the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B enters the specific ball entry section 320c, a V-entry big win occurs, the first variable winning device 32A is opened, and a predetermined big win presentation is started on the presentation display device 42, as described above (see FIG. 160).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165(a), during the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)", the "time saving A mode" ends without a jackpot state occurring, and the game mode changes to " When switching to the "normal mode," the "rush stage performance" or "battle stage performance" ends in the performance display device 42, and the ball is put on hold based on the entry into the second starting winning section 33WB during the "time saving A mode." A "continuation chance stage performance" based on the stored second variable display is started (see FIG. 163).

Here, if at the end of the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)", there is no second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB stored in reserve. , "continuation chance stage production" is not executed. Further, the duration of the "continuation chance stage performance" differs depending on the number of pending second variable displays stored at the end of the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)". Therefore, in the present embodiment, a duration for up to four variable displays can be provided.

For example, in the "continuous chance stage production", as shown in Figure 163, similar to the "rush stage production", during the duration (during the period in which a maximum of 4 variable displays are executed), the player moves underwater continuously. Animation (continuous performance) is derived, and "small wins" are taught by display formats such as schools of fish passing by or fluttering, and "small wins" are taught by display formats such as the appearance of large creatures such as whales and the discovery of treasure chests. It is designed to teach you how to hit the jackpot.

In addition, when the "Continuation Chance Stage Presentation" starts, the "Time-saving A Mode (high ball entry state)" ends, so "←Hit Left" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 to encourage the player to "Hit Left". This allows the player to change the game mode when the "Time-saving A Mode (Rush Stage Presentation or Battle Stage Presentation)" ends, preventing the occurrence of problems such as wasting game balls.

As described above, when the "Rush Stage Presentation" is performed in this embodiment, during the period in which the "Rush Stage Presentation" for 7 variable displays and the "Continuation Chance Stage Presentation" for a maximum of 4 reserved displays are executed, a maximum of 11 variable display (7 + 4) small prize draws are performed.

On the other hand, when the "Battle Stage Presentation" is performed, during the period in which the "Battle Stage Presentation" for one variable display and the "Continuation Chance Stage Presentation" for a maximum of four reserved displays are executed, a maximum of five small prize draws (1 + 4) will be performed.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small jackpot is set to approximately 1/7, and if a small jackpot state occurs during the "Time-saving A mode" and the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, there is a nearly 100% probability that the game ball will enter the specific ball entry section 320c. Therefore, when a "Rush Stage Presentation (15R or 8R jackpot)" is executed, the situation is likely to be favorable for players who can continue to win the next jackpot, whereas when a "Battle Stage Presentation (4R jackpot)" is executed, the situation is likely to be less favorable for players who have difficulty continuing to win the next jackpot.

However, in this embodiment, during the execution period of the "continuous chance stage production", that is, while the remaining pending display of the second variable display in the normal state is being used, neither the jackpot lottery nor the small prize lottery was won. In this case, the structure is such that a time-saving winning lottery is held.

If a time-saving win is won, the game mode will be internally switched from "normal mode" to "time-saving B mode" for the number of times corresponding to the type of time-saving win that was won ("30-time time-saving win," "40-time time-saving win," or "50-time time-saving win").

However, the "time-saving B mode" is a game mode that does not result in a "high ball entry state", and is a game state that is less interesting to the player than jackpots, small wins, etc. Therefore, even if the player wins the "time-saving B mode" during the execution of the "continuous chance stage production", the player's interest at this point is mainly in whether or not they can get the next jackpot. , a notification performance that notifies you that you have won the "time saving B mode" is carried out with priority over the "continuation chance stage performance" so as to interrupt the "continuation chance stage performance" or interrupt the "continuation chance stage performance". In such a case, there is a risk that the player will be less interested in the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 165(b), even if the "Time-saving B mode" is won during the execution of the "Continuation Chance Stage Presentation" and the game mode is internally switched from "Normal Mode" to "Time-saving B Mode", this fact will not be notified on the presentation display device 42 until all remaining reserved balls in the second variable display are consumed, and the "Continuation Chance Stage Presentation" will continue.

However, in accordance with the expiration of the remaining reservation in the second variable display, the setting value of the "time saving B mode" is subtracted (updated) by the number of times set corresponding to the time saving winning type. For example, if the second variable display is performed once after the "time saving B mode" is set, the set value becomes a value subtracted by 1.

If the "continuation chance stage presentation" ends without a jackpot state being achieved, and the game mode is "normal mode," the presentation display device 42 will execute the "normal stage presentation."

On the other hand, when the "Continuation Chance Stage Presentation" ends, if the game mode is "Time-saving B Mode", the "Lucky Stage Presentation" is executed on the presentation display device 42, as shown in FIG. 164.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the "continuation chance stage performance" ends, a distribution performance is performed to liven up the game, such as whether to shift to a "normal stage performance" or a "lucky stage performance". The structure is as follows.

Furthermore, if you do not win in the time-saving lottery during the "continuous chance stage production" and move to "normal mode (normal stage production)" after the "continuous chance stage production" ends, and if you win in the time-saving lottery, The configuration is such that a different performance is executed when transitioning to the "time saving B mode (lucky stage performance)" after the end of the "continuous chance stage performance". For example, if the player wins the time-saving lottery, a performance such as a "resurrection mode" to enliven the game is performed, and then a transition to a "lucky stage performance" is performed.

With this configuration, even if the player does not transition to a favorable state through a "rush stage effect" or the like, it is possible to give the player new hope and increase his or her motivation to play. As a result, it is possible to gradually create effects that give the player a sense of expectation, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the "lucky stage performance", a variable display area HW1 is set in the performance display device 42, and basically the same decorative symbols as in the "normal mode" are displayed in a variable manner, with only the background display being different. In other words, "← left-handed hit" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 above the variable display area HW1.

In addition, the pending display area HW3 below the variable display area HW1 clearly displays a number of pending icons H461 corresponding to the number of pending first variable displays. If the first variable display is pending when the "continuation chance stage performance" ends, the display mode in the variable display area HW1 becomes a variable performance mode in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and if the first variable display is not pending, the display mode in the variable display area HW1 becomes a stopped performance mode in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped manner.

In addition, in the "Lucky Stage Presentation", a count display area HW4 is set in the presentation display device 42 (see FIG. 164). The count display area HW4 clearly shows the number of variable display times (the value of the second variable count counter B) that corresponds to the remaining duration of the "Lucky Stage Presentation" at the current time. Therefore, when the value of the second variable count counter B is "28", the count display area HW4 displays "28 times remaining".

By looking at the numerical value displayed in the count display area HW4 during the "Lucky Stage Presentation," the player can work backwards to determine at what point in the second variable display the specific condition that triggered the "Time-saving B Mode" was met. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from declining.

Then, each time the first variation display is performed, its value (the value of the second variation counter B) is decremented by one. After that, when the set number of variation displays (the value of the second variation counter B) becomes 0, the "Lucky Stage Presentation" ends and the mode returns to "Normal Mode (see FIG. 159)."

On the other hand, during the "Time Saving B Mode (Lucky Stage Performance)", if a jackpot is won based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning section 33WA, a "15R jackpot" is always awarded. Furthermore, after the end of the "15R jackpot", a "rush stage performance ("time-saving A mode" for 7 variable displays)" is given.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in the lamp setting process of step SC3909, the lighting pattern of the lamps and decorative lights is set to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SC3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the performance display performed by the performance display device 42. In addition, when audio-related commands, such as an error notification, are sent from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SC3910.

In step SC3911, other processes such as control settings for customer waiting effects are performed. In other words, if a state in which a player is not playing continues for a specified time, the device is configured to switch to a customer attraction mode or an energy saving mode, and the effect display device 42 is configured to derive a demo screen display in which, as a customer waiting effect, no decorative patterns are displayed (instead, a series of videos or still images are displayed), the screen is darkened, etc.

In step SC3912, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings set in steps SC3905 to SC3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a decorative pattern in a variable manner.

After the processes of steps SC3905 to SC3912, which are performed every 2 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SC3904, the process moves to step SC3913, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information or not. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If no information about the power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step SC3914, where it is determined whether or not RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step SC3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop in order to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SC3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SC3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As detailed above, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are a plurality of gaming states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and if these occur overlappingly, this is appropriately notified to the player. That is required.

As an example, in the pachinko machine 10, which is a so-called 1-type 2-type mixer like this embodiment, a normal state (low ball entry state) in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second starting winning part 33WB is used. In this game, the player hits the game ball to the left and enters the first starting winning portion 33WA to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, in a high ball state where it is easy to make the game ball enter the second starting prize part 33WB, which can be awarded after the end of the jackpot state, the game ball is hit right and the game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB. The game is such that a small winning state is generated, a game ball is made to enter a specific ball entering section 320c in the opened second variable winning device 32B, and a jackpot state is aimed at.

In this embodiment, under such a configuration, in the high ball entry state (time-saving A mode) after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (such as a rush stage effect) is executed on the effect display device 42, and after the high ball entry state ends, during the execution of the second variable display in which a ball entered the second start winning section 33WB during the high ball entry state and was reserved (while the remaining reserved portion of the second variable display is being consumed), a continuation effect (continuation chance stage effect) is executed on the effect display device 42, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific gaming state (high performance) that cannot be said to be more advantageous to the player than a jackpot, small win, high ball entry state, etc. The configuration is such that a lottery is performed to generate a time-saving B mode in which the ball does not enter the ball state.

However, since this specific game state (time-saving B mode) is a game state that is of less interest to players than a big win, a small win, etc., even if a specific game state (time-saving B mode) is won while a continuation effect is being executed, if a notification effect is executed to notify the player that a specific game state has been won in priority over the continuation effect (continuation chance stage effect) (for example, by interrupting or interrupting the continuation effect), there is a risk that the interest of the player will decrease.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, if neither the big prize lottery nor the small prize lottery is won during the execution period of the "continuation chance stage performance" after the "rush stage performance" ends, a time-saving prize lottery that can trigger the "time-saving B mode" is held.

If a jackpot is won based on a game ball entering the first start winning section 33WA during the "Time-saving B mode (Lucky Stage Presentation)", a "15R jackpot" is always awarded, and after the end of this, a "Rush Stage Presentation (Time-saving A mode with 7 variable displays)" is awarded.

As a result, even if the player does not win a jackpot or a small jackpot, the "time-saving B mode", which is more advantageous to the player than the "normal mode", can be provided at least, reducing the disappointment of the player, and It is possible to give new hope to players and improve their desire to play. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a player wins the lottery for the time-saving B mode while the second variable display is being executed (e.g., while the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display is being consumed) while the "continuation chance stage performance" is being executed, the "time-saving B mode" is internally advanced by performing a subtraction process on the second variable count counter B for measuring the duration of the "time-saving B mode", but no corresponding notification display is executed on the performance display device 42, and after the "continuation chance stage performance" ends, a "lucky stage performance" corresponding to the number of remaining times of the "time-saving B mode" at that time is executed.

As a result, it is possible to prioritize the "continuation chance stage presentation" that is of greater interest to players, and to prevent a decline in the interest of players.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the second variable display during the execution of the "continuation chance stage presentation" (e.g., while the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display is being consumed), the game mode (game ball launch mode: left hit) when the time-saving winning lottery is not won and the game mode transitions to "normal mode (normal stage presentation)" after the end of the "continuation chance stage presentation" is the same as the game mode (game ball launch mode: left hit) when the time-saving winning lottery is won and the game mode transitions to "time-saving B mode (lucky stage presentation)" after the end of the "continuation chance stage presentation". This allows the player to determine (change) the game mode when the "continuation chance stage presentation" ends, regardless of whether or not the time-saving winning lottery is won, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the waste of game balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) It may be implemented as a type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball machines.

For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is configured to switch between the starting ball entry support state (high ball entry state or low ball entry state). Instead or in addition to this, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the lottery mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) is switched. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, the pachinko machine may be configured to provide points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

It may also be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which the gaming balls are circulated within the gaming machine and not directly paid out to the player, i.e. a so-called sealed-in type pachinko machine.

(b) The configuration on the board surface of the game board 30 (the arrangement and number of the variable winning devices 32A, 32B, the starting winning parts 33WA, 33WB, the through gate 34, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be different. The configuration may also be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the through gate 34 and the second start winning section 33WB are located in the right area of the variable display unit 35 (a position that cannot be reached by the game ball that has flowed down the left area of the variable display unit 35), but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the second start winning section 33WB may be configured to be located below the first start winning section 33WA.

The first start winning section 33WA may be arranged in a position that cannot be reached by a game ball that has flowed down the right area of the variable display unit 35, or the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B may be arranged in a position that cannot be reached by a game ball that has flowed down the left area of the variable display unit 35.

The vertical positional relationship of the through gate 34, the second start winning section 33WB, the first variable winning device 32A, and the second variable winning device 32B is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different arrangement may be adopted. For example, the first variable winning device 32A may be arranged upstream of the second start winning section 33WB.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the right general prize winning section 31B provided in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 is omitted.

(c) The configuration of the second variable winning device 32B is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, when a small win occurs and the ball entry opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened, there is a nearly 100% chance that the game ball will enter the specific ball entry section 320c, resulting in a big win. However, this is not limited to the above, and a predetermined allocation mechanism may be provided inside the second variable winning device 32B, so that even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 32B, there is a predetermined chance that it will not enter the specific ball entry section 320c, resulting in a miss.

(d) The configurations relating to the various types of winning (big winning, small winning, time-saving winning) are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, three types of jackpots are set: "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "4R jackpot", but the number of rounds, opening time, and game mode awarded after the end are not limited to these. It is also possible to have a configuration in which other jackpot states with different conditions occur.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot type that is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery is divided between when the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA and when it enters the second starting winning section 33WB. However, the ratio is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be a different distribution ratio.

In addition, the allocation ratio of the jackpot type awarded in the event of winning the lottery may be the same when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33WA and when the game ball enters the second start winning section 33WB.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that can only generate one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot), rather than a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states.

Further, regarding the small winnings, a gaming machine may be used that can generate multiple types of small winning states with different numbers of rounds, opening times, and the like.

Regarding time-saving wins, in the above embodiment, three types of time-saving wins are set: "per 30 time savings," "per 40 time savings," and "per 50 time savings." However, the present invention is not limited to this. Other time saving wins with different number of times saving may be set.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning/losing random number counter CC1 used in the big win lottery and small win lottery is used to draw the lottery for the time-saving win, but this is not limited to the above. A random number counter for the time-saving win lottery may be provided, and if the big win lottery or small win lottery is not won, a lottery for the time-saving win may be drawn separately. Also, the lottery for the winning/losing time-saving win and the lottery for the type may be drawn separately.

It should be noted that the probability of winning for various types of lottery in pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) is appropriately set for each machine type, and any value can be adopted.

(e) The configurations related to the various game modes (normal mode, time-saving A mode, time-saving B mode) are not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "Time-saving A mode (variable time-saving mode with starting ball entry support)" is always granted after the end of the jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot, but this is not limited to the above, and depending on the type of jackpot, the "Time-saving A mode" may not be granted, and instead "Normal mode" or "Time-saving B mode (variable time-saving mode without starting ball entry support)" may be granted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, only the winning support mode ("high support mode" or "low support mode") is switched, but instead of or in addition to this, the lottery mode ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode") may be switched.

(f) The configurations relating to the various effect displays (e.g., normal stage effects, battle stage effects, rush stage effects, continuation chance stage effects, lucky stage effects, etc.) are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the "lucky stage performance", a continuous performance may be executed over multiple variable displays, such as a "rush stage performance".

In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when performing a continuous performance spanning multiple fluctuating displays, a series of fluctuating displays during the duration of the continuous performance can be performed without performing a fluctuating pattern lottery each time. It is also possible to perform a variable effect display using a variable pattern table that defines a variable pattern (for example, a variable pattern for out-of-line variations for 30 variable displays).

More specifically, a series of performance variation displays may be configured to be performed using a variation pattern table that defines the operation time of each variation display during the duration of the continuous performance (for example, a variation pattern table that defines the variation times for 30 variation displays, such as the variation time for the first variation of "5 seconds," the variation time for the second variation of "7 seconds," ..., the variation time for the 30th variation of "10 seconds," etc.). In other words, a configuration may be used in which a predetermined variation display time (variation time for miss variations) is set according to the number of variation displays scheduled to be executed.

Then, if a jackpot is won in a predetermined number of variable displays during the period in which this series of performance variable displays is being performed, the variable display may be configured to ignore the variable pattern table that defines the variable patterns for miss variables for the above 30 variable displays, and to execute the variable display with a variable pattern obtained by taking into consideration the variable pattern table for jackpots.

(g) In the above embodiment, after the "continuation chance stage effect" ends, a distribution effect is performed to liven up the game, such as transitioning to a "normal stage effect" or a "lucky stage effect." However, this is not limited to this, and the distribution effect may be omitted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, different effects are executed in the case where the time-saving lottery during the "continuation chance stage presentation" is not won and the game transitions to "normal mode (normal stage presentation)" after the "continuation chance stage presentation" ends, and in the case where the time-saving lottery is won and the game transitions to "time-saving B mode (lucky stage presentation)" after the "continuation chance stage presentation" ends. However, this is not limited to this, and the same effect may be executed in the case where the game transitions to "normal mode (normal stage presentation)" after the "continuation chance stage presentation" ends and in the case where the game transitions to "time-saving B mode (lucky stage presentation)".

(h) The configuration related to the specific effect is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, in the "continuous chance stage production" as a specific production in the above embodiment, an animation (continuous production) of continuously moving underwater is derived during the duration (during the period in which variable displays are executed up to four times). The configuration is as follows.

The specific effect is not limited to this, as long as the player can at least recognize the period, and may be, for example, a text suggestion or a display of a specific image (various characters or background images).

Furthermore, the "lucky stage performance" that is performed based on the end of a specific performance may be executed immediately after the specific performance ends, or may be performed after various processes related to the end of the specific performance have been performed during a predetermined period of time. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(i) The configuration of the various counting means (first counting means, second counting means) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, numerical data is set for each fluctuation counter A and B, and the remaining number of fluctuations is determined by subtracting this data, but the present invention is not limited to this and any configuration that can count various counting objects may be adopted. For example, a flag may be set each time a fluctuation display is performed, and the number of flags may be counted to determine the number of various counting objects.

In addition, the first fluctuation number counter A in the above embodiment measures the duration of the "time saving A mode" (remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit) and is stored on hold at the end of the "time saving A mode". Although it is configured to be used for measuring the remaining execution period of the second variable display (the remaining pending consumption period, up to 4 times), separate counting counters may be provided for each.

In the above embodiment, when measuring the duration of the "Time-saving B mode" (the number of remaining fluctuations until the upper limit is reached), a predetermined upper limit value (e.g., 30 times) is set in the second fluctuation counter B, and the remaining number of fluctuations is grasped by subtracting this value. However, without being limited to this, the remaining number of fluctuations may be grasped by incrementing the value of the second fluctuation counter B and comparing it with a predetermined upper limit value (e.g., 30 times). In such a case, the set value (upper limit value) stored in a predetermined memory area is updated (subtracted) each time the second fluctuation display is performed. Then, if the set value is greater than 0 at the end of the "Time-saving A mode", a "lucky stage performance" may be executed, and if it is less than 0, it may not be executed.

(j) In addition to the above embodiment, when a "time-saving win" is won, a configuration may be provided that includes a means for notifying or suggesting this fact, separate from the performance display device 42. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a "time-saving win" will occur is suggested by a frame lamp 102 or the like. This can create a sense of anticipation in the player that the "time-saving win" may develop, further increasing the player's interest. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a suggestion is made using a speaker SP as a sound generating means.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional Issues WA. Conventionally, gaming machines have multiple game states with different degrees of advantage, and when the conditions for each occurrence are met, the corresponding game state occurs.

A type of gaming machine known is a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area, a lottery is held based on the gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is created (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

In addition, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur simultaneously while a specific gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, as a type of pachinko machine, a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixer is known. Such a pachinko machine includes, for example, a first starting ball entry means that shoots (left-handed) a game ball into the left side area of the gaming area and a first starting ball entering means based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. A first display device that displays a variable display, a first holding device that can hold the first variable display a predetermined number of times, and a second starting ball entry device that shoots (hits to the right) a game ball into the right side area of the game area and aims it. a second display device that displays a second variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means; a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display a predetermined number of times; The system includes an opening/closing member that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering means and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means. A jackpot lottery is conducted based on the balls, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a jackpot state advantageous to the player can be generated, and the game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means. A game in which a small winning lottery is conducted based on balls, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a small winning state can be generated in which a predetermined variable winning device is released, and a ball enters the variable winning device. It is configured to be able to generate a jackpot state when a ball enters a specific ball entry means (V winning hole).

Generally, in such a pachinko machine, in a normal state (low support state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means, the game ball is hit left-handed and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means. The gameplay is to let the ball hit and aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the high support state that can be granted after the end of the big win state, in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, hitting from the right hand side causes the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, generating a small win state, and then aiming to get the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means (V entry port) in the opened variable winning device, resulting in a big win state.

Under such a configuration, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means, and after the end of the high support state, during the high support state, During the execution of the second variable display that has entered the second starting ball entering means and is stored on hold (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being used up), a continuation effect (continuation chance effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. Some gaming machines are also designed to increase the interest of players.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WA1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: specific correspondence display execution means for executing.

According to the above-mentioned means WA1, during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific performance (continuation chance performance, etc.) is being executed (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second game operation is being used up), a specific game that can be executed is specified. Even if a specific condition that can generate a gaming state (for example, a time reduction mode that does not result in a high support state) is satisfied, internal operations such as starting the counting of the second gaming operation related to the specific gaming state A specific game state is advanced, but specific response displays such as notification performances corresponding to this are not executed, and after the end of the specific performance, specific response displays are executed for the remaining number of times at that point.

As a result, even if lower-level game states overlap midway, the specific presentation that is of greater interest to the player can be given priority, making it possible to provide appropriate notifications while preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Means WA2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to means WA1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WA2, normally, the player is in the first special game state while playing the game in the first firing mode in which the game ball is fired toward the first area (first starting ball entering means). After this occurs, the game ball is fired to the player according to the game state, such as switching to the second firing mode in which the game ball is fired towards the second area (second starting ball entry means) and playing the game. It is configured to change the aspect.

This allows the configuration related to the above-mentioned means WA1 to be realized with a simpler configuration and allows for greater diversity in the game. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Means WA3. A trigger ball entry means (e.g., a through gate) is provided at a position where only the game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
The gaming machine described in means WA2 is characterized in that, when a predetermined opening condition is met due to the entry or passage of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means, the trigger ball entry means has at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty entering, as the second auxiliary state (low support state), and an open state in which the gaming ball can or has difficulty entering, as the first auxiliary state (high support state).

According to the above-mentioned means WA3, the trigger ball entry means is provided at a position that can only be reached by the game ball launched by the launching means so as to pass through the second area, thereby making the effect of the above-mentioned means WA2 more reliable.

Means WA4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to the means WA2 or WA3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WA4, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering means and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section than when the gaming ball enters the first starting ball entering means. In this case, the probability (allocation probability) of winning the first special game state with higher gaming value is higher.

As a result, when the specified opening condition is met, it becomes easier to cause more game balls to enter the second starting ball entry means, allowing the player to obtain more of the first special game state, which has a more advantageous game value.

Means WA5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WA2 to WA4 characterized in that when there is a variable display that is put on hold by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display that is put on hold by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above-mentioned means WA5, when playing in the second launch mode in which the game ball is launched toward the second area (second start ball entry means), more game balls can be entered into the second start ball entry means in a shorter period of time, and more first win/lose lotteries and second win/lose lotteries can be executed in a shorter period of time. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest.

Means WA6. A gaming machine described in any one of means WA1 to WA5, characterized in that the specific response display execution means, when executing the specific response display, clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time.

The above-mentioned means WA6 provides the same effect as the means WB1 described below.

Means WA7. A gaming machine described in any one of means WA1 to WA6, characterized in that the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is not established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed.

According to the means WA7, the same effects as the means WC1 described later are achieved.

Means WA8. A gaming machine described in any one of means WA1 to WA7, characterized in that the presentation display mode after the end of the specific presentation is different when the specific condition is met and when the specific condition is not met during the execution of the second game rotation operation while the specific presentation is being executed.

The above-mentioned means WA8 provides the same effect as means WD1 described below.

Means WA9. A gaming machine according to any one of means WA1 to WA8, characterized in that during the specific gaming state, the time of a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations to be executed.

According to the stage WA9, the same effects as the means WE1 described later are achieved.

Means WA10. A gaming machine according to any one of means WA1 to WA9, characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of notifying or suggesting, in addition to the specific response display, that the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation while the specific performance is being executed.

According to WA10, the same effects as the means WF1 described later are achieved.

Conventional assignment WB. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

In pachinko machines, the game states such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electric chute support), the time-saving state without electric support, the special chance state with time-saving, and the special chance state without time-saving basically exist independently, and when certain conditions are met between them, the machine will transition to a higher or lower game state.

In addition, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur simultaneously while a specific gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used) while a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) When a specific condition that allows a shortcut mode (such as a shortened mode) to occur is satisfied, the specific gaming state is internally advanced, such as by starting counting on the second variable display related to the specific gaming state, but the corresponding notification effect is If the configuration is such that the specific response display is not executed, but the specific response display is executed for the remaining number of times after the continuous performance ends, the specific response display will suddenly start after the continuous performance ends. There is a risk that the configuration may end up being

Furthermore, if the specific response display is configured to display a false value (such as "10 times remaining?") that does not correspond to the updated numerical information of the counting means (e.g. "29"), the player will not be able to grasp at what point in the second variable display the specific condition that generated the specific game state was met, which may lead to distrust.

Therefore, there is a demand for conventional pachinko machines to provide greater excitement for players.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can provide appropriate notification when game states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and can also increase the player's interest.

Means WB1. A first execution means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first start condition is established;
A second execution means for executing a second game operation when a second start condition different from the first start condition is satisfied;
a first storage means for storing the satisfaction of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit value;
A second storage means for storing the satisfaction of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit value;
and an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to establish the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to establish the second starting condition,
A first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation operation in a predetermined game state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting a predetermined numerical value of the first counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game rotation operation in the predetermined game state;
information setting means for setting specific numerical information to a second counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance;
an update means for updating the specific numerical value information of the second counting means when a predetermined update condition is satisfied;
A continuation means for continuously executing the specific performance during a predetermined state until the first counting means is decremented to a specific value when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed;
a specific correspondence display execution means for, when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific presentation is being performed, setting specific numerical information in the second counting means, but not executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the set specific numerical information of the second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means, when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific presentation is being performed, but not executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific presentation,
The specific correspondence display executing means, when executing the specific correspondence display, displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time.

The above-mentioned means WB1 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA1. In addition, this means is configured to clearly display a numerical value corresponding to the updated numerical information (e.g., "29") of the second counting means when a specific corresponding display is executed (for example, a display such as "29 times remaining" is displayed).

As a result, by looking at the numerical value specified in the specific correspondence display, the player can calculate backwards to determine at which timing the second gaming operation the specific condition that caused the specific gaming state was established. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

Means WB2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to means WA1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

The above-mentioned means WB2 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA2.

Means WB3. A trigger ball entry means (e.g., a through gate) is provided at a position where only the game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
The gaming machine described in means WB2 is characterized in that, when a predetermined opening condition is met due to the entry or passage of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means, the trigger ball entry means has at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty entering, as the second auxiliary state (low support state), and an open state in which the gaming ball can or has difficulty entering, as the first auxiliary state (high support state).

According to the means WB3, the same effects as those of the means WA3 are achieved.

Means WB4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to means WB2 or WB3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WB4, the same effects as the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WB5. As the first storage means, a first holding means for storing the result of the first winning/losing lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and making the first variable display executed by the first special display means wait until the end of the first variable display that has already been executed based on the lottery result;
The second storage means is provided with a second holding means for storing a result of the first winning/losing lottery or the second winning/losing lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means, and making the second variable display executed by the second special display means based on the lottery result wait until the second variable display already executed is finished;
A gaming machine described in any of means WB2 to WB4, characterized in that when there are variable displays waiting to be held by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display waiting to be held by the second holding means is executed as a priority.

According to the means WB5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WB6. A gaming machine described in any one of means WB1 to WB5, characterized in that the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is not met during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed.

The above-mentioned means WB6 provides the same effect as the means WC1 described below.

Means WB7. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

The above-mentioned means WB7 provides the same effect as the means WD1 described below.

Means WB8. The gaming machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB7, characterized in that during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WB8, the same effects as the means WE1 described later are achieved.

Means WB9. In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of characterized means WB1 to WB8.

The above WB9 provides the same effect as means WF1, which will be described later.

Conventional issue WC. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

In addition, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur simultaneously while a specific gaming state is being executed.

In this case, since the occurrence of a higher-level game state is desirable for the player, a notification corresponding to the higher-level game state or a notification indicating that a higher-level game state has overlapped can provide greater interest to the player.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower game states overlap midway through, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to provide appropriate notifications without reducing the player's interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further increase interest, it is also conceivable to add a configuration in which a lottery is conducted during the continuation performance to generate a specific game state (such as a time-saving mode that does not result in a high support state) that is less advantageous to the player than a big win, small win, high support state, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is one that is of less interest to players than a big win, a small win, etc., even if a specific game state is won while a continuation presentation is being executed, if a notification presentation that notifies the player that a specific game state has been won is given priority over the continuation presentation (for example, by interrupting or interrupting the continuation presentation), there is a risk that the interest of the player will decrease.

In addition, for example, during the execution of the second variable display during the execution of a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) (e.g. while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used up), the time during which a specific gaming state (for example, a high support state) does not occur can be shortened. If the game mode after the end of the continuous performance (for example, the game ball launch mode) is different depending on whether a specific condition that allows a game to occur (e.g. mode, etc.) is satisfied and a case where the specific condition is not satisfied, the player When the continuous performance ends, the game mode cannot be determined (changed), and there is a risk that problems such as game balls will be wasted.

Therefore, there is a demand for conventional pachinko machines to provide greater excitement for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WC1. A first execution means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first start condition is satisfied;
A second execution means for executing a second game operation when a second start condition different from the first start condition is satisfied;
a first storage means for storing the satisfaction of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit value;
A second storage means for storing the satisfaction of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit value;
and an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to establish the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to establish the second starting condition,
A first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation operation in a predetermined game state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting a predetermined numerical value of the first counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game rotation operation in the predetermined game state;
information setting means for setting specific numerical information to a second counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance;
an update means for updating the specific numerical value information of the second counting means when a predetermined update condition is satisfied;
A continuation means for continuously executing the specific performance during a predetermined state until the first counting means is decremented to a specific value when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed;
a specific correspondence display execution means for, when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific presentation is being performed, setting specific numerical information in the second counting means, but not executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the set specific numerical information of the second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means, when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific presentation is being performed, but not executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific presentation,
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming mode after the end of the specific presentation when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second gaming operation while the specific presentation is being executed is the same as the gaming mode after the end of the specific presentation when the specific condition is not met during the execution of the second gaming operation while the specific presentation is being executed.

According to the means WC1, the same effects as the means WA1 are achieved. In addition, in this means, during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific effect, the game mode after the end of the specific effect (for example, the shooting mode of the game ball) when the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition The game mode after the end of the specific performance in the case where the above is not established is the same.

This allows the player to decide (change) the game mode when the specific presentation ends, regardless of whether the specific condition is met or not, and prevents the occurrence of problems such as the unnecessary consumption of game balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Means WC2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to the means WC1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WC2, the same effects as the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WC3. A trigger ball entry means (e.g., a through gate) is provided at a position where only the game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
The gaming machine described in means WC2 is characterized in that, when a predetermined opening condition is met due to the entry or passage of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means, the trigger ball entry means has at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty entering, as the second auxiliary state (low support state), and an open state in which the gaming ball can or has difficulty entering, as the first auxiliary state (high support state).

According to the means WC3, the same effects as the means WA3 are achieved.

Means WC4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (e.g., high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be granted to a player can be generated,
A gaming machine described in means WC2 or WC3, characterized in that the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the second start entry means, and the first special gaming state generated by a gaming ball entering the specific entry section are configured so that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (e.g., a high support state) being awarded to the player is greater than the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the first start entry means.

The above-mentioned means WC4 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA4.

Means WC5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WC2 to means WC4 characterized in that, when there is a variable display held by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display held by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WC5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WC6. The means described in any one of means WC1 to WC5, characterized in that, when executing the specific correspondence display, the specific correspondence display execution means clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. gaming machines.

According to the means WC6, the same effects as the means WB1 are achieved.

Means WC7. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not. A gaming machine according to any one of means WC1 to WC6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

According to the means WC7, the same effects as the means WD1 described later are achieved.

Means WC8. A gaming machine described in any one of means WC1 to WC7, characterized in that during the specific gaming state, the time of a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations to be executed.

The above-mentioned stage WC8 provides the same effect as the means WE1 described below.

Means WC9. In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of characterized means WC1 to WC8.

The above WC9 provides the same effect as the means WF1 described below.

Conventional assignment WD. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

In addition, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur simultaneously while a specific gaming state is being executed.

In this case, since the occurrence of a higher-level game state is desirable for the player, a notification corresponding to the higher-level game state or a notification indicating that a higher-level game state has overlapped can provide greater interest to the player.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower game states overlap midway through, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to provide appropriate notifications without reducing the player's interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further increase interest, it is also conceivable to add a configuration in which a lottery is conducted during the continuation performance to generate a specific game state (such as a time-saving mode that does not result in a high support state) that is less advantageous to the player than a big win, small win, high support state, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is one that is of less interest to players than a big win, a small win, etc., even if a specific game state is won while a continuation presentation is being executed, if a notification presentation that notifies the player that a specific game state has been won is given priority over the continuation presentation (for example, by interrupting or interrupting the continuation presentation), there is a risk that the interest of the player will decrease.

In response to this, for example, if a specific condition that can cause a specific game state (such as a time-saving mode that does not result in a high support state) is met during the execution of the second variable display (such as while the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display is being consumed) while a continuation effect (such as a continuation chance effect) is being executed, the specific game state will progress internally, such as by starting to count the second variable display related to the specific game state, but if a specific corresponding display such as a corresponding notification effect is not executed and a specific corresponding display is executed for the number of times remaining at that time after the continuation effect ends, there is a risk that the specific corresponding display will suddenly start without any warning after the continuation effect ends.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WD1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. specific response display execution means for executing;
During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

According to the means WD1, the same effects as those of the means WA1 are achieved. In addition, the present means is configured such that the effect display mode after the specific effect is completed depends on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at the time of the end of the specific effect.

For the player, this configuration can be a display effect that indicates whether or not to move to a specific gaming state after the end of a specific effect, so even if the specific effect does not shift to a state advantageous to the player, the player It is possible to give new hope to players and improve their desire to play. As a result, it is possible to provide a step-by-step performance that gives the player a sense of expectation, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Means WD2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to means WD1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WD2, the same effects as the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WD3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

The above-mentioned means WD3 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA3.

Means WD4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (e.g., high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be granted to a player can be generated,
A gaming machine described in means WD2 or WD3, characterized in that the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the second start entry means, and the first special gaming state generated by a gaming ball entering the specific entry section, are configured so that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (e.g., a high support state) being awarded to the player is greater than the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the first start entry means.

According to the means WD4, the same effects as the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WD5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery caused by the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for causing the second variable display executed by the special display means to wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WD2 to means WD4 characterized in that when there is a variable display that is put on hold by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display that is put on hold by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WD5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WD6. A gaming machine described in any one of means WD1 to WD5, characterized in that the specific response display execution means, when executing the specific response display, clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time.

According to the means WD6, the same effects as the means WB1 are achieved.

Means WD7. A gaming mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance, and the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to any one of means WD1 to WD6, wherein the gaming mode after the end of the specific effect is the same as the gaming mode when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect.

According to the means WD7, the same effects as the means WC1 are achieved.

Means WD8. A gaming machine described in any one of means WD1 to WD7, characterized in that during the specific gaming state, the time of a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations to be executed.

According to the stage WD8, the same effects as the means WE1 described later are achieved.

Means WD9. A gaming machine according to any one of means WD1 to WD8, characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of notifying or suggesting, in addition to the specific response display, that the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation while the specific performance is being executed.

The above WD9 provides the same effect as the means WF1 described below.

Conventional subject WE. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

A type of gaming machine known is a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area, a lottery is held based on the gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and if a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is created (see, for example, JP 2013-31769 A).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

In addition, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur simultaneously while a specific gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower game states overlap midway through, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to provide appropriate notifications without reducing the player's interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration related to the type 1/type 2 mixed machine described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed in the variable display means, and after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second variable display that entered the second start ball entry means and was reserved and stored during the high support state (while the remaining reserved portion of the second variable display is being consumed), a gaming machine is seen that aims to increase the interest of the player.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used) while a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) When a specific condition that allows a shortcut mode (such as a shortened mode) to occur is satisfied, the specific gaming state is internally advanced, such as by starting counting on the second variable display related to the specific gaming state, but the corresponding notification effect is If the configuration is such that a specific response display is not executed, but after the continuation performance ends, a specific response display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point, a variety of performances can be performed during the continuation period of the specific gaming state. If you try to do this, there is a risk that the process will become complicated.

Therefore, there is a demand for conventional pachinko machines to provide greater excitement for players.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can provide appropriate notification when game states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and can also increase the player's interest.

Means WE1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation in which the specific performance is executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. does not execute the specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and displays the specific response corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect. A specific corresponding display execution means for executing the display,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

The above-mentioned means WE1 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA1. In addition, this means is configured to set the time of a predetermined game operation according to the number of game operations to be executed during a specific game state.

This configuration is based on an operation pattern table that defines the operation time of each game operation during the duration of a specific game state (for example, the first game operation time is "5 seconds", the second game operation time is "7 seconds", etc.). This can be realized by providing an operation pattern table, etc. that defines the 30th game operation time "10 seconds" and the operation time for 30 game operations.

Thereby, it is possible to execute a series of effects (continuous effects) spanning multiple game operations during the duration of the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, since there is no need to perform processing to determine the operation time each time a game operation is executed, the processing can be simplified.

Means WE2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to the means WE1, characterized in that it comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WE2, the same effects as the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WE3. A trigger ball entry means (e.g., a through gate) is provided at a position where only the game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
The gaming machine described in means WC2 is characterized in that, when a predetermined opening condition is met due to the entry or passage of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means, the trigger ball entry means has at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty entering, as the second auxiliary state (low support state), and an open state in which the gaming ball can or has difficulty entering, as the first auxiliary state (high support state).

According to the above-mentioned means WE3, the same effects as the above-mentioned means WA3 are achieved.

Means WE4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (e.g., high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be granted to a player can be generated,
A gaming machine described in means WE2 or WE3, characterized in that the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the second start entry means, and the first special gaming state generated by a gaming ball entering the specific entry section, are configured so that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (e.g., a high support state) being awarded to the player is greater than the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the first start entry means.

According to the means WE4, the same effects as the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WE5. As the first storage means, a first holding means for storing the result of the first winning/losing lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means, and making the first variable display executed by the first special display means wait until the end of the first variable display that has already been executed based on the lottery result;
The second storage means is provided with a second holding means for storing a result of the first winning/losing lottery or the second winning/losing lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means, and making the second variable display executed by the second special display means based on the lottery result wait until the second variable display already executed is finished;
A gaming machine described in any of means WE2 to WE4, characterized in that when there are variable displays pending by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display pending by the second holding means is executed as a priority.

The above-mentioned means WE5 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA5.

Means WE6. A gaming machine described in any one of means WE1 to WE5, characterized in that the specific response display execution means, when executing the specific response display, clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time.

The above-mentioned means WE6 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WB1.

Means WE7. A gaming machine described in any one of means WE1 to WE6, characterized in that the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is not met during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed.

The above-mentioned means WE7 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WC1.

Means WE8. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of means WE1 to WE7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

The above-mentioned means WE8 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WD1.

Means WE9. A gaming machine described in any one of means WE1 to WE8, characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of notifying or suggesting, in addition to the specific response display, that the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation while the specific performance is being executed.

According to the above-mentioned WE9, the same effects as the means WF1 described later are achieved.

Conventional problem WF. Conventionally, gaming machines have multiple game states with different degrees of advantage, and when the conditions for each occurrence are met, the corresponding game state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur overlappingly while a predetermined gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower game states overlap midway through, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to provide appropriate notifications without reducing the player's interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration related to the type 1/type 2 mixed machine described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed in the variable display means, and after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second variable display that entered the second start ball entry means and was reserved and stored during the high support state (while the remaining reserved portion of the second variable display is being consumed), a gaming machine is seen that aims to increase the interest of the player.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used) while a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) When a specific condition that allows a shortcut mode (such as a shortened mode) to occur is satisfied, the specific gaming state is internally advanced, such as by starting counting on the second variable display related to the specific gaming state, but the corresponding notification effect is If the configuration is such that the specific response display is not executed, but the specific response display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point after the end of the continuous performance, the specific response display will be suddenly specified without any warning after the end of the continuous performance. There is a possibility that the configuration is such that the correspondence display is started.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WF1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. specific response display execution means for executing;
In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the game apparatus further comprises: A gaming machine featuring:

The above-mentioned means WF1 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA1. In addition, this means is configured to include a means (such as a specified light-emitting means or a means for outputting sound) that can notify or suggest that a specific condition is met during the execution of the second game rotation operation in which a specific presentation is being executed, in addition to the specific response display (display means).

This allows the player to predict that the specific condition will be met before the end of the specific effect, allowing the player to prepare for after the specific effect ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions such as the unnecessary consumption of game balls, and to prevent a decline in the player's interest.

Means WF2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
A game according to means WF1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WF2, the same effects as those of the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WF3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

The above-mentioned means WF3 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA3.

Means WF4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (e.g., high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be granted to a player can be generated,
A gaming machine described in means WF2 or WF3, characterized in that the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the second start entry means, and the first special gaming state generated by a gaming ball entering the specific entry section, are configured so that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (e.g., a high support state) being awarded to the player is greater than the first special gaming state generated based on the first win/lose lottery caused by a gaming ball entering the first start entry means.

The above-mentioned means WF4 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA4.

Means WF5. As the first storage means, a first holding means for storing the result of the first winning/losing lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and making the first variable display executed by the first special display means wait until the end of the first variable display that has already been executed based on the lottery result;
The second storage means is provided with a second holding means for storing a result of the first winning/losing lottery or the second winning/losing lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means, and making the second variable display executed by the second special display means based on the lottery result wait until the second variable display already executed is finished;
A gaming machine described in any of means WF2 to WF4, characterized in that when there are variable displays waiting to be held by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display waiting to be held by the second holding means is executed as a priority.

The above-mentioned means WF5 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WA5.

Means WF6. The specific correspondence display execution means is characterized in that when executing the specific correspondence display, it clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. gaming machines.

According to the means WF6, the same effects as those of the means WB1 are achieved.

Means WF7. A gaming machine described in any one of means WF1 to WF6, characterized in that the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is not met during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed.

According to the means WF7, the same effects as those of the means WC1 are achieved.

Means WF8. A gaming machine described in any one of means WF1 to WF7, characterized in that the presentation display mode after the end of the specific presentation is different when the specific condition is met and when the specific condition is not met during the execution of the second game operation while the specific presentation is being executed.

The above-mentioned means WF8 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means WD1.

Means WF9. The gaming machine according to any one of means WF1 to WF8, wherein during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WF9, the same effects as the means WE1 can be achieved.

In addition, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WA1 to WA10 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WA1 to WA10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WB1 to WB9, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WE1 to WE9, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WF1 to WF9.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WB1 to WB9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WD1 to WD9 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WA1 to WA10, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WB1 to WB9, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WE1 to WE9, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means WF1 to WF9.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WE1 to WE9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WA1 to WA10, to the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. A more detailed example of the form is "a pinball gaming machine equipped with an operating means (launch handle, etc.) operated by a player, a launching means (launching device, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a gaming area (game board, etc.) to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (general entry port, variable entry device, start entry port, etc.) arranged in the gaming area."

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the pinball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

10... Pachinko machine, 30... Game board, 42... Performance display device, 32A... First variable winning device, 32B... Second variable winning device, 33WA... First start winning section, 33WB... Second start winning section, 34... Through gate, 35... Variable display unit.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
A variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter the ball;
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined ball is entered into the special ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is configured to allow only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the inner area,
This gaming machine is
A first opportunity ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game;
A second opportunity ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game;
A first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
The game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entry means is configured to be changed by a variable means capable of changing the value of a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined route to the special ball entry means by changing a state between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
The variable means is configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means;
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one location and allows the game balls to pass through it one at a time;
A ball passage capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a restricting means is provided which allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball from passing in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game balls that have entered the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means are configured not to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter,
This gaming machine is
a presentation means for performing a pre-presentation during an operation standby period that can be set at least before the variable means controls the game to the advantageous state after the predetermined lottery result is shown on a predetermined display means;
The performance means is configured to select the advance performance to be executed corresponding to the operation standby period from among the plurality of advance performances provided when executing the advance performance,
The ball passage is configured such that an entrance area is provided at only one location, and only the game ball that has passed through the entrance area can be guided to the specific area;
A game ball that does not pass through the entrance area of the ball passage is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area,
This gaming machine is
The game ball that has passed through the specific area and flowed down the first route may or may not enter the second opportunity ball entry means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a gaming ball that passes through the specific area and flows down the second route may or may not enter the first trigger ball entry means.

Images